VMSVT

Sperry Marine, Inc.
Interfacing, Installation and Service of

the Voyage Management System,
Vision Technology (VMS-VT)
Sperry Marine, Inc.
Interfacing, Installation and Service of

the Voyage Management System,
Vision Technology (VMS-VT)
Sperry Marine Inc.

1070 Seminole Trail
Charlottesville, Virginia 22901-2891
USA
JA26-5884 REVISION ORIGINAL NOVEMBER 1996

NOTICE
This Document and the information disclosed herein are proprietary data of Sperry Marine, Inc.
Neither this document nor the information contained herein shall be reproduced, used or disclosed
to others without the written authorization of Sperry Marine, Inc. Notice - Freedom of Information
Act (5 USC) and disclosure of confidential information generally (18 USC 1905): This document is
being furnished in confidence by Sperry Marine, Inc. The information disclosed herein falls within
exemption (b) (4) of 5 USC 552 and the prohibitions of 18 USC 1905.
© Copyright 1996 by Sperry Marine Inc. All Rights Reserved.

1070 Seminole Trail
Charlottesville, VA 22901
Printed in U.S.A.
i
Preface
This manual is intended as the primary technical reference for Sperry Marine’s Voyage Management System
(VMS) products. It is intended to serve as a hardware requirements specification for the VMS software, as a
hardware installation guide, and as a specification for all VMS peripherals and interfaces. The intended audience
includes system engineers and others designing systems using the VMS, as well as service personnel installing
or servicing the VMS.
How to Use This Manual
This manual is organized as a reference, not as a primer or introduction to the subject. First time readers should
scan the Table of Contents to see the organization of the manual or to find specific topics of interest.
Chapter 1: Overview of the Voyage Management System is designed to be a brief introduction to the major
subsystems found in the VMS products and to the general technologies used in interfacing the Planning Station
to the rest of the Integrated Bridge System (IBS).
Chapter 2: Hardware Specifications and Component Configuration contains detailed information about every
major hardware component used in VMS products at this time. Every section contains the part number of the
component - both Sperry Marine’s and the Vendor’s. Drawings of the component help in identification and in
locating configuration and interfacing items, such as switches, jumpers, connectors, etc.
Chapter 3: Software Installation and Maintenance contains the information necessary to install and configure
the VMS software, Windows NT software, and all necessary hardware drivers. There is a section on Off-Line File
Management which covers file maintenance (copying files, etc.) for all the station PCS from a local computer.
Chapter 4: Peripheral and Interface Specifications contains details for interfacing different types of peripheral
and external devices to the VMS.
Appendix A: Configuring VMS-VT contains a copy of the Sperry Marine Document Configuring VMS-VT. This
document contains the information required to setup the VMS CONFIG.INI file.
Appendix B: Drawings contains copies of the cabinet drawings and interconnection diagrams.
Related Publications
VMS-VT Operator’s Manual, JA26-5883. This manual describes the user interface and operation of the VMS-
VT system.
ii
Conventions Used In This Manual
NOTE:
NOTES are intended to emphasize certain important information about a subject.
CAUTION
A CAUTION note calls attention to details of equipment operation or installation which,

if ignored, could result in equipment damage - in some cases serious damage.
WARNING!
WARNINGS are the most serious statements of all. They are intended to bring attention
to details of operation or installation which, if ignored, threaten personal injury or even
the safety of the vessel. Pay particular to all WARNINGS!
SAFETY SUMMARY
The following are general safety precautions that are not related to any specific procedures and therefore do
not appear elsewhere in this publication. These are recommended precautions that personnel must understand
and apply during many phases of operation and maintenance.
KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS
Observe all safety regulations. Do not replace components or make adjustments inside the equipment with
the high voltage supply turned on. Under certain conditions, dangerous potentials may exist when the power
control is in the off position, due to charges retained by capacitors. To avoid casualties, always remove
power and discharge and ground a circuit before touching it.
DO NOT SERVICE OR ADJUST ALONE
Under no circumstances should any person service or adjust the equipment except in the presence of someone
who is capable of rendering aid.
RESUSCITATION
Personnel working with or near high voltages should be familiar with modern methods of resuscitation.
iii
The following warnings/cautions appear in text in this manual and are repeated here for emphasis:
WARNING!
If the chassis ground is removed from the power conditioner, all units receiving power
from the power conditioner must be individually grounded with chassis grounds.
(Page 2-198, 2-205).
WARNING!
Make sure that the power conditioner is securely bolted down.
There is no over current protection provided on these units. It is highly recommended that a
circuit breaker, or similar protection device, be installed preceding the power conditioner.
(Page 2-200, 2-207).
WARNING!
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT IN THE POWER CONDITIONER.

(Page 2-201, 2-208).
WARNING!
MAKE SURE THE RETAINING ARMS ARE SECURE AND CANNOT SLOP OR
SPREAD, WRAP DUCT TAPE (OR EQUIVALENT) AROUND THE FIXTURE’S
JOINTS TO PREVENT PINCHING WHEN GRASPED. GLOVES SHOULD ALSO
BE WORN. (Pages 2-84, 2-88).
iv
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any
components. PC motherboards contain static sensitive parts, therefore an anti-static
wrist strap should be worn. (Pages 2-6, 2-10).
CAUTION
These switches have been set by the factory for your system. Do not change these
switches from the factory setting. (Page 2-11).
CAUTION
Don’t this switch unless the documentation supplied with the upgrade CPU indicates
the VRE voltage range. (Page 2-11).
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards,
cables or components. (Page 2-12).
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards or
cables. (Pages 2-31, 2-34, 2-40, 2-43, 2-52, 2-54, 2-56, 2-59, 2-62, 2-65, 2-121, 2-126, 2-
136, 2-144, 2-154, 2-165, 2-177, 2-181, 2-184, 2-185, 2-187).
CAUTION
monitors or cables. (Pages 2-67, 2-70, 2-75, 2-77, 2-79, 2-81, 2-85, 2-89, 2-91)
v
CAUTION
Before connecting/disconnecting cables to the controller, turn off power to the

computer and monitor.
Before power is ever applied to the system, it is very important that the ground
terminal provided in the touchscreen cable be firmly grounded to the monitor chassis
using a star washer, and that the monitor, controller, and cabinet all be grounded to
the ship's structure (or earth, in land-based installations). Both the monitor and
touchscreen are powerful generators of static electrical forces that can destroy the
touchscreen controller if not properly shunted to ground. (Page 2-102).
CAUTION
Always wait at least five seconds after turning the monitor or computer power off
before re-applying power. Re-applying power too quickly can cause some
unprotected monitor power supplies to fail. (Page 2-107).
CAUTION
Do not attempt to simply pull the touchscreen free of the monitor's display
tube (CRT). Carefully remove all gasket material which secures the
touchscreen. (Page 2-109, 2-113).
CAUTION
terminal provided in the touchscreen cable be firmly grounded to the monitor chassis
using a star washer, and that the monitor, controller, and cabinet all be grounded to
the ship's structure (or earth, in land-based installations). Both the monitor and
touchscreen are powerful generators of static electrical forces that can destroy the
touchscreen controller if not properly shunted to ground. (Page 2-111, 2-115).
vi
CAUTION
Be certain that the touchscreen is not touching any metal surface, and check
that there is approximately 1.5 mm (1/16 inch) clearance between the back
surface of the touchscreen and the front surface of the monitor. (Pages 2-110,
2-114).
CAUTION
Power down the PC before connecting the keyboard cable.( Page 2-118).
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing the printer.
(Page 2-191).
CAUTION
Check each unit for proper voltage tap selection per Table 2-42. A voltage tap change
may be required before installation. Insure that the combined power requirements of
all equipment served by the Oneac does not exceed 1440 VA. (Page 2-199).
CAUTION
all equipment served by the Oneac does not exceed 2880 VA. (Page 2-206).
CAUTION
This procedure is specific to the 486/66 processor shipped with VMS-VT systems.
Attempts to upgrade machines other than Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-50 may result
in permanent damage to the processor chip and motherboard. Please call
Charlottesville Engineering to ensure compatibility with your system. (Page 2-211).
vii
CAUTION
All parts in this kit are static sensitive. Use the ground strap provided in the kit before
handling any computer components. (Page 2-212).
CAUTION
If the DX5-133 is improperly installed, it will be destroyed. Be certain of the location

of pin and the orientation of the DX5-133 before inserting. (Page 2-213).
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any modules
or cables. (Page 2-149, 2-157).
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing the Relay Assembly.
(Page 2-172).
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing the CD-ROM drive.
(Page 2-48).
CAUTION
Use of this serial interface could degrade the computer’s system performance. It is
recommended that any system using this interface be upgraded to the RocketPort 16.
(Page 2-140).
CAUTION
There is no protection against reverse polarity. Reversing the power supply

connections can destroy any installed modules. (Page 2-159).
viii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter Title Page
1 Overview of the Voyage Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Chapter 1: Overview of the Voyage Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 Integrated Bridge Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2 The Range of Integrated Bridge Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.3 The VMS Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.3.1 VMS Part Number Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Navigation Station Subsystem Part Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Conning Station Subsystem Part Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Planning Station Subsystem Part Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.3.2 The Navigation Station Substation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.3.3 Conning Station Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.3.4 The Planning Station Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.3.5 The Voyage Recorder Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.4 Methods of Interfacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Synchro Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Analog Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Pulse Log Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Serial Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
2 Hardware Specifications and Component Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1 Cabinets and Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.1 2500 Stand Mount, Sperry Marine P/N 1981324 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.1.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.1.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.1.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.1.4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.2 VMS-VT 21" Cabinet Assembly, Sperry Marine P/N 1981180-VAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.1.2.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.1.2.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.1.2.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.1.2.4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.1.3 VMS-VT Nav Station 26" Display Console, Sperry Marine P/N 1981181 . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.3.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.3.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.3.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.3.4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.2 Processors/Motherboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2.1 Young Microsystems VEGA 486/DX2 66 MHZ Motherboard, Sperry Marine P/N
1810633-147 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2.1.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2.1.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2.1.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS - (Continued)
Chapter Title Page
2.2.1.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Jumper Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Memory SIMMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Location of Expansion Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.2.1.5 Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
CMOS Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.2.1.6 Potential Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.2.2 Pentium 100MHz Motherboard, Sperry Marine P/N 1813059 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.2.2.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.2.2.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.2.2.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.2.2.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Jumper Blocks/DIP Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.2.2.5 Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Memory SIMMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Mount The Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Hard Disk Drive LED Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Keylock/Power LED Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Fan Power Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Speaker Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
CD-ROM Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Location of Expansion Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
CMOS Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.2.2.6 BIOS Update And Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Using the Upgrade Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
BIOS Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2.2.2.7 Potential Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2.3 SCSI Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2.3.1 Control Concepts Combination I/O Board, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-181 . . . . . . . 2-27
2.3.1.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2.3.1.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2.3.1.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
PC Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Serial Port Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2.3.1.4 Hardware Setup Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Interrupts And the Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
External SCSI Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Using a Previously Formatted Disk With The Combination I/O Board . . . . . . . . 2-29
2.3.1.5 Configuration Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2.3.1.6 Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
2.3.1.7 Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
2.3.1.8 Replaceable Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
2.3.1.9 Common Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
x
Chapter Title Page
2.3.2 Adaptec AHA-2940 SCSI Host Adapter Card, Sperry Marine P/N 1813061 . . . . . . . . 2-33
2.3.2.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
2.3.2.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
2.3.2.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
PC Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.3.2.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.3.2.5 Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.3.2.8 Common Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
2.4 Hard Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2.4.1 Seagate 545MB SCSI Hard Drive, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-186 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2.4.1.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2.4.1.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2.4.1.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2.4.1.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Hard Disk Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
2.4.2 Seagate 1.2GB SCSI Hard Drive, Sperry Marine P/N 1813064 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2.4.2.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2.4.2.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2.4.2.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2.4.2.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Hard Disk Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
2.5 CD-ROM Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.5.1 NEC Multispin CD-ROM Reader, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-173 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.5.1.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.5.1.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.5.1.3 Disk Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Inserting A Disk Into The Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Inserting/Removing Cartridge To The Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.5.1.4 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
2.5.1.5 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Diagnostic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Emergency Cartridge Eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
xi
Chapter Title Page
2.6 Floppy Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

2.6.1 Teac 3 ½-Inch Diskette Drive, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
2.6.1.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
2.6.1.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
2.6.1.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
2.6.1.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
2.6.2 Sony 3 ½-Inch Diskette Drive, Sperry Marine P/N 1811432 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
2.6.2.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
2.6.2.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
2.6.2.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
2.6.2.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
2.7 Graphics Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
2.7.1 ATI Technologies Mach64 Graphics Card, Sperry Marine P/N 1813060 . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
2.7.1.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
2.7.1.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
2.7.1.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
2.7.1.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
BIOS Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Installing Windows NT Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
2.7.2 ATI Technologies Mach64 Graphics Card, Sperry Marine P/N 1812819 . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
2.7.2.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
2.7.2.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
2.7.2.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
2.7.2.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
BIOS Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
2.7.3 ATI Technologies Ultra Pro Mach32 Graphics Card, Sperry Marine P/N 1812387
..................................................................... 2-61
2.7.3.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
2.7.3.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
2.7.3.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
2.7.3.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
xii
Chapter Title Page

BIOS Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
2.7.4 Photron Torpedo Graphics Card, Sperry Marine P/N 1812423-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
2.7.4.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
2.7.4.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
2.7.4.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
2.7.4.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
2.8 Vision Display Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
2.8.1 21" Table Top Color Display System, Sperry Marine P/N 1812352 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
2.8.1.1 Monitor Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
2.8.1.2 Monitor Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
2.8.1.3 Monitor Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
2.8.1.4 Touch screen Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
2.8.1.5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
2.8.2 21" Console Mount Color Display System, Sperry Marine P/N 1812386 . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Power Dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
2.8.2.3 Monitor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Image Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Degaussing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
2.8.2.5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
2.8.3 21" Console Mount Color Display System With Touch screen, Sperry Marine P/N 1812388 2-72
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
2.8.3.3 Monitor Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Image Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Degaussing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
2.8.3.5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
xiii
Chapter Title Page
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
2.8.4.5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
2.8.5.2 Application Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
2.8.5.5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
2.8.6 21" Table Top Color Display System With Touch screen, Sperry Marine P/N 1812392
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
2.8.6.5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
2.8.7.3 Monitor Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
2.8.7.5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
2.8.8 26" Console Mount Color Display System With Touch screen, Sperry Marine P/N 1812581 2-83
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
xiv
Chapter Title Page

Image Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Degaussing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
2.8.8.5 Lifting and Transporting the Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
2.8.8.6 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
Image Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
Degaussing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
2.8.9.5 Lifting and Transporting the Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
2.8.9.6 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
2.8.10.5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
2.8.11 NEC Multisync XP Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
2.8.11.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
2.8.11.2 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
2.8.11.3 Setup/Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
On-Screen Manager (OSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
2.9 Touchscreens and Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
2.9.1 MicroTouch Touchscreen Controller, Sperry Marine P/N 1812380-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
2.9.1.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
2.9.1.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
2.9.1.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
Power Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
Touchscreen Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
Adapter Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
Keyboard Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
2.9.1.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
xv
Chapter Title Page
2.9.1.6 Software Installation & Calibration For MicroTouch Controller, P/N 14-05
.................................................................... 2-102
Installing The Sperry Touchscreen Driver, P/N 1812125-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
Installing The Microtouch Touchscreen Driver, P/N 1813232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105
2.9.1.7 Software Installing & Calibration For MicroTouch Controller, P/N 14-78
.................................................................... 2-106
2.9.1.8 Common Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
2.9.1.9 Replaceable Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
2.9.2 MicroTouch 19" Capacitive Touchscreen, Sperry Marine P/N 1978079-2
................................................................ 2-108
2.9.2.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
2.9.2.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
2.9.2.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
2.9.2.4 Removing the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
2.9.2.5 Installing the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109
2.9.2.6 Common Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111
2.9.3 MicroTouch 24" Touchscreen, Sperry Marine P/N 1812567 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
2.9.3.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
2.9.3.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
2.9.3.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
2.9.3.4 Replacing the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
Removing the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
2.9.3.5 Installing the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
2.9.3.6 Common Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-115
2.10 Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
2.10.1 IBM-to-PS/2 Keyboard Adapter Cable, Sperry Marine P/N 1813063 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
2.10.1.1 Vendor and Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
2.10.1.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
2.10.2 Key Tronics KB101 Enhanced Keyboard, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-105 . . . . . . . 2-117
2.10.2.1 Vendor and Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117
2.10.2.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117
2.10.2.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117
2.10.2.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
2.10.2.6 Software Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
2.10.2.7 Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
2.11 SeaNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-120
2.11.1 SeaNET Specifications & Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-120
2.11.1.1 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-120
Cable Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121
Cable Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-123
Station Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-123
2.11.1.3 Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-123
xvi
Chapter Title Page
2.11.2 Adtron AE-200LC Ethernet Adapter Card, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-175 . . . . . . 2-125
2.11.2.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
2.11.2.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
2.11.2.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
PC Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
2.11.2.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
2.11.2.5 Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
2.11.2.7 Common Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127
LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127
2.12 Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-128
2.12.1 Serial Interface Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-128
2.12.1.1 Electrical Protocols Encountered in Serial Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-129
2.12.1.2 Data Transmission Formats (Not Specified by EIA Standards) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-129
2.12.1.3 Data Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-130
2.12.1.4 IBM PC Serial Port Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-130
2.12.1.5 Debugging tools for serial interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-131
2.12.2 RocketPort 16-Port Serial Interface, Sperry Marine P/N 1812576 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
2.12.2.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
2.12.2.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
2.12.2.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
PC Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
Host Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
Serial Port Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
2.12.2.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-135
RocketPort Controller Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-135
Connector Interface Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-135
Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-136
2.12.2.7 RocketPort Software Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-137
Changing Device Driver Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-137
Viewing The Current Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138
Changing The Default Settings for Boot-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138
Changing The Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138
Removing The Device Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139
Resolving Installation Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139
2.12.2.8 Common Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-140
2.12.3 Hostess 550/16 Serial Interface, Sperry Marine P/N 1812346 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-140
2.12.3.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-140
2.12.3.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-140
xvii
Chapter Title Page
2.12.3.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-140

PC Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-140
Host Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-140
Serial Port Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-140
2.12.3.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142
Hostess Interface Board Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142
Connector Interface Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142
2.12.3.7 Common Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-146
2.12.4 Other Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-146
2.12.5 NMEA Splitter/Buffer Assembly, Sperry Marine P/N 1812195 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-147
2.12.5.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-147
2.12.5.2 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-147
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-148
Input Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-148
Output Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-148
2.12.5.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-148
2.12.5.4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-149
2.13 Analog Interface Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-151
2.13.1 MetraByte DAS-4 Data Acquisition Card, Sperry Marine P/N 1810320 . . . . . . . . . . . 2-152
2.13.1.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-152
2.13.1.2 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-153
PC Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-153
External Interface Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-153
2.13.1.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-153
Base Address Switches and IRQ Level Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-154
A/D Trimmer Potentiometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-154
2.13.2 MetraByte 16 Channel Analog-to-Digital Isolator Kit, Sperry Marine P/N 1812402
.................................................................... 2-156
2.13.2.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-156
2.13.2.2 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-157
DAS-4 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-157
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-157
Analog I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-157
2.13.2.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-157
xviii
Chapter Title Page
2.13.3 4-Channel Analog Kit, Sperry Marine P/N 1820512 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-158

2.13.3.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-159
2.13.3.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-159
2.13.3.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-159
Card Installed In The Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-159
Screw Terminal I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-159
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-159
Input Signals To Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-159
Output Signals From Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-159
2.13.3.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-160
Differential vs. Single-Ended Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-160
2.13.3.5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-160
2.13.4 Analog I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-161
2.13.4.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-161
2.13.4.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-162
2.13.4.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-162
2.13.5 MetraByte DAS-1602 I/O Interface Card, Sperry Marine P/N 1812689 . . . . . . . . . . . 2-163
2.13.5.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-163
2.13.5.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-163
Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-163
Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-164
Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-164
Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-164
2.13.5.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-164
2.13.5.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-165
2.13.6 Kamewa Interface Kit, Sperry Marine P/N 1810328 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-166
2.13.6.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-166
2.13.6.2 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-166
2.13.6.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-166
Mounting The STA-MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-166
Mounting The Alarm Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-167
Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-167
2.13.7 Alarm Relay Assembly, Sperry Marine P/N 1810822 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-171
2.13.7.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-172
2.13.7.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-172
xix
Chapter Title Page
2.13.7.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-172

Wiring for Watch-1 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-173
Wiring for the Audible Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-173
2.13.7.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-174
2.13.7.6 Software Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-174
2.14 Vision Synchro Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-175
2.14.1 Single Channel 16-Bit Synchro Card Assembly, Sperry Marine P/N 1812405 . . . . . . 2-175
2.14.1.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-175
2.14.1.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-175
2.14.1.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-176
PC Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-176
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-176
Synchro Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-176
2.14.1.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-176
2.14.1.5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-177
Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-178
Replaceable Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-178
2.14.2 Dual Channel 16-Bit Synchro Card Assembly, Sperry Marine P/N 1812406 . . . . . . . 2-179
2.14.2.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-179
2.14.2.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-179
2.14.2.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180
PC Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180
Synchro Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180
2.14.2.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180
2.14.2.5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-181
Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-182
Replaceable Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-182
2.15 Vision Pointing Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-183
2.15.1 Location of COM Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-183
2.15.2 Microsoft Mouse, Sperry Marine P/N 1812410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-184
2.15.2.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-184
2.15.2.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-184
2.15.3 Vision Trackball, Sperry Marine P/N 1812464 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-185
2.15.3.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-185
2.15.3.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-185
xx
Chapter Title Page
2.15.4 Vision Digitizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-186

2.15.4.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-186
2.15.4.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-186
2.15.4.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-186
2.16 Vision Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-189
2.16.1 Parallel Interface DeskJet Printer, Sperry Marine P/N 1820332 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-189
2.16.1.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-189
2.16.1.2 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-190
PC Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-190
Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-190
2.16.1.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-190
Unpacking The Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-190
Electrical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-191
2.16.1.5 Installing The Printer Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-192
Initial Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-192
Installing The Black Print Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-193
2.17 Power Conditioning Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-195
2.17.1 1.4 KVA Vision Power Distribution System, Sperry Marine P/N 1812418 . . . . . . . . 2-195
2.17.1.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-195
2.17.1.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-196
2.17.1.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-196
AC Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-196
AC Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-196
2.17.1.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-196
2.17.2 2.8 KVA Vision Power Distribution System, Sperry Marine P/N 1812419
.................................................................... 2-202
2.17.2.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-202
2.17.2.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-203
2.17.2.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-203
AC Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-203
AC Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-203
2.17.2.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-203
2.17.3 Un-interruptable Power Supply, Sperry Marine P/N 1812295-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-209
2.17.3.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-209
2.17.3.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-210
2.17.3.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-210
2.17.3.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-210
xxi
Chapter Title Page
2.18 Vision Upgrade Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-211

2.18.1 CPU Upgrade Kit For 486 PCS, Sperry Marine P/N 1813194 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-211
2.18.1.1 Kit Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-211
2.18.1.2 Upgrade Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-211
2.18.2 CD-ROM Reader Upgrade, Sperry Marine P/N 1812421 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-214
3 Software Installation and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Off-Line File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.1 Procedure For Off-Line File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.1.1 Re-Install Normal Windows NT Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Re-Install Windows NT Program Manager: (un-protect system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Re-Install Normal Windows NT Logon: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.1.2 Disable Windows NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Install Auto Logon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Install Auto Program Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Install System Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3 Windows NT Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.3.1 Installing Windows NT from CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.3.2 Install Windows NT Using Diskettes: (If CD ROM Not Available) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.4 Install VMS Program: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.4.1 Install Drivers: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.4.2 Install DAS-4 Driver (If Part of System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.4.3 Install Sperry SYNCHRO Card (If Part of System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.4.4 Edit CONFIG.INI File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.4.5 Install Auto Logon: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.4.6 Install Auto Program Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.4.7 Install System Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.4.8 Edit TIMESYNC.INI File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.4.9 Install Printer (If Part of System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
4 Peripheral and Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Appendix A Configuring VMS-VT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Appendix B Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
xxii
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure Title Page
Figure 1-1: An Integrated Bridge System Based on the Sperry Marine Voyage Management System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Figure 1-2: Voyage Management System Part Number Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Figure 1-3: Navigation Station Subsystem Part Number Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Figure 1-4: Conning Station Subsystem Part Number Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Figure 1-5: Planning Station Subsystem Part Number Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Figure 1-6: Navigation Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Figure 1-7: Conning Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Figure 1-8: Planning Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Figure 2-1: Young 486/66 Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Figure 2-2: Installation of SIMM Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Figure 2-3: Pentium 100MHz Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Figure 2-4: Location of Pentium Jumpers and DIP Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Figure 2-5: Pentium AC Power Select Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Figure 2-6: Location of SIMM Sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Figure 2-7: Hard Drive Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Figure 2-8: Hard Disk LED Indicator Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Figure 2-9: Keylock/Power LED Indicator Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Figure 2-10: Fan Power Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Figure 2-11: Speaker Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Figure 2-12: Control Concepts Combination Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Figure 2-13: Adaptec AHA-2940 SCSI Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Figure 2-14: Seagate 545MB SCSI Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Figure 2-15: Seagate 545MB SCSI Hard Drive Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Figure 2-16: Seagate 1.2GB SCSI Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Figure 2-17: NEC Multispin CD-ROM Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Figure 2-18: NEC Multispin CD-ROM Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Figure 2-19: NEC Multispin CD-ROM Jumper Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Figure 2-20: NEC Multispin CD-ROM Mounting Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Figure 2-21: NEC LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Figure 2-22: NEC Emergency Cartridge Eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Figure 2-23: Teac 3 ½" Floppy Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Figure 2-24: Sony 3 ½" Floppy Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Figure 2-25: ATI Mach64 Graphics Card for PCI Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Figure 2-26: ATI Mach64 Graphics Card for VESA Local Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Figure 2-27: ATI Mach32 Graphics Card for VESA Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Figure 2-28: Photron Torpedo Graphics Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Figure 2-29: Assembly Components for 1812352 Display System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Figure 2-31: Mounting Details For 1812386 Display System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Figure 2-32: Rear Panel For 1812386 Display System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Figure 2-34: Mounting Details For 1812388 Display System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Figure 2-35: Rear Panel For 1812388 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
xxiii
LIST OF FIGURES - (Continued)
Figure Title Page

Figure 2-40: Controls for 1812581 Display System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
Figure 2-41: Monitor Transport Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
Figure 2-43: Rear Panel for 1812581 Display System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
Figure 2-44: Controls For 1812582 Display System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
Figure 2-45: Monitor Transport Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
Figure 2-47: Rear Panel for 1812582 Display System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
Figure 2-49: Mounting Bracket for 1980555 Display System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
Figure 2-50: Controls for NEC XP Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
Figure 2-51: MicroTouch Touchscreen Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
Figure 2-52: Keyboard Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
Figure 2-53: Touchscreen Controller Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
Figure 2-54: MicroTouch Systems Touchscreen For 21" Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
Figure 2-55: Applying the Tape to the Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-110
Figure 2-56: MicroTouch Systems Touchscreen For 26" Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
Figure 2-57: Applying the Tape to the Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114
Figure 2-58: IBM-to-PS/2 Keyboard Cable Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
Figure 2-59: Key Tronic KB101 Enhanced Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117
Figure 2-60: The KB101 Keyboard Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
Figure 2-61: Location of Configuration Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-119
Figure 2-62: Configuration Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-119
Figure 2-63: SeaNET Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-122
Figure 2-64: SeaNET Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-124
Figure 2-65: Adtron AE-200LC Ethernet Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-125
Figure 2-66: Adtron AE-200LC LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127
Figure 2-67: Typical RS-232 Signal Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-129
Figure 2-68: Typical RS-422 Signal Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-129
Figure 2-69: Typical Asynchronous Bit Sequence (8 Data Bits, 1 Stop Bit, Plus Parity Shown) . . . . . 2-130
Figure 2-70: RocketPort 16 ISA-Compatible Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
Figure 2-71: RocketPort 16 Connector Interface Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-134
Figure 2-72: RocketPort Controller DIP Switch Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-135
Figure 2-73: Hostess 550/16 Host Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-141
Figure 2-74: Hostess 550/16 Connector Interface Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142
Figure 2-75: Hostess 550/16 Jumper Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-144
Figure 2-76: NMEA Splitter/Buffer Assembly Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-147
Figure 2-77: The MetraByte DAS-4 Data Acquisition Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-152
Figure 2-78: Base Address Switches and IRQ Level Select Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-154
Figure 2-79: Analog to Digital Isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-156
Figure 2-80: 4-Channel Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-158
Figure 2-81: 4-Channel Analog Power Connections to DAS-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-160
xxiv
LIST OF FIGURES - (Continued)
Figure Title Page
Figure 2-82: Analog I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-161

Figure 2-83: DAS-1602 I/O Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-163
Figure 2-84: Kamewa Interface Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-168
Figure 2-85: Kamewa Interface Alarm Panel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-169
Figure 2-86: DAS-1602 Configuration For Kamewa Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-170
Figure 2-87: The Alarm Relay Interface Option for the VMS Command Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-171
Figure 2-88: Circuit Diagram of the Alarm Relay Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-172
Figure 2-89: Typical Wiring of the Alarm Relay Assembly for Watch-1 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-173
Figure 2-90: Typical Wiring of the Alarm Relay Assembly for Control of an Audible Alarm . . . . . . . 2-173
Figure 2-91: Single Channel Synchro Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-175
Figure 2-92: Single Channel Synchro Card Signal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-176
Figure 2-93: Dual Channel Synchro Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-179
Figure 2-94: Dual-Channel Synchro Card Signal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180
Figure 2-95: COM Ports for 486-PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-183
Figure 2-96: COM Ports for Pentium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-183
Figure 2-97: Vision Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-185
Figure 2-98: Vision Digitizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-186
Figure 2-99: Hewlett Packard DeskJet 600C Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-190
Figure 2-100: Connecting The Parallel Interface Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-191
Figure 2-101: Connecting The Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-192
Figure 2-102: Installing The Black Ink Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-193
Figure 2-103: Removing The Black Ink Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-194
Figure 2-104: Oneac 1.4 KVA Power Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-195
Figure 2-105: Terminal Blocks & Voltage Tap Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-196
Figure 2-106: Typical IBS Power Distribution Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-198
Figure 2-107: Removal Of Output Chassis Ground Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-199
Figure 2-108: Power Conditioner Wiring Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-200
Figure 2-109: Oneac 2.8 KVA Power Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-202
Figure 2-110: Terminal Block Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-203
Figure 2-111: Typical IBS Power Distribution Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-205
Figure 2-112: Removal Of Output Chassis Ground Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-206
Figure 2-113: Power Conditioner Wiring Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-207
Figure 2-114: Un-interruptible Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-209
Figure 2-115: Un-interruptible Power Supply Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-210
Figure 2-116: Location Of 486/66 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-212
xxv
LIST OF TABLES
Table Title Page

Table 1-1: Optional Interfaces for the VMS Workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Table 2-1: Major Subassemblies for 2500 Console Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Table 2-2: Major Sub-Assemblies for VMS-VT 21" Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Table 2-3: Major Sub-Assemblies for VMS-VT 26" Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Table 2-4: 486 Expansion Card Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Table 2-5: 486 CMOS Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Table 2-6: Advanced CMOS Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Table 2-7: Pentium Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Table 2-8: Pentium Expansion Card Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Table 2-9: Configuration Options For Control Concepts Combination I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Table 2-10: NEC Multispin CD-ROM SCSI Device ID Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Table 2-11: Diagnostic Mode Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Table 2-12: List of Vision Display Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Table 2-13: Configurations & Components for 1812352 Display System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Table 2-14: Components for 1812386 Display System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Table 2-23: Controls for NEC XP Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
Table 2-24: OSM Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
Table 2-25: DIP Switch Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
Table 2-26: Ethernet Installation Kit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121
Table 2-27: Configuration Setup for Adtron Ethernet Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
Table 2-28: Serial Port Signal Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-130
Table 2-29: RocketPort 16 Serial Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-133
Table 2-30: Jumper Settings For Hostess 550 Connector Interface Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-143
Table 2-31: Configuration Options For NMEA Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-149
Table 2-32: Overview of Analog Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-151
Table 2-33: DAS-4 I/O Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-153
Table 2-34: Parts List for 16 Channel Analog to Digital Isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-156
Table 2-35: Signal Connections For Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-157
Table 2-36: Analog I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-161
Table 2-37: Analog Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-162
Table 2-38: DAS-1602 Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-164
Table 2-39: Components for Kamewa Interface System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-166
Table 2-40: Typical Configuration File Entry for Alarm Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-174
Table 2-41: Configuration Options for Single-Channel Synchro Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-177
Table 2-42: Configuration Options for Dual-Channel Synchro Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-181
Table 2-43: Component List For Vision Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-189
Table 2-44: Input Voltage Tap Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-197
Table 2-45: Input Voltage Tap Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-204
xxvi
LIST OF TABLES - (Continued)
Table Title Page
Table 3-1: Overview of VMS-VT Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Table 4-1: Approved Serial Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Table 4-2: Approved Non-serial Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
xxvii
Chapter 1: Overview of the Voyage Management System
The Voyage Management System (VMS) is a family of related products designed to integrate ship's navigation
and control systems. This equipment has been developed for distributing, displaying, correlating, and logging
shipboard data. The VMS automates most of the low-level, routine tasks involved in the conning of a ship,
significantly reducing the stress and workload of bridge personnel. This gives the humans on the bridge more
time for doing the job that they do so much better than machines: making decisions.
Figure 1-1: An Integrated Bridge System Based on the Sperry Marine Voyage Management System
Sperry Marine Proprietary - See Notice On Page i 1-1

The Voyage Management System comprises five primary products:
! Navigation Station (NS)

! Planning Station (PS)
! Conning Station (CS)
! Voyage Recorder (VR)
! SeaNET
The VMS equipment forms the heart of Sperry Marine's Integrated Bridge Systems (IBS), an example of which
is illustrated in Figure 1-1.
This chapter presents a brief overview of the functionality provided by Sperry Marine Integrated Bridge Systems.
The products comprising the Voyage Management System are described, along with a short history and rationale
of their evolution and a list all of their major components, which are detailed in the second chapter of this manual.
To give a better picture of the use to which this equipment is put, several example systems are described. The
remainder of the chapter provides a brief overview of the VMS's interfaces.
1.1 Integrated Bridge Functionality
The VMS equipment used for bridge automation is tightly coupled in function to the pre-existing navigation
equipment that it integrates. The equipment serves a "glue" function for building higher-order structures out of
already capable and sophisticated components. The most important functional capabilities of Sperry Marine
integrated bridges which are not available in traditional bridge designs are summarized in the following
paragraphs.
Automatic Data Collection and Distribution – The capability to collect and distribute data from navigation
and environmental sensors automatically – without human intervention – is the foundation upon which all other
integrated bridge capabilities are built. Usually the most important type of sensor data on a ship's bridge is
navigational information: geographic position from any of a variety of position sensing equipment such as a
Global Positioning System (GPS), Loran-C, Decca, Satellite Navigation System (TRANSIT SATNAV), Omega,
etc.; heading from the gyrocompass, the radars, the gyropilot or course made good from the position sensors;
and speed from the speed log, the radars, or the position sensors. Other types of sensor data are also frequently
monitored, such as depth data, weather data and engine room data. The desired suite of sensors and interfaces
is determined by the customer in the design stages of each customized integrated bridge. In the simplest
integrated bridges, it may be sufficient to bring all of this data to one central collection point (a navigation
computer). The bridge systems of most large vessels, however, require SeaNET to distribute all of the data to
all of the equipment which uses it.
Graphical Data Display – After sensor data has been collected, the primary task is to present it to the human
operator(s) of the vessel in a timely fashion, in a form that humans can most readily assimilate. The thousands
of words of data received from all of the navigation sensors can easily be summarized in one simple picture: one's
own ship moving on a chart which depicts all local obstructions, both fixed and moving. This is called an
electronic chart.
Automatic Data Logging – Automatic data collection also makes automatic data archiving possible. The VMS
can automatically log information such as position, heading, speed, wind speed and direction, navigation mode,
and time. The data can be logged either to magnetic storage media, to a printer, or both. The operator can select
the logging devices and the time interval.
1-2 Sperry Marine Proprietary - See Notice On Page i

Automatic Data Reduction – The collected navigation sensor data can be correlated and filtered using Kalman
techniques to develop a "best estimate" of position, heading, and speed. This filtered data can provide a more
stable feedback to ship control systems.
Voyage Planning and Monitoring – Computers can simplify many of the computational details of voyage
planning: computing track headings, ETAs to way points, computing Great Circle routes, etc. The track of an
electronically recorded voyage plan may be automatically overlaid on an electronic chart to show the planned
route. Once underway, it is easy to see the ship's position with respect to the plan, and the navigation computers
can compare the actual progress with the plan.
Ship Control – Since the voyage plan represents the desired position of the vessel as a function of time, and the
actual position is also known, the next logical step is to allow the navigation computer to pilot the ship, sending
commands to the autopilot and the engine controls to keep the ship on track and on schedule.
1.2 The Range of Integrated Bridge Systems
The VMS products have been developed to meet a broad range of bridge integration requirements. At one end
of the spectrum are bridge automation systems designed to allow a single operator to navigate and pilot the ship –
for instance, those designed to conform to Det Norski Veritas's (DNV) Tentative Rules for One-man Bridge
Operation in Ocean Areas and Coastal Waters, the so-
called "Watch-1" specifications. With these systems, the level of automation is quite high – the VMS is directly
piloting the ship throughout much of its voyage – and this means that the requirements for system reliability and
availability are paramount. What this usually translates to in terms of the system design is at least some degree
of redundancy of critical equipment.
The Voyage Management System was designed from the beginning with these requirements in mind. The key
component for implementing large systems incorporating redundancy is SeaNET. All of the other VMS products
are designed to optionally interface to SeaNET, both providing data to and receiving data from the network.
SeaNET's high-speed, deterministic message passing service ensures that all network products are operating with
the same sensor and control information at the same time, allowing one Command Station, for example, to act
as "hot back-up" for another.
At the other end of the system requirements spectrum are the relatively simple "navigation advisory systems,"
which monitor the vessel's progress but do not require the VMS to control the ship directly. Cost of such systems
is frequently a major consideration. For such applications, Sperry Marine offers the Voyage Management System
Vision Technology (VMS-VT), which incorporates most of the VMS functionality in a single navigation
computer.
1.3 The VMS Products
The core products developed by Sperry Marine for bridge integration and automation are designed around the
IBM Personal Computer (PC) architectural family. This gives them many hardware components in common, and
greatly simplifies the stocking of spare parts and the job of the servicing the equipment. Likewise, much of the
underlying software is shared: their operating systems, their file systems, their network interfaces, and their
peripheral input/output (I/O) systems. The products are distinguished by different applications software that runs
in them, and, in some cases, by the attachment of some unique peripherals.
The distinction between the products, the applications software in the product, and the hardware platform on
which the software runs is very important to understanding the configuration and operation of the VMS

equipment. This distinction is not always clear, because the same hardware platform can run different software
applications at different times, taking on the characteristics of different products. This, in fact, is the whole idea
behind the VMS, which can function as a VMS Command Station when the vessel is at sea, and as a Navigation
Workstation while in port.
Sperry Marine's IBS products have been designed from the start to be highly modular and configurable, and to
make use of standard, off-the-shelf components where feasible. They are intended to evolve with the state of the
art in personal computers. Indeed, there have already been two generations of VMS hardware to date, as Sperry
Marine has taken advantage of the increasing performance and functionality and lower costs from the very
dynamic personal computer industry.
The paragraphs below describe the principal VMS products of both generations found in Sperry Marine
Integrated Bridge Systems. Each section contains an illustration of the product described, and contains a list of
major subassemblies and components described in detail in Chapter 2: Hardware Specifications and Component
Configuration. Chapter 2 also contains an extensive discussion of SeaNET.
1.3.1 VMS Part Number Structure
A VMS system is created by combining the various VMS subsystem elements. The particular system
configuration is described by part number according to the following:
Figure 1-2: Voyage Management System Part Number Structure
VMSVT denotes the Sperry Marine “Vision Technology” Voyage Management System. The part number
describing the VMS subsystem elements are described in the following figures.

Navigation Station Subsystem Part Numbering – The part numbering structure is as follows:
Figure 1-3: Navigation Station Subsystem Part Number Structure
Conning Station Subsystem Part Numbering – The part numbering structure is as follows:
Figure 1-4: Conning Station Subsystem Part Number Structure

Planning Station Subsystem Part Numbering – The part numbering structure is as follows:
Figure 1-5: Planning Station Subsystem Part Number Structure
1.3.2 The Navigation Station Substation
The Navigation Station is supplied standard with computer and 16 channel serial interface. The computer is
configured as follows:
! desk top or shelf mount case

! power supply
! graphics card
! network card
! RAM
! hard drive
! CD-ROM
! 3 ½" floppy drive
! Windows NT
Figure 1-6 shows a navigation system.

Figure 1-6: Navigation Station

1.3.3 Conning Station Subsystem
The Conning Station is supplied standard with computer and serial interface. The computer is configured as
follows:

! power supply
! graphics card
! network card
! RAM
! hard drive
! CD-ROM
! Windows NT
The Conning Station is shown in Figure 1-7.
Figure 1-7: Conning Station

1.3.4 The Planning Station Subsystem
The Planning Station is supplied standard with computer, keyboard mouse. The computer is configured as
follows:

! power supply
! graphics card
! network card
! RAM
! hard drive
! CD-ROM
! Windows NT
The Planning Station is shown in Figure 1-8.
Figure 1-8: Planning Station
1.3.5 The Voyage Recorder Subsystem
The multi-media Voyage Data Recorder was jointly developed by Sperry Marine and Ocean Systems. The Voyage
Recorder is a PC-based recording system for capturing ship navigation/engine data, bridge communications
(voice) and RADAR video output. The data is stored in digital format on the hard disk of a PC. A sound board
records voice communications and a video frame grabber captures the RADAR information. Multiple
microphones and VHF inputs are combined using mixers. Data is acquired through two standard serial ports on
the PC. The software requires serial data in the NMEA-0183 format.

1.4 Methods of Interfacing
Interfaces between the VMS products and other equipment supply the VMS with real-time sensor data, allow it
to control peripheral equipment, and allow it to exchange charts, NAVLINES, voyage plans, and log data with
other navigation equipment. Some of these interfaces (described in the following paragraphs) are supported by
the products' standard components. Others may require some of the optional interfacing components listed in
Table 1-1.
Synchro Interfaces – Synchro interfaces encode angular position as relative amplitudes of a three-phase
alternating current. This type of signaling is traditionally used in marine systems to transmit such
information as gyrocompass heading, rudder angle, and ship's water speed. A special board in the VMS
workstations (Single/Dual Channel Synchro Interface Board) is used to convert angular synchro information
to digital form. The application software then converts digital synchro angle to the measured parameter
according to setup information contained in a configuration file.
Analog Interfaces – analog interfaces represent some measured parameter – rudder angle, water speed,
etc. – as an electrical value. D.C. voltage is most commonly used, but 4-20 Ma current is also employed.
The VMS workstations use an analog-to-digital (A/D) interface card (DAS-4 ) to make this information
available to the applications software. Similarly, a DAS-1602 digital-to-analog board may be used to supply
analog information or control signals to other systems requiring analog signaling.
Pulse Log Interface – The VMS workstations may be configured to receive speed data from a speed log
with a relay contact closure output (sometimes called pulse output). Although 200 pulse/nmi outputs are by
far the most common, the VMS's inputs can be configured for other pulse rates via software configuration.
Serial Interfaces – The most common form of interface between modern electronic equipment (typified by
GPS receivers, RADARs, and the like) is serial communications. This type of interface is also used between
the VMS and many of its peripherals: digitizers, printers, plotters and touchscreens. There is a variety of
electrical formats which are used for serial interfaces: RS-232, RS-422, and current loop. There is also
considerable variety in the data formats used. Electrical and signaling issues are covered in more detail in
Chapter 2. Configuration of serial ports is covered in Chapter 3, and the format of data message exchange
is covered in Chapter 4.
Table 1-1: Optional Interfaces for the VMS Workstations
SMI P/N Description

1812396 RocketPort 16-Line RS-232/422 Serial Interface
1812405 1-Channel, 16-Bit Synchro
1812406 2-Channel, 16-Bit Synchro
1810320 MetraByte DAS-4 8-bit Analog-to-Digital Interface Card
1812689 MetraByte DAS-1602 12 Analog I/O Interface Card

Chapter 2: Hardware Specifications and Component Configuration
This chapter covers most of the major replaceable hardware assemblies, subassemblies and components that are
currently being supplied or that have been supplied as Voyage Management System components of Sperry Marine
Integrated Bridge Systems. Items considered to be peripherals – printers, plotters, digitizers, etc. – are not
covered. (Peripheral interfaces are covered in Chapter 4: Peripheral and Interface Specifications).
This chapter is organized into the following major sections:
Cabinets & Chassis

Processors/Motherboards
SCSI Controllers
Hard Disk Drives
SCSI CD-ROM Drives
Floppy Drives
Graphics Adapters
Display Monitors
Touch screens
Keyboards
SeaNET
Serial Ports
Analog Interface Components
Vision Synchro Interfaces
Vision Pointing Devices
Vision Printers
Power Conditioning Equipment
Vision Upgrade Kits
The introduction to each section contains any general requirements of VMS equipment, if any, for the type of
components covered. The subsections which follow each cover one VMS component; each contains an
illustration of the component to aid in positive identification, along with information concerning the Sperry
Marine and vendor part numbers, and the manufacturer if other than Sperry Marine. Size, weight, and power
requirements are supplied for all major assemblies. Each component subsection describes the applications of the
component – where used, obsolete components, replacements, etc. The component's interfaces and configuration
are described in detail, as well as maintenance and/or software requirements, installation procedure, and any
potential problems encountered.
Since the PC computer family is an integral part of all of Sperry Marine's bridge integration products, it is
important for anyone installing, servicing, or specifying these products to understand the terminology and
architecture of these computers. Such knowledge is assumed in all of the material in this chapter.

2.1 Cabinets and Chassis
2.1.1 2500 Stand Mount, Sperry Marine P/N 1981324
The VMS 2500 Stand Mount consists of all the required VMS workstation hardware and software in a rugged,
stand-alone integrated package.
2.1.1.1 Manufacturer – The VMS 2500 Stand is built by Sperry Marine.
2.1.1.2 Application – The VMS 2500 Stand can be used to build any of the VMS workstations.
2.1.1.3 Interfaces – The external connections to the 2500 Stand are application-specific. The internal
connections are detailed on drawing 1981324, sheet 3. A copy of this is in Appendix B of this manual.
2.1.1.4 Installation – The following table shows the major sub-assemblies for the 2500 Stand. The installation
of these components is covered in detail in other sections of chapter 2.
Table 2-1: Major Subassemblies for 2500 Console Stand
VMS Command Station Cabinet Assembly, Sperry Marine P/N 1981324
Item Qty. Designation P/N Description
14 1 A3 1812357-1 Monitor, color with touchscreen.
16 1 A4 1978079-2 Touchscreen.
19 1 A1 1981362 Computer case assembly.
23 1 A5 1980210 Disk drive assembly.
41 1 A2 1812380-1 Touch screen controller.
46 1 W1 T968739 VMS 2500 harness.
86 1 A9 1812346-7 16-Port female connector input module/cable.
92 1 W2 T968744 Disk drive power cable.
108 1 K1 1806860-2 120 VAC relay.
115 1 W6 1812111-4 VGA cable.

2.1.2 VMS-VT 21" Cabinet Assembly, Sperry Marine P/N 1981180-VAR
The VMS-VT 21" Cabinet Assembly consists of all the required VMS workstation hardware and software in
a rugged, stand-alone integrated package. The drawings for the VMS-VT 21" Cabinet Assembly are in Appendix
B of this manual.
2.1.2.1 Manufacturer – The VMS-VT 21" Cabinet is built by Sperry Marine. The cabinet comes in four
versions:
! VMS-VT Cabinet with touch screen. This is a floor-standing unit, P/N 1981180-1;
! VMS-VT Cabinet with trackball. This is a floor-standing unit, P/N 1981180-2;
! VMS-VT Cabinet with touch screen. This is a console-mounted unit, P/N 1981180-3;
! VMS-VT Cabinet with trackball. This is a console-mounted unit, P/N 1981180-4.
2.1.2.2 Application – The VMS -VT 21" Cabinet can be used to build any of the VMS workstations.
2.1.2.3 Interfaces – The external connections to the VMS-VT 21" Cabinet are application-specific. The
internal connections are detailed on drawing 1982493. A copy of this is in Appendix B of this manual.
Table 2-2: Major Sub-Assemblies for VMS-VT 21" Cabinet
4 1 1820488 Pentium computer assembly.
5 1 1812388 Color display with touchscreen (1981180-1, -3).
5 1 1812386 Color display without touchscreen (1981180-2, -4).
6 1 1812396 16-Channel serial adapter assembly.
9 1 1812412 Trackball assembly (1981180-2, -4).

2.1.3 VMS-VT Nav Station 26" Display Console, Sperry Marine P/N 1981181
The VMS-VT 26" Cabinet Assembly consists of all the required VMS workstation hardware and software in
a rugged, stand-alone integrated package. The drawings for the VMS-VT 26" Cabinet Assembly are in Appendix
B of this manual.
2.1.3.1 Manufacturer – The VMS-VT 26" Cabinet is built by Sperry Marine. The cabinet comes in four
versions:
! VMS-VT Cabinet with touch screen. This is a floor-standing unit, P/N 1981181-1;
! VMS-VT Cabinet with trackball. This is a floor-standing unit, P/N 1981181-2;
! VMS-VT Cabinet with touch screen. This is a console-mounted unit, P/N 1981181-3;
! VMS-VT Cabinet with trackball. This is a console-mounted unit, P/N 1981181-4.
2.1.3.2 Application – The VMS -VT 26" Cabinet can be used to build any of the VMS workstations.
2.1.3.3 Interfaces – The external connections to the VMS-VT 26" Cabinet are application-specific. The
internal connections are detailed on drawing 1982493. A copy of this is in Appendix B of this manual.
Table 2-3: Major Sub-Assemblies for VMS-VT 26" Cabinet
4 1 1820488 Pentium computer assembly.
5 1 1812581 Color display with touchscreen (1981181-1, -3).
5 1 1812382 Color display without touchscreen (1981181-2, -4).
6 1 1812396 16-Channel serial adapter assembly.
9 1 1812412 Trackball assembly (1981181-2, -4).

2.2 Processors/Motherboards
2.2.1 Young Microsystems VEGA 486/DX2 66 MHZ Motherboard, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-147
The Young VEGA VS486-3VL is a 80486 66 MHZ motherboard, 256K cache memory, 16MB 80ns memory
and AMI 486 BIOS.
Figure 2-1: Young 486/66 Motherboard
2.2.1.1 Manufacturer –
Young Microsystems.
13825 Cerritos Corporate Drive No. A.
Cerritos, CA 90701.
800-707-8342.
The vendor’s part number is VS486-3VL.
2.2.1.2 Application – This motherboard is used on the 486 shelf mount or table top computer system, Sperry
Marine P/N 1810633-50.
2.2.1.3 Interfaces – There is a keyboard connector located on the motherboard. All other interfaces are
provided via the expansion boards.

Figure 2-2: Installation of SIMM Components
2.2.1.4 Configuration –
CAUTION
components. PC motherboards contain static sensitive parts, therefore an anti-static wrist
strap should be worn.
Jumper Blocks – Set the jumpers as shown in Figure 2-8.
Memory SIMMs – There are 8 4 Megabyte SIMMs to be installed. The Sperry Marine P/N is 1810633-164.
The SIMMs are installed in Memory Bank 0 and Memory Bank 1 (reference Figure 2-8. Orient the SIMMs
to the socket as shown in Figure 2-2.
Location of Expansion Cards – Locate the expansion cards according to Table 2-4: The configuration
details for the cards are provided in the appropriate chapters of this manual.
Table 2-4: 486 Expansion Card Allocation
Card Slot Card Description
1 SCSI Adapter
4 Analog Interface

Table 2-4: 486 Expansion Card Allocation
Card Slot Card Description
5 Ethernet Adapter
6 Serial Interface
7 SYNCHRO Interface
8 Graphics Adapter
2.2.1.5 Installation Procedure –
CMOS Setup –
1. The keyboard and monitor must be connected.
2. Power up the computer. When the memory test is in progress, press Del to enter the Setup Window.
3. Select and modify each item as shown in Table 2-5and 2-6. Use the ARROW KEYS to select items and
the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys the change the value of the selected item.
Table 2-5: 486 CMOS Setup
Standard CMOS Setup: VS486-3VL
HARD DISK C: TYPE (QUANTUM) NOT INSTALLED
HARD DISK D: TYPE (QUANTUM) NOT INSTALLED
FLOPPY DRIVE A: 1.44MB, 3 ½"
FLOPPY DRIVE B: NOT INSTALLED
PRIMARY DISPLAY NOT INSTALLED
Table 2-6: Advanced CMOS Setup
ADVANCED CMOS SETUP
KEYBOARD NOT INSTALLED
TYPEMATIC RATE PROGRAMMING DISABLED
TYPEMATIC RATE DELAY N/A
TYPEMATIC RATE N/A
ABOVE 1MB MEMORY TEST DISABLED
MEMORY TICK SOUND DISABLED

Table 2-6: Advanced CMOS Setup
ADVANCED CMOS SETUP

MEMORY PARITY ERROR CHECK DISABLED
HIT <DEL> MESSAGE DISPLAY DISABLED
HARD DISK TYPE 47 RAM AREA 0:300
WAIT FOR <F1> IF ANY ERROR ENABLED
SYSTEM BOOT UP NUMERIC LOCK OFF
NUMERIC COPROCESSOR TEST ENABLED
FLOPPY DRIVE SEEK AT BOOT DISABLED
SYSTEM BOOT UP SEQUENCE A:, C:
EXTERNAL CACHE MEMORY ENABLED
INTERNAL CACHE MEMORY ENABLED
FAST GATE A20 OPTION ENABLED
PASSWORD CHECKING OPTION SETUP
ADAPTER ROM SHADOW C800, 32K DISABLED
ADAPTER ROM SHADOW (ALL) DISABLE
SHADOW ROM OPTION BOTH
MEMORY RELOCATION DISABLE
DRAM WAIT STATE 1
DECOUPLED REFRESH OPTION DISABLED
BUSCLOCK SELECTION 1
3. Press Esc to exit the main menu. Then select WRITE TO CMOS AND EXIT and press Enter to
complete the setup.
2.2.1.6 Potential Problems – Switches out of position can cause many types of erroneous operation. A CMOS
RAM battery which is weak or dead will cause at the least loss of system time and date when the system is
powered off. Also, a loose or disconnected keyboard connector can prevent proper keyboard operation.
1. Incorrectly configured jumpers.
2. Defective CMOS RAM battery.
3. Defective keyboard, monitor or some other problem detected by the Power up Self -Test (POST).

2.2.2 Pentium 100MHz Motherboard, Sperry Marine P/N 1813059
Intel Corporation, CAGE code 34649

Santa Clara, CA
2.2.2.2 Application – This motherboard is part of the Pentium computer, Sperry Marine P/N 1820488.
2.2.2.3 Interfaces – Reference Figure 2-3. The system components and interfaces are as follows:
A. 3.3V power connector N. Secondary cache size jumpers

B. Primary power connector O. Pentium microprocessor
C. Serial port COM2 P. Configuration switch block
D. Serial port COM1 Q. PCI ISA/IDE accelerator
E. Floppy drive connector R. Front panel I/O connectors
F. Two IDE connectors S. Battery
G. Parallel port connector T. Flash memory device for system BIOS
H. Super I/O controller U. BIOS recovery boot jumper
I. Triton system controller V. ISA add-on board connectors
J. Triton data path components W. PCI add-on board connectors
K. SIMM sockets X. PS/2 keyboard and mouse connectors
L. CPU voltage regulator
M. Secondary cache sockets
Figure 2-3: Pentium 100MHz Motherboard

Figure 2-4: Location of Pentium Jumpers and DIP Switches
CAUTION
components. PC motherboards contain static sensitive parts, therefore an anti-static wrist
strap should be worn.
Jumper Blocks/DIP Switches – Reference Figure 2-4. Set the jumpers as follows:
A. Jumper J1N1 pins 1 & 2.

B. Jumper J1A1 pins 1 & 2.
C. Jumper J1A2 pins 2 & 3.
D. Jumper J3A1 none.
Set the switches on S1D1 as follows:

On 2,7, & 8.
Off 1,3,4,5 & 6.
The following table shows the complete configuration options for the jumpers and switches shown in Figure
2-4.

Table 2-7: Pentium Configuration Options
Jumper/Switch Function Settings
Jumper J1N1 Recovery boot enable jumper. If Pins 1-2 = Normal (default).
the BIOS is corrupted during a
BIOS upgrade, this jumper allows Pins 2-3 = Recovery boot enable.
you to boot the system and recover
the BIOS. (Reference the section
on BIOS).
Jumpers J1A1, J1A2, Secondary cache. These jumpers Cache Size J1A1 J1A2 J3A1
J3A1 must be set according to the
amount of secondary cache 0 KB (default) 1-2 1-2 no jumper
installed. 256 KB 1-2 2-3 no jumper
512 KB 2-3 1-2 1-2
Switches 8,7,6 Reserved. CAUTION: These switches have been set by the
factory for your system. Do not change these switches
from the factory setting.
Switch 5 Enables/disables access to the Off = Access to Setup program enabled (default).
Setup program.
On = Access to Setup program disabled.
Switch 4 Reset CMOS settings to default Off = Normal mode (default).

CMOS RAM values.
On = Reset CMOS settings.
Switch 3 Clear password Off = Normal mode (default).
On = Clear password.
Switch 2 CPU voltage regulator. Some Off= Default VR mode (3.3 V - 3.465 V).
upgrade may require changing
from the default VR setting to the On = VRE mode (3.465 V - 3.63 V.
VRE setting.
CAUTION: Don’t change this switch unless the
documentation supplied with the upgrade CPU
indicates the VRE voltage range.
Switch 1 ISA bus clock speed. Sets the ISA Off (default) = 8.33 MHZ ( 75 MHZ CPU)
bus to a faster or slower setting. 7.5 MHZ (90 MHZ CPU)
8.33 MHZ (100 MHZ CPU)
On = 8.33 MHZ ( 75 MHZ CPU)


Figure 2-5: Pentium AC Power Select Switch
Power Input Voltage Setting
Reference Figure 2-5. There’s a switch on the panel to select the input voltage for the power supply. Set this
switch for the appropriate voltage. The options are:
Ž 115 VAC (range 90-132 VAC)
Ž 230 VAC (range 180-264 VAC)
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards,
cables or components.
Memory SIMMs – There are two 16 Megabyte 72-pin SIMMs to be installed. The Sperry Marine P/N is
1813062-3. The SIMMs are installed in Memory Bank 0 (reference Figure 2-6).

Figure 2-6: Location of SIMM Sockets
Mount The Hard Drive – Reference Figure 2-7. The hard drive is installed in the carrier as shown. For
configuration details about the hard drive, reference chapter 2.3.
Figure 2-7: Hard Drive Carrier

Hard Disk Drive LED Connector – The connections for the hard disk LED is as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 2-8: Hard Disk LED Indicator Connections
The signals are as follows:
Pin Signal Name
5 PULL_UP_330
6 Key
7 HD ACTIVE
8 PULL_UP_330
Keylock/Power LED Connector – The connections for the hard disk LED is as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 2-9: Keylock/Power LED Indicator Connections

Pin Signal Name
10 Ground
11 KEY LOCK
12 Ground
13 Key
14 LED_PWR
Fan Power Connector – The connections are as shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-10: Fan Power Connector
Pin Signal Name
10 Ground
11 +12 V (fused)
12 Ground

Speaker Connector – The connections for the hard disk LED is as shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-11: Speaker Connector
Pin Signal Name
5 PULL_UP_330
6 Key
7 HD ACTIVE
8 PULL_UP_330
CD-ROM Installation – The CD-ROM is mounted in the center drive bay. For details about configuration
of the CD-ROM, reference chapter 2.5.
Location of Expansion Cards – Locate the expansion cards according to Table 2-8: The configuration details
for the cards are provided in the appropriate chapters of this manual.
Table 2-8: Pentium Expansion Card Allocation
Expansion Slot Card Description
First PCI slot SCSI adapter.
Third PCI slot Graphics adapter.
Fifth PCI slot Ethernet adapter

CMOS Setup –
1. During computer Boot sequence hit the “F1" key when prompted to enter the BIOS setup routine.
2. Use the “Arrow Keys” to hi-light the “Advanced” menu selection at the top of the screen and press
“ENTER” to select.
Main Advanced Security Exit

System Date Nov 16 1995
System Time 10:35:09
Floppy Options Press Enter
Hard Disk C: Not Installed

Not Installed
Hard Disk D: Not Installed
Hard Disk E: Not Installed
Hard Disk F:
English
Language Press Enter
Boot Options
EGA/VGA
Video Mode Not Installed
Mouse
640 KB
Base Memory 31744 KB
Extended Memory

3. From the “Advanced” menu select “Peripheral Configuration”.

Processor Type Pentium (TM) Family
Processor Speed 100 MHZ
Cache Size 256K
Peripheral Configuration Press Enter

Advanced Chipset Configuration Press Enter
Power Management Configuration Press Enter
Plug and Play Configuration Press Enter
4. Verify the parameters are set as follows:
Peripheral Configuration
Configuration Mode Manual
PCI IDE Interface Disabled

Floppy Interface Enabled
Serial Port 1 Address Com1, 3F8h

Serial Port 2 Address Com2, 2F8h
Serial Port 2 IR Mode Disabled
Parallel Port Address LPT1, 378h, IRQ 7
Parallel Port Mode Compatible
Serial Port 1 IRQ IRQ 4

Serial Port 2 IRQ IRQ 3
5. Press the “ESC” key to return to the “Advanced” menu.

6. From the “Advanced” Menu select “Advanced Chipset Configuration”.

Cache Size 256K

Advanced Chipset Configuration

Base Memory Size 640 KB
ISA LFB Size Disabled
Video Palette Snoop Disabled

+Latency Timer (PCI Clocks) 66
PCI Burst Mode Enabled
Bank 0 SIMMS Detected Fast Page Mode
8. Press the “ESC” key to return to the “Advanced” menu.

9. From the “Advanced” menu select “Power Management Configuration”.

Cache Size 256K

Power Management Configuration

Advanced Power Management Enabled
IDE Drive Power Down Enabled

VESA Video Power Down Sleep
Inactivity Timer (Minutes) 10

Hot Key (CTRL-ALT-)
11. Press the “ESC” key to return to the “Advanced.

12. From the “Advanced” menu select “Plug and Play Configuration”.

Cache Size 256K

Plug and Play Configuration

Configuration Mode Use Setup Utility
ISA Shared Memory Size Disabled
IRQ 5 Used By ISA Card

IRQ 9 Available
IRQ 10 Used By ISA Card
IRQ 11 Available
IRQ 12 Available
NOTE:
IRQ 5 is reserved for the RocketPort Card which is installed at system test. IRQ 10 is
reserved for the Network Interface installed as part of the Pentium Assembly.
14. Press the “ESC” key twice to return to the “Main” menu.

15. Use the “Arrow Keys” to hi-light the “Floppy Options” menu selection in the middle of the screen and
press “ENTER” to select.


Hard Disk F: Not Installed
Language English
Boot Options Press Enter
Video Mode EGA/VGA

Mouse Not Installed
Base Memory 640 KB

Extended Memory 31744 KB
Floppy Options
Floppy A: Installed
Floppy B: Not Installed
Floppy A: Type 1.44/1.25 MB 3 ½"

Floppy B: Type Disabled
17. Press the “ESC” key twice to return to the “Main” menu.

18. Use the “Arrow Keys” to hi-light the “Boot Options” menu selection in the middle of the screen and
press “ENTER” to select.


Language English
Video Mode EGA/VGA

Mouse Not Installed
Base Memory 640 KB

Boot Options
Boot Sequence A: First, Then C:
System Cache Enabled

Boot Speed Turbo
Num Lock Off
Setup Prompt Enabled

Hard Disk Pre-Delay 3 Seconds
Typematic Rate Programming Default
20. Press the “ESC” key to return to the “Main” menu.

21. Use the “Arrow Keys” to hi-light the “Security” menu selection at the top of the screen and press
“ENTER” to select.


Language English
Video Mode EGA/VGA

Mouse Not Installed
Base Memory 640 KB


User Password is Disabled
Administrator Password is Disabled
Set User Password Press Enter

Set Administrator Password Press Enter
23. Press the “ESC” key to return to the “Main” menu. Press “F10" to save configuration and exit setup
then press “ENTER”.
2.2.2.6 BIOS Update And Recovery – The system BIOS resides in Flash memory. You can upgrade a Flash
BIOS through software, without taking the system apart or replacing the Flash. This section describes upgrading
the system BIOS from a diskette. This section also includes instructions on recovering from a corrupted BIOS
upgrade.

Using the Upgrade Utility –
1. Write down the current Setup selections. This information can be obtained by hitting the <F1> when
prompted during the boot-up sequence.
2. Insert the upgrade disk into the floppy drive.
3. Re-boot the computer.
4. When the Flash upgrade menu appears, choose “Update Flash Memory Areal from a file”.
5. When the menu asks you to enter a path/filename, use the arrow keys to select the .bio file and press
<Enter>.
6. The utility asks for a confirmation that you want to load the new flash into memory. Select “Continue
with Programming.”
7. After the upgrade completes, remove the upgrade disk.
8. Re-boot the system and start the Setup program. Press <F5> to reset the BIOS defaults. Then use the
copy of the Setup selections you made at the beginning of this procedure to set the options.
BIOS Recovery – It is unlikely that anything will interrupt the Flash upgrade process. However, if an
interruption occurs that prevents continuing with the upgrade, it is possible the BIOS may be left in an
unusable state. The following procedure describes how to recover from this problem.
NOTE:
Because of the small amount of code available in the non-erasable boot block area, no
video is available to direct the procedure. You must monitor the Flash recovery by
listening to the speaker.
1. Change the “Recovery Boot Enable” jumper (reference Table 2-7) to the Recovery mode position.
2. Install the boot-able upgrade disk into the floppy drive.
3. Re-boot the system.
4. Listen to the speaker. You should hear beeps in the following sequence:
a) After re-booting the system, the speaker beeps once. This beep marks the beginning of the power
on self test (POST).
b) After a short delay (less than 10 seconds), the speaker beeps again, but a higher frequency. This
marks the beginning of the recovery process. At this point, the system is copying the recovery code
into the Flash device.
c) After about 30 seconds, the speaker beeps twice (again at the higher frequency), marking the end
of the recovery process.

5. Turn the system off.
6. Change the “Recovery Boot Enable” jumper back to the Normal position.
7. Leave the upgrade disk in the floppy drive and turn the system on.
8. Continue with the original upgrade.
2.2.2.7 Potential Problems – Switches out of position can cause many types of erroneous operation. a CMOS
RAM battery which is weak or dead will cause at the least loss of system time and date when the system is
powered off. Finally, a loose or disconnected keyboard connector can prevent proper keyboard operation.
1. Incorrectly configured jumpers.
2. Defective CMOS RAM battery.
3. Defective keyboard, monitor or some other problem detected by the Power up Self -Test (POST).
4. Defective memory.

2.3 SCSI Controllers
2.3.1 Control Concepts Combination I/O Board, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-181
The Control Concepts 16-Bit SCSI, IDE, Floppy, Serial and Parallel Combination Control Card is an ISA-based
product. The card functions as the control center for all devices within the PC, except the monitor.
Figure 2-12: Control Concepts Combination Interface Board
This board has the following I/O ports:

• Seven SCSI;
• Two IDE;
• Two floppy (supports 2.88.MB);
• Two high-speed serial;
• One bi-directional parallel.

Control Concepts, Inc.

8500 Executive Park Avenue
Fairfax, VA, 22031
USA
Phone 800-922-9259 X6444.
The manufacturer's reference is “16-Bit SCSI, IDE, Floppy, Serial & Parallel Combination Board”.
2.3.1.2 Application – The Combination I/O board is used in the Pentium PC, Sperry Marine P/N 1820488.
2.3.1.3 Interfaces –
PC Bus Interface – The card fits into a ISA-compatible expansion slot.
Serial Port Connectors – The serial ports connect to S1 and S2 as shown in Figure 2-12.
2.3.1.4 Hardware Setup Hints – This section provides an discussion of the parameters that need to
considered for hardware setup.
Interrupts And the Serial Port – The first two serial ports are configured with interrupts (the enhanced
version of the board only allows setting interrupts by jumper for the four serial ports). Most serial devices
do not require interrupts. However, if more than two are required, it is possible to wire the board to pick up
1 or 2 additional IRQs. Contact Control Concepts Technical Support about making this modification.
External SCSI Devices – The SCSI connector is designed to support the higher speeds attainable at the
SCSI-2 level. Most external SCSI subsystems have dual Centronics 50-pin connectors for communications.
Therefore, a male SCSI-2 to male Centronics 50-pin cable is required. If necessary, Control Concepts sells
these cables.
Termination – The SCSI bus must be terminated correctly to assure proper operation. The SCSI devices on
each end of the SCSI bus must have terminators installed. All other SCSI devices have terminators removed.
The Combination I/O board is shipped with terminators installed at locations RP4, RP5 and RP6 (These
terminators are located next to the SCSI connector). The internal and external connect to the same SCSI bus,
so both internal external cabling must be considered in determining where terminators are installed.
If only one cable (internal or external) is connected to the host adapter, the terminators must remain installed
in the host adapter. Terminators must also be installed on the device at the farthest end of the cable from the
host adapter. Terminators must be removed from all other attached SCSI devices.
If both an internal and external cable are connected to the host adapter, remove the terminators on the host
adapter and install terminators on the devices at the farthest end of each cable. The instruction manuals for
each SCSI device indicates how the terminators can be removed or replaced.

Using a Previously Formatted Disk With The Combination I/O Board – Depending on the sector
translation method used in low-level format and wether the SCSI hard drive was partitioned and DOS-level
formatted using DOS or a utility program provided by the manufacturer of the host adapter, the hard drive
may need to be reformatted.
2.3.1.5 Configuration Jumpers –
Table 2-9: Configuration Options For Control Concepts Combination I/O Board
Jumper Block 1 (JB1)

Switch “D” 2.88 Floppy Drive Select Mode Switch “P1" Parallal Port 1 Address Select
0 2.88 Mode Enable1 B A
1 2.88.Mode Enable2 0 0 Disable Parallal Port 1
Neither 2.88 Mode Disable 0 1 378h: LPT1
1 0 3BCh: Usually LPT3
1
Specific manufactures use pin 33 as 2nd enable line. 1 1 278h: LPT2
2
Standard 2.88 Floppies.
Switch “HD” IDE Enable and Address Select Switch “S2" Serial Port 2 Address Select
B A B A
0 0 IDE Disable 0 0 Disable Serial Port 2
0 1 IDE Enable, Primary Address 1F0-1F7 0 1 3F8: COM 1
1 0 Reserved 1 0 2E8h: COM 4
1 1 IDE Enable, Secondary Address 170-177 1 1 2F8h: COM 2
Switch “FL” Floppy Enable and Address Select Switch “S1" Serial Port 1 Address Select
B A B A
0 0 Floppy Disable 0 0 Disable Serial Port 1
0 1 Floppy Enable, Primary Address 3F0-3F7 0 1 2F8: COM 2
1 0 Reserved 1 0 3E8h: COM 3
1 1 Floppy Enable, Secondary Address 370-37 1 1 3F8h: COM 1
Switch “M1" Parallel Port 1 Mode Select

B A
0 0 Output Only
0 1 Reserved
1 0 Bi-directional
1 1 Reserved

Jumper Block 2 (JB2). This block only applies to the enhanced version of the board.
Switch “M2" Parallel Port 2 Mode Select Switch “S4" Serial Port 4 Address Select
B A B A
0 0 Output Only 0 0 Disable Serial Port 4
0 1 Reserved 0 1 3F8: COM 1
1 0 Bi-directional 1 0 2E8h: COM 4
1 1 Reserved 1 1 2F8h: COM 2
Switch “P2" Parallel Port 2 Address Select Switch “S3" Serial Port 3 Address Select
B A B A
0 0 Disable Parallel Port 2 0 0 Disable Serial Port 3
0 1 378h: LPT1 0 1 2F8: COM 2
1 0 3BCh: Usually LPT3 1 0 3E8h: COM3
1 1 278h: LPT2 1 1 3F8h: COM 1
Jumper Block 3 (JB3). Switch D7 and D5 are not used. Reference Jumper Block 6 for setting the other jumpers.
Jumper Block 4 (JB4). Typical Interrupts
Switch S1 or S3: INT 4 Jumper on 4
Switch S2 or S4: INT 3 Jumper on 3
Switch P1: INT 7 Jumper on 7
Switch P2: INT 5 Jumper on 5
Default: S1=4, S2=3, P1=7, P2=5
S1 or S3 as well as S2 or S4 may have an interrupt jumpered, BUT NOT BOTH. Most devices that connect to a serial port do not need
an interrupt at all. Devices which usually require an interrupt on a serial port are mice and a variety of MODEMS. Serial printers do not
usually have an interrupt.
Jumper Block 5 (JB5). LED Source Select.
S: LED lights on SCSI device activity only
I: LED lights on IDE device activity only
B: LED lights on SCSI and IDE activity

Jumper Block 6 (JB6)

Switch “JPS 1 and JPS 0" Device Interrupt Switch “RA1" and RA0" ROM Address Select
JPS1 JPS0 Device Interrupt Also Jumper RA1 RA0 ROM Address
Out Out INT 11 JB3-11 Out Out C8000h
Out In INT 15 JB3-15 Out In CC000h
In Out INT 10 JB3-10 In Out D8000h
In In INT 12 JB3-12 In In DC000h
Switch “JPS 2" SCSI Parity Enable Switch “EMRG”

In No SCSI Parity
Out Enable SCSI Parity Not currently used.
Switch “JPS3" SCSI Device ID Switch “REN” ROM Enable

In SCSI Device ID 6 In Enable
Out SCSI Device ID 7 Out Disable
This jumper enables the ROM chip which contains the BIOS
call to INT 13, thus making SCSI devices bootable.
RECOMMEND LEAVING THIS JUMPER IN.
Switch “JPS4" Transfer Protocol Switch “256" Factory Configuration

In SCSI Synchronous Protocol
Out SCSI Asynchronous Protocol Disregard
Switch “IOA” I/O Address Switch “WS” Wait State Configuration

In 230h - 23Fh In Enable Zero Wait State
Out 330h - 33Fh Out Normal Bus Wait States
If a MIDI Sound Card is installed, use I/O address 230h.
Switch “T.P.” Termination Power

In +5 V Termination Power to External SCSI
Connector
Out No Termination Power to External SCSI
Connector
2.3.1.6 Hardware Installation –
CAUTION
cables
1) Set the proper configuration options as shown in figure 2-12.
2) Install the board in slot 1 of the Vision computer.
3) Install the floppy drive cable to connector “FL-A”.

4) Install the LED cable to connector “J10".
5) Install the serial cable to connector “S1".
6) Install the serial cable to connector “S2".
7) Install the parallel port cable to connector “PARL PORT 1".
8) Install the SCSI to connector “SCSI”. Ensure that termination resistors are installed at the extreme ends
of the SCSI chain.
2.3.1.7 Software Installation – The drivers for the board are installed during the installation of Windows NT
(chapter 3 of this manual).
2.3.1.8 Replaceable Items – There are no field-replaceable components on the board.
2.3.1.9 Common Problems – Whenever two or more PC adapter cards use I/O addresses or hardware
interrupts, the potential for conflict with each other exists. If such a conflict occurs, the symptom is that one or
both adapters will fail to operate, or will function erratically. If such a conflict is suspected, all peripheral
adapters save one may be removed, then re-added one at a time.

2.3.2 Adaptec AHA-2940 SCSI Host Adapter Card, Sperry Marine P/N 1813061
Figure 2-13: Adaptec AHA-2940 SCSI Interface Board
The AHA-2940 provides a SCSI interface for the Pentium Vision computers.
Adaptec, Inc.
691 South Milpitas Blvd.
Milpitas, CA 95035
USA
Phone 800-934-2766.
2.3.2.2 Application – This SCSI adapter board is used in a IBM-PC, Sperry P/N 1820488.

2.3.2.3 Interfaces – The AHA-2940 SCSI board is located in the first PCI slot of P/N 1820488.
PC Bus Interface – The card requires power from the PC bus as follows:
+5 VDC @1 Amp max.
2.3.2.4 Configuration – The Adaptec AHA-2940 configuration is stored and controlled by on-card firmware.
When the card is installed, there is an option during PC boot-up to change the settings.
2.3.2.5 Hardware Installation – Installing the Adtron Ethernet Adapter Card consists of following:
CAUTION
cables
1) Install the Adaptec AHA-2940 board in slot 1 of the PC.
2) Set the proper configuration options. The default SCSI ID for the AHA-2940 is 7. If necessary, this
address can be changed during the boot-up routine, detailed in the software installation section.
2.3.2.6 Software Installation –
1. Power down the PC, Sperry P/N 1820488. Verify the SCSI ID for the hard disk. The SCSI hard disk
must be set to a SCSI ID of 0.
2. Restart the computer by applying power. During computer’s boot sequence, the following prompt
appears: Press <Ctrl> for SCSISelect (TM) Utility!
Press the “CTRL” and “A” keys simultaneously.
3. Use the “Arrow Keys” to hi-light the “Configure/View Host Adapter Settings” menu selection in the
middle of the screen and press “ENTER” to select.
Adaptec AHA-2940/2940W/2944W at Bus: Device 00:0Fh
Options
Configure/View Host Adapter Settings

SCSI Disk Utilities
4. From the “Configuration” menu use the “Arrow Keys” to hi-light the “Boot Device Options” menu and
press “Enter”.

Adaptec AHA-2940/2940W/2944W at Bus: Device xx:xxh
Configuration
SCSI Bus Interface Definitions
Host Adapter SCSI ID.................... 7
SCSI Parity Checking..................... Enabled
Host Adapter SCSI Termination........ Automatic
Additional Options
Boot Device Options...................... Press <Enter>
SCSI Device Configuration............. Press <Enter>
Advanced Configuration Options.... Press <Enter>
<F6> - Reset to Host Adapter Defaults
- Boot Device Configuration -
Please Run SCSI Disk Utilities to get devices in your system.
Boot Target ID ...................................................................... 0
- Options Listed Below have NO EFFECT if multiple LUN support is Disabled -
Boot LUN Number ................................................................ 0

6. Press “ESC” to page back to the “Configuration menu. From the “Configuration” menu use the “Arrow
Keys” to hi-light the “SCSI Device Configuration” menu and press “ENTER”.

Configuration
Host Adapter SCSI ID......................... 7
SCSI Parity Checking........................... Enabled
Host Adapter SCSI Termination.............. Automatic
Additional Options
Boot Device Options............................ Press <Enter>
SCSI Device Configuration................. Press <Enter>
Advanced Configuration Options.......... Press <Enter>
- SCSI Device Configuration -
SCSI Device ID #0 #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7
Initiate Sync Negotiation yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
Maximum Sync Transfer Rate 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
Enable Disconnection yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
- Options Listed below have NO EFFECT if the BIOS is Disabled -
Send Start Unit Command no no no no no no no no

8. Press “ESC” to page back to the “Configuration menu. From the “Configuration” menu use the “Arrow
Keys” to hi-light the “Advanced Configuration Options” menu and press “ENTER”.

Configuration
Host Adapter SCSI ID......................... 7
SCSI Parity Checking........................... Enabled
Host Adapter SCSI Termination.............. Automatic
Additional Options
Boot Device Options............................ Press <Enter>
SCSI Device Configuration................. Press <Enter>
Advanced Configuration Options.......... Press <Enter>
Advanced Configuration Option
Plug and Play Scam Support.........................
Options Listed Below have NO EFFECT if BIOS is disabled
Host Adapter BIOS (Configuration Utility Reserves BIOS Space) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabled

Support Removable Disks Under BIOS as Fixed Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabled
Extended BIOS Translation for DOS Drives >1 Gbyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabled
Display <Cntrl-A> Message During BIOS Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabled
Multiple Lun Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disabled
BIOS Support for Bootable CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabled
BIOS Support for Int13 Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabled
10. Press “ESC” three (3) times to page back to the “Exit Utility ?” menu. Use the “Arrow Keys” to hi-light
“Yes” and press “ENTER” to exit the Adaptec SCSI Utility. Press any key to reboot the computer.
2.3.2.8 Common Problems –
1. Improperly set SCSI addresses.
2. Terminating resistors not at the extremes of the SCSI chain.

2.4 Hard Disk Drives
2.4.1 Seagate 545MB SCSI Hard Drive, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-186
Figure 2-14: Seagate 545MB SCSI Hard Drive
Seagate Technology, CAGE code 65687

920 Disc Drive
Scotts Valley, CA 95066
The vendor's part number is ST3655N.
2.4.1.2 Application – This hard drive is used in the ‘486 PC, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-50.
2.4.1.3 Interfaces – The hard drive connects to the computer’s power supply and to the SCSI interface card.

2.4.1.4 Configuration – The jumper configurations are as shown in Figure 2-15.
Figure 2-15: Seagate 545MB SCSI Hard Drive Jumper Settings
1) Set the proper configuration options.
2) Make sure the computer is powered off.
NOTE:
It usually is easier to install the power cable and SCSI cable before mounting the hard
drive into the bay. However, if the cables are not long enough, perform steps 3 & 4 in
reverse order.
3) Thread the power cable and SCSI cable through the drive bay (if step 4 is performed first, ignore this).
Install the cables to the drive.
4) Mount the drive into the bay.
CAUTION
cables.

Hard Disk Format –
1. With the PC power OFF, insert the Microsoft MS-DOS 6.22 Setup Disk #1 into drive "A" and turn on
the PC power.
2. Escape out of the SETUP program by pressing "F3" followed by "F3" again. Use the "Fdisk" command
to set up partitions on the hard disk. Do Not install DOS on the hard disk !!!
3. Select CREATE DOS PARTITION by entering "1". Then enter "1" again to CREATE PRIMARY DOS
PARTITION.
4. Select USE MAXIMUM AVAILABLE SPACE by entering "Y".
5. Press "Enter" to restart the computer.
6. Escape out of the SETUP program by pressing "F3" followed by "F3" again.
7. Type "format c:" to format the C: drive. Enter "Y" to continue.
8. At the prompt VOLUME LABEL (11 Characters, Enter for None), press “Enter”.
2.4.1.7 Potential Problems –
1. SCSI controller not functioning properly. See chapter 2.3.
2. The hard drive SCSI address incorrect (should be 0).
3. The termination resistors are not installed and should be (or vice versa).
4. The SCSI cable is incorrectly oriented or loose.

2.4.2 Seagate 1.2GB SCSI Hard Drive, Sperry Marine P/N 1813064
Seagate Technology, CAGE code 65687

920 Disc Drive
Scotts Valley, CA 95066
The vendor's part number is ST31230N.
2.4.2.2 Application – This hard drive is used in the Vision Pentium PC, Sperry Marine P/N 1820488.
2.4.2.3 Interfaces – The hard drive connects to the computer’s power supply and to the Fast SCSI interface
card.
2.4.2.4 Configuration – The jumper configuration are as shown in Figure 2-16.
Figure 2-16: Seagate 1.2GB SCSI Hard Drive

1) Set the proper configuration options.
2) Make sure the computer is powered off.
NOTE:
It usually is easier to install the power cable and SCSI cable before mounting the hard
drive into the bay. However, if the cables are not long enough, perform steps 3 & 4 in
reverse order.
3) Thread the power cable and SCSI cable through the drive bay (if step 4 is performed first, ignore this).
Install the cables to the drive.
4) Mount the drive into the bay.
CAUTION
cables.

Hard Disk Format –
the PC power.
2. Escape out of the SETUP program by pressing "F3" followed by "F3" again. Use the "Fdisk" command
to set up partitions on the hard disk. Do Not install DOS on the hard disk !!!
3. Select CREATE DOS PARTITION by entering "1". Then enter "1" again to CREATE PRIMARY DOS
PARTITION.
4. Select USE MAXIMUM AVAILABLE SPACE by entering "Y".
5. Press "Enter" to restart the computer.
7. Type "format c:" to format the C: drive. Enter "Y" to continue.
8. At the prompt VOLUME LABEL (11 Characters, Enter for None), press “Enter”.
2. The hard drive SCSI address incorrect (should be 0).

2.5 CD-ROM Drives
2.5.1 NEC Multispin CD-ROM Reader, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-173
The NEC Multispin CD-ROM operates at different speeds according to the disk in use. The drive features a front-
panel LCD display and built-in diagnostics. The drive is a SCSI device and fits into a standard IBM-PC
compatible drive bay.
NEC Technologies, Inc.

1225 N. Michael Drive
Wood Dale, Illinois 60191-1094
1-800-388-8888
2.5.1.2 Application – The NEC CD-ROM Reader is used in the VMS-VT computer system, Sperry Marine
P/N 1820488.
2.5.1.3 Disk Cartridge – The NEC CD-ROM Reader uses a disk cartridge (also known as a disk caddy) to
protect the CD.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to place CD-ROMs into the reader without using the cartridge.
Inserting A Disk Into The Cartridge –
1. Grip the sides of the cartridge and open the transport cover by pressing on the end tabs and lifting the
cover from the edge.
2. Place the CD-ROM disk into the cartridge with the label side up.
3. Close the cover and press down on both sides of the cartridge. Make sure both sides lock securely with
a “snap” sound.
Inserting/Removing Cartridge To The Reader –
NOTE:
If the cartridge cover is not locked properly, the CD-ROM reader may malfunction or be damaged when
the cartridge is inserted into the drive.
1. Open the dust door (reference Figure 2-17) by rotating downward.
2. Make sure the reader is powered on before attempting insert a cartridge. Slowly insert the cartridge end
that’s indicated by the arrow on the cartridge. The cartridge is drawn into the drive by a motor.
3. To remove a cartridge, open the dust door completely and the cartridge is ejected.

Figure 2-17: NEC Multispin CD-ROM Front View
2.5.1.4 Interfaces – Reference figure 2-18. The CD-ROM drive connects to computer power and the SCSI
adapter. The PC bus interface is described in the Configuration section, below. There are no other external
interfaces.
Figure 2-18: NEC Multispin CD-ROM Rear View
2.5.1.5 Configuration – Figure 2-19 shows the configuration jumper block. The two configuration parameters
are the SCSI Device ID and the Termination Resistors. The CD-ROM drive can have any SCSI ID except: SCSI
ID #0 or #7. These are reserved for the hard drive and SCSI controller. Table 2-10 shows the jumper settings.

Figure 2-19: NEC Multispin CD-ROM Jumper Block
Table 2-10: NEC Multispin CD-ROM SCSI Device ID Jumper

Settings
Jumpers
SCSI ID
1 2 3
0 (Do not use. Reserved for hard drive.)
1 Installed
2 Installed
3 Installed Installed
4 Installed
7 (Do not use. Reserved for SCSI controller.)
The SCSI bus must have termination resistors at both ends of the device chain. This means that the SCSI adapter
has termination resistors because it’s (normally) physically at the start of the chain. The CD-ROM drive requires
termination resistors only if it is physically at the end of the cable.

Figure 2-20: NEC Multispin CD-ROM Mounting Rails
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing the CD-ROM drive.
1. Power down the PC.
2. The SCSI controller card must already be installed and functioning properly. Reference chapter 2.2 of
this manual.
3. If the CD-ROM drive is at the end of the SCSI cable, the SCSI hard disk must already be installed.
4. Install the mounting rails to the CD-ROM drive as shown in Figure 2-20.
5. Set the SCSI Device ID according to Table 2-10. If the CD-ROM drive is at the end of the device chain,
installation the termination resistors as shown in Figure 2-19.
NOTE: It usually is easier to install the power cable and SCSI cable before mounting the CD-
ROM drive into the bay. However, if the cables are not long enough, perform steps 6
& 7 in reverse order.
6. Thread the power and SCSI cables through the drive bay and connect to drive (if step 7 is performed
first, ignore this). Install the cables. For the SCSI cable, note that the stripped edge must be installed
at pin one of the connector, denoted by an arrow (–).
7. Mount the CD-ROM into the drive bay.

2. The CD-ROM SCSI address is incorrectly set to 0 or 7.
Diagnostic Mode – The drive’s diagnostic mode provides error codes on the LCD display (Reference
Figure 2-21). To start the diagnostic mode perform the following steps:
1. Insert any data CD into the disk cartridge and insert the cartridge into the CD-ROM reader.
2. Power down the computer.
3. Press and hold the Play/Pause button while turning power on the computer.
4. If any problems are detected an error code is displayed. Table 2-11 lists the error codes.
5. Re-boot the computer to end diagnostic mode.
Figure 2-21: NEC LCD Display

Table 2-11: Diagnostic Mode Error Codes
Error Code Cause Solution
E0 or E1 Disk cartridge empty or disk Properly insert disk. If problem

upside down. persist call NEC Technical
Support.
E2, E3 or E4 The reader is unable to read the 1. Make sure the disk is
disk. properly oriented and
inserted.
2. Make sure the disk is a data
disk, not music.
3. Try another disk.
E5, E6 or E7 Possible hardware failure. Contact NEC Technical Support.
On No internal problems found. If reader is not functioning check

SCSI controller.
Emergency Cartridge Eject – To manually eject:
1. Turn power off the computer.
2. Open the dust door completely. Reference Figure 2-17.
3. Reference Figure 2-22. Insert a steel rod about 1.2 mm in diameter (a stiff paper clip may be used) into
the emergency eject hole on the front of the reader and push firmly until the cartridge ejects.
Figure 2-22: NEC Emergency Cartridge Eject

2.6 Floppy Drives
2.6.1 Teac 3 ½-Inch Diskette Drive, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-103
The Teac floppy drive is an IBM-PC compatible 1.44 MB floppy drive.
Teac America.
7773 Telegraph Road.
Montebello, CA 90640.
213-726-0303.
The vendor’s part number is 19307322-17104.
Figure 2-23: Teac 3 ½" Floppy Drive
2.6.1.2 Application – This floppy drive is used in the VMS-VT ‘486 computer, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-
50.
2.6.1.3 Interfaces – Reference Figure 2-23. There are two electrical interfaces: power and controller board.

2.6.1.4 Configuration – There are no configurable items.
2.6.1.5 Replaceable Items – There are no field-replaceable components.
CAUTION
cables.
2. The floppy drive controller card must already be installed and functioning properly. Reference chapter
2.3 of this manual.
NOTE:
It usually is easier to install the power cable and controller card cable before mounting
the floppy drive into the bay. However, if the cables are not long enough, perform steps
3 & 4 in reverse order.
3. Thread the power and controller cables through the drive bay and connect to drive (if step 4 is performed
first, ignore this). Install the cables. For the power cable, note the orientation of the red and black wires
on the connector. For the controller cable, pin 1 is located at the end close to the power connector.
4. Secure the floppy drive into the drive bay.
1. The floppy drive controller is not functioning properly.
2. The power and/or controller cable is not correctly installed.

2.6.2 Sony 3 ½-Inch Diskette Drive, Sperry Marine P/N 1811432
The Sony floppy drive, shown in Figure 2-23, is an IBM-PC compatible 1.44 MB floppy drive.
Sony Corporation, CAGE code SO57A.

San Jose, CA.
408-432-0190.
The vendor’s part number is MPF420-1.
Figure 2-24: Sony 3 ½" Floppy Drive
2.6.2.2 Application – This floppy drive is used in the VMS-VT 2500 Console System, Sperry Marine P/N
1981324.
2.6.2.3 Interfaces – Reference Figure 2-24. There are two electrical interfaces: power and controller board.

CAUTION
cables.
2. The floppy drive controller card must already be installed and functioning properly.
NOTE:
It usually is easier to install the power cable and controller card cable before mounting
the floppy drive into the bay. However, if the cables are not long enough, perform steps
3 & 4 in reverse order.
3. Thread the power and controller cables through the drive bay and connect to drive (if step 4 is performed
first, ignore this). Install the cables. For the power cable, note the orientation of the red and black wires
on the connector. For the controller cable, pin 1 is located at the end close to the power connector.
4. Secure the floppy drive into the drive bay.
1. The floppy drive controller is not functioning properly.
2. The power and/or controller cable is not correctly installed.

2.7 Graphics Adapters
The VMS workstations require a color graphics card and monitor as their primary display system. The Pentium
computer (Sperry Marine P/N 1820488) uses graphics card Sperry P/N 1813060. The 486 computer (Sperry
Marine P/N 1810633-50) can be configured with P/N 1812384 or 1812819.
2.7.1 ATI Technologies Mach64 Graphics Card, Sperry Marine P/N 1813060
The ATI Technologies Mach64 is a high performance 64-bit graphics accelerator card. The Mach64 provides
16.7 million colors (at 1280x1024) and 65,000 colors at 1600x1200 resolution.
Figure 2-25: ATI Mach64 Graphics Card for PCI Bus
ATI Technologies, Incorporated, CAGE code 3AC88

Thornhill
Ontario, Canada
The vendor’s part number is Mach64 PCI 2MB VRAM.
2.7.1.2 Application – This graphics card is used in the Pentium computer, Sperry Marine P/N 1820488.
2.7.1.3 Interfaces – The card fits into a PCI compatible expansion slot. The card provides a standard VGA
connector for the monitor.

2.7.1.4 Configuration – The ATI Mach64 is configured for the following video resolutions:
640x480 60 Hz non-interlaced;
1280x1024 60 Hz non-interlaced.
CAUTION
cables.
1. There is one jumper that must be set. Reference Figure 2-25.
3. Remove the computer cover.
4. Insert the Mach64 into the third PCI slot.
5. Connect the monitor cable.
BIOS Setup – The purpose of this section is to program the “On Card BIOS” of the ATI Mach64 card. By
selecting all of the common interface modes, the card is programmed so that they can be later selected in the
windows environment. The following procedure must be accomplished from a DOS environment and is not
supported under Windows NT. Perform the following steps:
1. Turn power on the monitor before the computer.
2. This procedure must be done from DOS. Reference chapter 3 for instructions on accessing DOS.
3. Insert the Graphics Xpression Disk #1 and enter the command "Install".
4. Select and enter "Quick Setup".
5. When prompted with the MONITOR SELECTION MENU, select and enter CUSTOM (notice a
"WARNING" appears). Press <Enter>.
6. Select and enter "640x480". Select "60 hz Non-Interlaced". Use the monitor controls to center and size
the screen. Press <Enter> again to accept the screen position.

7. Select and enter "800x600". Select and enter "60 HZ NON-INTERLACED". Follow the instructions
to change the screen size and position. Press <Enter> when complete.
10. Press "Esc" to exit. When prompted with "IS YOUR CUSTOM MONITOR CONFIGURATION NOW
COMPLETE (Y/N)?" enter "Y".
Verify -
MONITOR TYPE :CUSTOM

POWER-UP VIDEO MODE :VGA (CV80) COLOR PRI.
MEMORY APERTURE :ENABLED
11. Type "Y" to "SAVE CONFIGURATION". Finally press <Enter> to save and press "Esc" to exit. When
prompted DO YOU WISH TO EXIT THE INSTALLATION (Y/N)? type "Y".
Installing Windows NT Driver –
1. From Windows NT, run the Windows “NT DISPLAY” program located in the Control Panel.
2. Select “CHANGE DISPLAY TYPE”.
3. Select “CHANGE”.
4. Select “OTHER”.
5. Insert the mach64 Windows NT Driver disk into the floppy drive. Specify the location of the driver as
A:\NT35.
6. Select “ATI GRAPHICS ACCELERATORS”.
7. Select “INSTALL” and confirm.
8. Restart Windows NT. Select a desired display mode in the Display applet.

2.7.2 ATI Technologies Mach64 Graphics Card, Sperry Marine P/N 1812819
The ATI Technologies Mach64 is a high performance 64-bit graphics accelerator card. The Mach64 provides
16.7 million colors (at 1280x1024) and 65,000 colors at 1600x1200 resolution.
Figure 2-26: ATI Mach64 Graphics Card for VESA Local Bus
ATI Technologies Incorporated, CAGE code 3AC88

Thornhill
Ontario, Canada
The vendor’s part number is Mach64 VLB 2MB DRAM.
2.7.2.2 Application – This graphics card is used in the 486 PC, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-50.
2.7.2.3 Interfaces – The card fits into a VESA Local Bus slot.
2.7.2.4 Configuration – The ATI Mach64 is configured for the following video resolutions:

CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing and cards or
cables.
1. Reference Figure 2-26. This card contains three jumpers for selecting interrupt IRQ2, IRQ3 or
IRQ5. These jumpers are reserved for use by the vendor, and therefore should not be set.
4. Insert the Mach64 into an expansion slot.
BIOS Setup – The purpose of this section is to program the “On Card BIOS” of the ATI Mach64 card. By
selecting all of the common interface modes, the card is programmed so that they can be later selected in the
windows environment. The following procedure must be accomplished from a DOS environment and is not
supported under Windows NT. Perform the following steps:
3. Insert the Graphics Xpression Disk #1 and enter the command "Install".
4. Select and enter "Quick Setup".
5. When prompted with the MONITOR SELECTION MENU, select and enter CUSTOM (notice a
"WARNING" appears). Press <Enter>.
6. Select and enter "640x480". Select "60 hz Non-Interlaced". Use the monitor controls to center and size
the screen. Press <Enter> again to accept the screen position.

10. Press "Esc" to exit. When prompted with "IS YOUR CUSTOM MONITOR CONFIGURATION NOW
COMPLETE (Y/N)?" enter "Y".
Verify -
MONITOR TYPE :CUSTOM

POWER-UP VIDEO MODE :VGA (CV80) COLOR PRI.
MEMORY APERTURE :ENABLED
11. Type "Y" to "SAVE CONFIGURATION". Finally press <Enter> to save and press "Esc" to exit. When
prompted DO YOU WISH TO EXIT THE INSTALLATION (Y/N)? type "Y".
Installing Windows NT Driver –
1. From Windows NT, run the Windows “NT DISPLAY” program located in the Control Panel.
2. Select “CHANGE DISPLAY TYPE”.
3. Select “CHANGE”.
4. Select “OTHER”.
5. Insert the mach64 Windows NT Driver disk into the floppy drive. Specify the location of the driver as
A:\NT35.
6. Select “ATI GRAPHICS ACCELERATORS”.
7. Select “INSTALL” and confirm.
8. Restart Windows NT. Select a desired display mode in the Display applet.

2.7.3 ATI Technologies Ultra Pro Mach32 Graphics Card, Sperry Marine P/N 1812387
Figure 2-27: ATI Mach32 Graphics Card for VESA Bus
ATI Technologies, Incorporated, CAGE code 3AC88

Thornhill
Ontario, Canada
The vendor’s part number is Mach32 Graphics Ultra Pro.
2.7.3.2 Application – This graphics card is used in the 486 Vision computer, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-50.
2.7.3.3 Interfaces – The card fits into a VESA Local Bus expansion slot. The card provides a standard VGA
connector for the monitor.
2.7.3.4 Configuration – The ATI Utra Pro Mach32 is configured for the following video resolutions:
The Ultra Pro Mach32 card has jumpers for enabling IRQs, however the manufacturer instructs not to set these
jumpers.

CAUTION
cables.
1. There are no jumpers or switches that need setting.
4. Insert the Ultra Pro Mach32 card into a VESA Local Bus expansion slot.
BIOS Setup –
3. Insert the Ultra Pro Disk #1 and enter the command "Install".
4. Select and enter "Set Power Up Configuration". Select and enter “MONITOR TYPE”. Then select and
enter “CUSTOM”. Notice that a “WARNING” appears. Press <Enter?> to continue.
5. Select and enter "640x480". Select "60 HZ NON-INTERLACED". Use the monitor controls to center
and size the screen. Press <Enter> again to accept the screen position.
10. Press <Esc> to exit. When prompted with "IS YOUR CUSTOM MONITOR CONFIGURATION
NOW COMPLETE (Y/N)?" enter "Y".

11. Press <F10> to "SAVE CONFIGURATION". Finally, press <Enter> to exit. When prompted DO
YOU WISH TO EXIT THE INSTALLATION (Y/N)? type "Y".
Installing Windows NT Driver – Windows NT is shipped with drivers for this graphics card.

2.7.4 Photron Torpedo Graphics Card, Sperry Marine P/N 1812423-0
Figure 2-28: Photron Torpedo Graphics Card
This is a single frequency high resolution graphics card. It is used with the Barco 26" and other single frequency
monitors, such as upgrades for old VMS installations.
Personal Computer Graphics Corporation, CAGE code OGLX9

Santa Monica, CA
The vendor’s part number is Photron Torpedo 564-62 VLB 2MB
2.7.4.2 Application – This graphics card is used in the 486 PC, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-50.
2.7.4.3 Interfaces – The card fits into a standard VESA Local Bus expansion slot.
2.7.4.4 Configuration – The Photron Torpedo card is configured for the following operation:
No interrupts;
Memory 1MB;
Connect RGB;
1280x1024 resolution.

CAUTION
cables.
1. Configure the jumpers as shown in Figure 2-28.
4. Insert the graphics card into expansion slot 8.
2.7.4.6 Software Installation – This card contains the standard video BIOS extension. No additional software
setup is required.

2.8 Vision Display Systems
The Vision Display Systems consist of the monitor, touch screen (if used), and installation hardware. The
following table details the display systems:
Table 2-12: List of Vision Display Systems

Display System Monitor Touch screen (chapter 2.9)
1812352-1 1812573-1 no
1812352-2 1812573-2 no
1812386 1812357-1 no
1812388 1812357-1 1978079-2
1812389 1812571-1 no
1812390 1812572-1 no
1812392-1 1812722-1 p/o 1812722
1812392-2 1812722-2 p/o 1812722
1812395-1 1812572-1 no
1812395-2 1812572-2 no
1812581 1812710 1812567
1812582 1812710 no
1980555 1812571-1 no
1980555-2 1812571-2 no

2.8.1 21" Table Top Color Display System, Sperry Marine P/N 1812352
This display system is comprised of the following configurations:
Table 2-13: Configurations & Components for 1812352 Display System
1812352-1 110 VAC System 1812352-2 220 VAC System
1812573-1 21" NEC Monitor 1812573-2 21" NEC Monitor

1812480-7 Video cable 1812480-7 Video cable
1820177 Support 1820177 Support
1981800 Clamp 1981800 Clamp
1819677-16 Self-adhesive foam 1819677-16 Self-adhesive foam
2.8.1.1 Monitor Manufacturer – Reference chapter 2.8.11.
2.8.1.2 Monitor Specifications –
Power Requirements –
1812722-1: 120 VAC @ 2.1 A.

1812392-2: 220 VAC @ 1.05 A.
Weight – 36.0 KG (79.2 LB).
Environmental –
Operating Temperature: 0 to 35o C @ 30 to 80% Non-condensing.

Storage Temperature: -20 to +60o C @ 10 to 90% Non-condensing.
2.8.1.3 Monitor Setup – Reference chapter 2.8.11.
2.8.1.4 Touch screen Setup – This display system does not use a monitor.
2.8.1.5 Installation –
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any monitors
or cables.
1. Reference Figure 2-29. Assemble the components as shown.
2. Connect the power and VGA cables.

Figure 2-29: Assembly Components for 1812352 Display System

2.8.2 21" Console Mount Color Display System, Sperry Marine P/N 1812386
This display system is comprised of the following:
Table 2-14: Components for 1812386 Display System

1812392-1 110 VAC System
1812357-1 21" Intecolor Monitor

1812357-3 Safety Cover
1981276 Bezel
1812480-2 Video Cable
1859985-1 Control Panel
1858288-3 Loop Clamp (5)
1858288-4 Loop Clamp (6)
5902568 Rubber Gasket
T968827 Computer-to Remote Panel Harness
2.8.2.1 Monitor Manufacturer –
Intecolor Corp., CAGE code 55760.

2150 Boggs Road.
Duluth, GA 30136.
404-623-9145.
Power Dissipation – 250 Watts.
Weight – Approximately 60 KG.
Environmental –
Operating Temperature: -15 to 55o C

Storage Temperature: -15 to +70o C
Humidity: 95% Non-Condensing
2.8.2.3 Monitor Adjustments –
Image Controls – The controls are located at the rear of the monitor as shown in Figure 2-32. Adjust
the controls for the best image.
Degaussing – The screen can be degaussed using the degaussing button. Also, degaussing occurs during
power on.

2.8.2.4 Touch screen Setup – This display system does not use a touch screen.
CAUTION
monitors or cables.
2. Figure 2-30 references a support angle bracket that must be supplied by the shipyard. The mounting
details using the bracket are shown in Figure 2-31.
3. Reference Figure 2-71. Connect the power and VGA cables to the rear panel. Connect the cable
harness from the control panel to the remote connector on the rear panel.
4. Set the SYNC switch to CS.
5. Set the termination switches to on (down position).

Figure 2-31: Mounting Details For 1812386 Display System
Figure 2-32: Rear Panel For 1812386 Display System

2.8.3 21" Console Mount Color Display System With Touch screen, Sperry Marine P/N 1812388
1812392-1 110 VAC System
1812357-1 21" Intecolor Monitor

1978079-2 Touch screen
1812357-3 Safety Cover
1981276 Bezel
1812480-2 Video Cable
1859985-1 Control Panel
1858288-3 Loop Clamp (5)
1858288-4 Loop Clamp (6)
5902568 Rubber Gasket
Intecolor Corp., CAGE code 55760.

2150 Boggs Road.
Duluth, GA 30136.
404-623-9145.
Power Dissipation – 250 Watts.
Weight – Approximately 60 KG.
Environmental –

Humidity: 95% Non-Condensing
2.8.3.3 Monitor Adjustment –
Image Controls – The controls are located at the rear of the monitor as shown in Figure 2-35. Adjust
the controls for the best image.
power on.

2.8.3.4 Touch screen Setup – Reference chapter 2.9.
CAUTION
monitors or cables.
2. Figure 2-34 references a support angle bracket that must be supplied by the shipyard. The mounting
details using the bracket are shown in Figure 2-34.
3. Reference Figure 2-35.Connect the power and VGA cables to the rear panel. Connect the attached
cable from the control panel to the Remote connector at the rear panel of the monitor.
4. Set the SYNC switch to CS.
5. Set the termination switches to on (down position).

Figure 2-34: Mounting Details For 1812388 Display System
Figure 2-35: Rear Panel For 1812388 Display System

1812389 110 VAC System
1812571-1 15" NEC XP15 Monitor

1820345 Support bracket
1820346 Monitor hold down bracket
Power Requirements – 120 VAC @ 1.8 A.
Weight – 15.8 KG (34.8 LBS)
Environmental –
Operating Temperature: 0 to 35o C @ 30 to 80% Humidity

Storage Temperature: -20 to +60o C @ 10 to 90% Humidity
2.8.4.3 Monitor Adjustments – Reference chapter 2.8.11.
CAUTION
monitors or cables.
2. Connect the power and VGA cables to the monitor.
3. Set the SYNC switch (located on the back of the monitor) to the ON position.
4. Set the BNC/D-Sub switch to the D-subminiature position.


1812390 110 VAC System
1812572-1 17" NEC XP17 monitor

1820375 Support bracket
1820376 Monitor hold down bracket
2.8.5.2 Application Specifications –
Power Requirements – 120 VAC @ 2.4 A .
Weight – 23.5 KG (51.7 LB)
Environmental –
Operating Temperature: 0 to 35o C @ 30 to 80% Humidity

Storage Temperature: -20 to +60o C @ 10 to 90% Humidity
CAUTION
monitors or cables.


2.8.6 21" Table Top Color Display System With Touch screen, Sperry Marine P/N 1812392
1812722-1 21" NEC XE21 monitor with touch 1812573-2 21" NEC XE21 monitor with touch
screen screen
1812480-7 Video cable 1812480-7 Video cable
1981800 Clamp 1981800 Clamp
1812392-1: 115 VAC ±10%, current consumption 2.4 A max.

Weight – 23.5 KG (51.7 LB)
Environmental –
Operating Temperature: 0 to 35o C @ 30 to 80% Relative Humidity

Storage Temperature: -2 to +60o C @ 10 to 90% Relative Humidity
CAUTION
monitors or cables.


1812572-1 17" NEC XP17 monitor 1812572-2 17" NEC XP17 monitor
1980722 Clamp 1980722 Clamp

Weight – 23.5 KG (51.7 LB)
Environmental –
Operating Temperature: 0 to 35o C @ 30 to 80% Relative Humidity

Storage Temperature: -20 to +60o C @ 10 to 90% Relative Humidity
2.8.7.3 Monitor Setup – Reference chapter 2.8.11.
CAUTION
monitors or cables.
1. The first step is to remove the swivel from the monitor. Remove the screws recessed in the base.
2. Reference Figure 2-39. Install the rubber monitor support centered under the front of the monitor.
Recess the support from the front approximately 45 millimeters to allow access to the monitor
controls.

3. Secure the foam strip to the inside of the monitor clamp as shown in Figure 2-39.
4. Install the monitor clamp flush with the front of the monitor and secure with four screws or bolts
through the 7 millimeter holes in the clamp base.

2.8.8 26" Console Mount Color Display System With Touch screen, Sperry Marine P/N 1812581
1812581-1 System
1812710 26" Aydin monitor

1981588 Bezel
1859985-2 Control panel assembly
1812480-7 Video cable
1812615-1 Power cord
1812567 Touch screen
1812380-1 Touch screen controller
5902568 Rubber gasket
Aydin Controls, CAGE code OHGP8.

Fort Washington, PA.
The vendor’s part number is 9029.
Power Dissipation – 250 Watts
Weight – 62.5 KG (138 LBS)
Environmental –

Humidity: 95% Non-condensing
Image Controls – The controls are located as shown in Figure 2-40. Adjust the controls for the best
image.
power on.

Figure 2-40: Controls for 1812581 Display System
2.8.8.5 Lifting and Transporting the Monitor –
1. The weight of this monitor requires that at least two people are used to lift and transport it. Sperry
Marine provides a fixture for this purpose, shown in Figure 2-41. The part number for the transport
fixture is T968790.
WARNING!
MAKE SURE THE RETAINING ARMS ARE SECURE AND CANNOT SLIP OR
SPREAD. WRAP DUCT TAPE (OR EQUIVALENT) AROUND THE FIXTURE’S
JOINTS TO PREVENT PINCHING WHEN GRASPED. GLOVES SHOULD ALSO
BE WORN.

Figure 2-41: Monitor Transport Fixture
CAUTION
monitors or cables.
2. Reference Figure 2-43. Connect the power cable.
3. Connect the 5 BNC connectors for the video signal.
4. Set the SYNC switch and the VIDEO switch to HI.

Figure 2-43: Rear Panel for 1812581 Display System

1812582-1 System
1812710 26" Aydin monitor

1981588 Bezel
1859985-2 Control panel assembly
1812480-7 Video cable
1812615-1 Power cord
5902568 Rubber gasket
Aydin Controls, CAGE code OHGP8.

Fort Washington, PA.
Power Dissipation – 250 Watts
Weight – 62.5 KG (138 LBS)
Environmental –

Humidity: 95% Non-condensing
Image Controls – The controls are located as shown in Figure 2-44. Adjust the controls for the best
image.
power on.

Figure 2-44: Controls For 1812582 Display System
2.8.9.5 Lifting and Transporting the Monitor –
1. The weight of this monitor requires that at least two people are used to lift and transport it. Sperry
Marine provides a fixture for this purpose, shown in Figure 2-45. The part number for the transport
fixture is T968790.
WARNING!
MAKE SURE THE RETAINING ARMS ARE SECURE AND CANNOT SLIP OR
SPREAD. WRAP DUCT TAPE (OR EQUIVALENT) AROUND THE FIXTURE’S
JOINTS TO PREVENT SKIN PINCHING WHEN GRASPED. GLOVES SHOULD
ALSO BE WORN.

Figure 2-45: Monitor Transport Fixture
CAUTION
monitors or cables.
2. Reference Figure 2-47. Connect the power cable.
3. Connect the 5 BNC connectors for the video signal.
4. Set the Sync switch and the video switch to HI.

Figure 2-47: Rear Panel for 1812582 Display System

1812571-1 15" NEC XP15 monitor 1812571-2 15" NEC XP15 monitor
1980554 Clamp 1980554 Clamp
1980555-1: 115 VAC @ 1.8 A

1980555-2: 220 VAC @ 0.9 A
Weight – 18.7 KG.
Environmental –
Operating Temperature: 0 to 35o C

Humidity: 30 to 90% non-condensing
CAUTION
monitors or cables.
1. Remove the tilt base from the monitor. This is done by removing the single securing screw located at
the bottom of the tilt base.
2. Reference Figure 2-48. Install the rubber monitor support such that the front of the monitor is
elevated and the front switch cover opens freely.

3. Reference Figure 2-49. Secure self-adhesive cellular foam strip to the monitor clamp.
4. Install the monitor clamp flush with the front of the monitor. Secure with four mounting bolts.

Figure 2-49: Mounting Bracket for 1980555 Display System

2.8.11 NEC Multisync XP Monitors
This section covers several Vision monitors that are part the same NEC product Line:
NEC Monitor Type NEC P/N Sperry Marine P/N
XP15 JC-1537VMA 1812571-1

JC-1537VMB 1812571-2
XP17 JC-1743UMA 1812572-1

JC-1743-UMB 1812572-2
XP21 JC-2143UMA 1812573-1

JC-2143UMB 1812573-2
XE21 (Touch screen JC-2131VMA 1812722-1

is discussed in JC-2131VMB 1812722-2
chapter 2.9)
NEC Technologies, CAGE code 0NXA9

Computer Products Division
1255 Micheal Drive
Wood Dale, Illinois 60191-1094

2.8.11.2 Controls – Reference Figure 2-50. The control functions are as follows:
Table 2-23: Controls for NEC XP Monitors
Control Function
Exit In the main menu, exit the On Screen Manager

(OSM) controls. In a submenu, exit the OSM
control.
Control Up/Down Moves the highlighted area up/down to select of

the controls in OSM.
Control +/- No function in OSM main menu. In a submenu,

moves the bar in the + or - direction to increase or
decrease the adjustment.
Proceed In the OSM main menu, proceed to the selected

menu choice indicated by the highlighted area.
Reset Resets the currently highlighted OSM control to the

factory setting. In the main menu, resets all the
controls within the highlighted menu. In a submenu,
resets the highlighted control.
Degauss When pressed, the image jumps and wavers as the

screen is demagnetized. CAUTION: Allow at least
20 minutes between degaussing. Do not hold this
button down continuously.
BNC/D-Sub (XP17 & XP21 only) Down position selects D-subminiature video input
connector. Up position selects BNC.
Contrast Adjust contrast.
Brightness Adjust brightness.
Power switch Turns on/off power.
LED power indicator Located left of the power switch. Indicates the
monitor power mode.
Mode LED
On green
Standby yellow
Suspend, off orange
Power off no light

Figure 2-50: Controls for NEC XP Monitors
2.8.11.3 Setup/Adjustments –
1. Adjust the image for size, position and color using the On-Screen Manager, explained below. The
On-Screen Managed is engaged by pressing the one of the control buttons or the proceed button.
2. Adjust the brightness and contrast of the image using the front panel controls.
On-Screen Manager (OSM) – Adjusting the image quality is done via the OSM. The OSM main
provides the following selections:
Table 2-24: OSM Main Menu
Main Menu Option OSM Monitor Controls Parameter Controlled
control up/down move the image vertically up or down.
control +/- move the image left or right.

Position proceed not used.
reset not used.
exit return to main menu.

control up/down increase/decrease vertical size of the image.
Size control +/- increase/decrease horizontal size of the image.
proceed not used.
reset reset size to factory setting
control up/down move the highlighted area to select choice.
control +/- moves the bar in the + or - direction for color adjustment.
Also selects the color setting (1 through 5)
AccuColor proceed proceed to next control in submenu.
reset reset color to factory setting.
move the highlighted area to select choices:
control up/down Sides In/Out

Basic Geometry Sides Left/Right
(adjust the Sides Tilt
curvature of the Sides Align
image) Rotate (raster rotation)
control +/- increase/decrease adjustment.
proceed go to next control in submenu.
reset return currently selected control to factory setting.
control up/down move the highlighted area to select choices:

Advanced
Geometry (adjust Top In/Out
the corners of the Top Left/Right
image) Bottom In/Out
Bottom Left/Right
proceed go to next control in submenu.
reset return currently selected control to factory setting.

GlobalSync (XP21 this adjustment is made adjusts color impurities caused by earth’s magnetic field.
only) whenever the proceed
button is pressed
control up/down position OSM menu up/down.

OSM Location
control +/- position OSM menu left/right
exit return to main menu
OSM Turn-Off control left/right select turn off times.

Time
reset return to factory setting.
control up/down select Center or Bottom/Top for adjustment.

Vertical Linearity
Display Mode exit return to main menu.
control up/down selects language.

Language Select
reset return to factory setting.
Factory Preset reset return all parameters to factory defaults.
exit return to main menu without change.

2.9 Touchscreens and Controllers
2.9.1 MicroTouch Touchscreen Controller, Sperry Marine P/N 1812380-1
The MicroTouch touchscreen controller is the electronic communication and control portion of a system which
allows the position of a touch from a human finger on a computer screen to be sensed, thereby allowing the
operator to directly interact with and control a graphical display. The touchscreen controller excites the conductive
surface bonded to the tempered glass of the touchscreen itself. Touching the screen with a finger or other
Figure 2-51: MicroTouch Touchscreen Controller
conductive object changes the capacitance in such a way that the controller can determine the position of the
touch. The controller then communicates this touch and position information via a serial port to the host
computer.
2.9.1.1 Manufacturer – The MicroTouch touchscreen controllers are supplied by:
MicroTouch Systems, CAGE code 0A1V7

Methuen, MA 01844
The vendor’s part numbers are 14-05 and 14-78.

NOTE:
The vendor supplies two versions of the touchscreen controller. Both versions use the
same Sperry Marine part number. The two controllers are functionally similar. However,
they require different procedures for loading the software drivers.
2.9.1.2 Application – The touchscreen controller is used with the Vision touchscreens:
! Touchscreen for 21" monitors, Sperry Marine P/N 1978079-2
! Touchscreen for 26" monitors, Sperry Marine P/N 1812567.
2.9.1.3 Interfaces – The touchscreen controller connects to the COM1 serial port. The controller receives
electrical power from either a separate power supply or from the PC keyboard connector via a cable tap.
Power Requirement – The controller requires 5 VDC ±5%, 70-80 mA & 100 mV maximum ripple.
Touchscreen Cable – The connector for the touchscreen is located through an access slot on the underside
of the controller.
Adapter Cable – This cable is attached to the controller. The connector at the other end of the cable plugs
into COM1. That connector also has a DC power jack to accommodate the external power source.
Keyboard Power Cable – Reference Figure 2-52. This cable connects between the keyboard and the
keyboard connector on the PC. P1 connects to the PC. J1 connects to the keyboard. P3 connects the adapter
cable DC power jack.
Figure 2-52: Keyboard Power Cable

2.9.1.4 Configuration – The are no configurable jumpers or switches for the controller.
Figure 2-53: Touchscreen Controller Connections

CAUTION
Before connecting/disconnecting cables to the controller, turn off power to the computer
and monitor.
Before power is ever applied to the system, it is very important that the ground terminal
provided in the touchscreen cable be firmly grounded to the monitor chassis using a star
washer, and that the monitor, controller, and cabinet all be grounded to the ship's
structure (or earth, in land-based installations). Both the monitor and touchscreen are
powerful generators of static electrical forces that can destroy the touchscreen controller
if not properly shunted to ground.
1. Power down the PC and monitor.
2. The touchscreen must already be installed. Be sure the ground connection exists.
3. Connect the interface cable from the touchscreen to the controller. The connector is located on the
underside of the controller.
4. Reference Figure 2-53. Mount the controller to the back of the monitor.
5. Connect the adapter cable to COM1 of the PC. If necessary, reference chapter 2.15 to determine the
location of COM1.
NOTE:
During calibration, the touchscreen is installed on COM 1. During normal operation, the
touchscreen is installed on COM 2 if driver P/N 1812125-501 is used. If driver P/N
1813232 is used, the touchscreen is permanently installed on COM 1.
6. Connect the keyboard power cable (P1) to the keyboard connector. Note that for the Pentium PC (Sperry
Marine P/N 1820488), this connection instead goes to the IBM-to-PS/2 adapter cable.
7. Connect the keyboard to the keyboard power cable, J1 end.
8. Connect the keyboard power cable’s +5 VDC (P3 end) to the DC power jack on the adapter cable.
2.9.1.6 Software Installation & Calibration For MicroTouch Controller, P/N 14-05 – There are two
touchscreen driver options. Driver 1812125-501 supports the touchscreen only and requires re-booting the
computer for calibration. Driver 1813232 supports the mouse and touchscreen and doesn’t require re-booting
for calibration.

Installing The Sperry Touchscreen Driver, P/N 1812125-501 –
1. Boot the computer into MS-DOS (not Windows NT) by inserting the Microsoft MS-DOS 6.22
Installation Disk #1 into the floppy drive and turn on PC power. Be certain the touchscreen controller
is connected to COM 1 for calibration.
2. When the DOS prompt appears, insert the Touchscreen Driver Installation Disk (1812125-501) into
"A" drive and enter:
"copy a:\sermouse.sys c:\winnt35\system32\drivers".
3. Copy the touchscreen calibration utility by entering

"copy a:\touchcal.exe c:\users\install".
4. Change to the C: drive by entering "c:". Then enter "md mts" followed by "cd mts" and copy the MS-
DOS setup tool into the C:\MTS directory by entering "copy a:\mts\. c:\mts".
Enter "dir" and verify the following files appear:
MICROCAL.DOC
MICROCAL.HLP
MICROCAL.EXE
RELEASE.DOC
5. Enter "microcal" from the C:\MTS directory and press the <space> bar to initiate the program.
Select DIAGNOSTICS followed by FIND TOUCHSCREEN and SERIAL. Verify the communication
parameters listed in the STATUS window are as shown below:
Port Active : COM1

Baud Rate : 4800
Parameters : N72
(If not, select EXIT TO MAIN MENU followed by CONFIGURE and COMMUNICATION
PARAMETERS. Then select N72 and press "Enter" followed by "Y" to continue). Select GO TO
MAIN MENU.
Select CONFIGURE again followed by AUTOBAUD DETECTION. Then select DISABLE and "Y"
to continue.
Select BAUD RATE = 4800 and press "Enter".
Select EXIT TO MAIN MENU. Select DIAGNOSTICS followed by FIND TOUCHSCREEN and
SERIAL. Verify the communication parameters listed in the STATUS window are as follows:
Port Active : COM1

Baud Rate : 4800
Parameters : N72
6. Select EXIT TO MAIN MENU. Then press the <F4> key to enter terminal mode. Press the CAPS
LOCK key. Then enter

"<CNTL> A" followed by "CN" and press "Enter".
7. The terminal response should be "0" (zero).
8. Touch the Lower Left Corner of the screen. The terminal response should be "1".
Touch the Upper Right Corner of the screen. The terminal response should be a "0" or "1" (depends on
version of Microcal).
9. Press <F10> to exit the terminal mode and enter the MAIN MENU.
10. When complete press the F3 function key to test the touchscreen. Draw lines from the center to the four
sides and corners of the display. When complete, press ESC to exit the DRAW MODE.
Select EXIT TO DOS and press "Y" to return to DOS.
11. Turn off the computer. Then remove the TOUCHSCREEN CABLE and replace the MOUSE on COM1.
Remove the disk from drive A: and turn the computer back on. Then enter WINDOWS NT.
12. Open a COMMAND PROMPT (MS-DOS) window and edit the registry by entering "REGEDT32".
Then select HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE followed by SYSTEM, CURRENTCONTROLSET,
SERVICES, SERMOUSE, and PARAMETERS.
Select "EDIT" (by using ALT - E) followed by "ADD VALUE". Then at the VALUE NAME prompt
type (but DO NOT enter) "Override Hardware Bitstring" (pay attention to the CAPITAL LETTERS).
At the DATA TYPE prompt select "REG_DWORD" and press "OK". Then at the DATA prompt type
"01" for COM1. Also verify the RADIX HEX block is selected.
Then select "OK" followed by "REGISTRY" (using ALT - R) and "EXIT".
NOTE:
The touchscreen must be installed to the monitor before attempting calibration. Reference
chapter 2.9.2 or 2.9.3 for installation.
13. Finally "shutdown" NT and turn off the computer. Replace the MOUSE with the TOUCHSCREEN
CABLE on COM1 and re-boot the computer into WINDOWS NT. Enter "touchcal" at the
C:\USERS\INSTALL prompt and touch each CALIBRATION CROSS and select ACCEPT when
finished.
14. Shutdown NT and re-boot the computer.
Installing The Microtouch Touchscreen Driver, P/N 1813232 –
1. Insert the MicroTouch Driver disk (1813232) into drive A and re-boot. Be certain the touchscreen
controller is connected to COM 1.

2. The Microcal program starts automatically. The program should find the controller on COM 1, 9600
baud and N72.
3. Select the Config menu. Select Communications Parameters, then select N81 from the list.
4. A warning menu appears. Type “Y” to accept the changes.
5. Select the AutoBaud menu.
6. Select Disable, type “Y” at the warning window, and select 4800 from the list.
7. Press the <Enter> key to move to the main menu, and ESC to exit the program.
8. Re-boot the computer into Windows NT, then open a DOS window.
9. Type the following:
cd\ <Enter>
md mtsnt <Enter>
cd mtsnt
10. Insert the driver disk (1813232) into the A: drive and change to the A: drive.
11. Type the following to install the drivers libraries and controls:
install a: c:\mtsnt
12. A window appears. Select bus 1, com 1 4800 baud. Press ok and ok again.
13. At the C:\ prompt, type:
cd mtsnt <Enter>
winpanel <Enter>
14. Select ok and then yes. This creates the registry variables for the driver.
15. Type:
regedt32 <Enter>
Go to Hkey_Local_Machine, System, CurrentControlSet, Services, Touch, Parameters.
16. On the right side of the window there will be a variable, TapMode.
17. Double click on TapMode, change to value to 2, select OK.

NOTE:
Perform step 18 only if the original Sperry touchscreen driver is installed. The original
driver must be removed.
18. Move to Hkey_Local_Machine, CurrentControlSet, Services, Sermouse, Parameters. On the right side
of the window there is a variable OverrideHardwareBitstring. This variable must be deleted. Press the
<Delete> key and select Yes at the warning window.
19. Exit the registry and re-boot. The touchscreen should now be active.
NOTE:
The touchscreen must be installed on the monitor before attempting calibration.
Reference chapter 2.9.2 or 2.9.3 for installation.
Calibration is performed under VMS-VT. A button appears on the System Menu to allow the user
to calibrate. To set this up, the CONFIG.INI file must be edited to included the touchscreen.
Reference Appendix A of this manual for the procedure.
2.9.1.7 Software Installing & Calibration For MicroTouch Controller, P/N 14-78 –
1. Insert the Microcal program disk (1813232) into drive A and re-boot. Be certain the touchscreen
controller is connected to COM 1.
2. From the Microcal main screen, press <F4> to enter terminal mode. All commands must be uppercase.
<Ctrl> A
“AD”
<Enter>
The touchscreen controller should respond with “00" or “01". This should disable the autobaud detect.
<Ctrl> A
“PN813"
<Enter>
These commands should set the controller for no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and 4800 baud.
5. Use the on-screen instructions to exit from terminal mode and the Microcal program.
2.9.1.8 Common Problems – One problem frequently experienced by service personnel, in particular, is the
problem of a (temporarily) non-responsive touchscreen. This sometimes occurs if the technician touches the
touchscreen with the bezel raised, then lowers the bezel with the power still applied. The touchscreen controller's
calibration can be lost when this occurs. It is cured simply by turning the power off, waiting at least five seconds,
then turning the power back on.

CAUTION
Always wait at least five seconds after turning the monitor or computer power off before
re-applying power. Re-applying power too quickly can cause some unprotected monitor
power supplies to fail.
A more serious service problem with touchscreen systems is failure of the controller electronics due to a
combination of static electricity and improper grounding. The only solution is correction of the grounding
problem followed by replacement of the touchscreen controller.
2.9.1.9 Replaceable Items – There are no replaceable components on the MicroTouch controllers.

2.9.2 MicroTouch 19" Capacitive Touchscreen, Sperry Marine P/N 1978079-2
Ground
Terminal
Controller
Connector
Figure 2-54: MicroTouch Systems Touchscreen For 21" Monitors
The MicroTouch touchscreen is the capacitive sensor portion of a system which allows the position of a touch
from a human finger on a computer screen to be sensed, thereby allowing the operator to directly interact with
and control a graphical display. The touchscreen is a piece of molded tempered glass with a conductive material
bonded to its surface. Electrodes around the edge of the screen distribute a voltage field around the glass.
Touching the screen with a finger or other conductive object disturbs the field in such a way that the controller
can determine the position of the touch.
2.9.2.1 Manufacturer – The MicroTouch touchscreens are supplied by:

Methuen, MA 01844
The vendor's part number for the 21" touchscreen is OXTS1905-MT3.
2.9.2.2 Application – The MicroTouch touchscreen is intended for use with 21" Vision color monitors.
2.9.2.3 Interfaces – The MicroTouch touchscreen has one electrical interface (shown in Figure 2-54) which
mates to the touchscreen controller.
2.9.2.4 Removing the Touchscreen – All Sperry Marine products featuring a touchscreen are supplied with
the touchscreen already installed. The following information is supplied for those occasions when a defect with
a monitor or a touchscreen requires the removal or replacement of a touchscreen.
The touchscreen is secured to the front surface of the monitor display tube using two-sided gasket tape. This
touchscreen may be replaced without replacing the complete monitor. Conversely, if it is necessary to replace
the monitor, the touchscreen must be removed from the defective display for installation onto the new monitor.
The touchscreen is made of curved glass to fit the front surface of the monitor tube. Care must be exercised in
removing and replacing the touchscreen to avoid damage resulting from stress induced during removal or
handling.

CAUTION
Do not attempt to simply pull the touchscreen free of the monitor's display tube
(CRT). Carefully remove all gasket material which secures the touchscreen.
1. Disconnect the touchscreen lead from the touchscreen controller board, and disconnect the ground lead
from the monitor chassis. Fold back the cable and secure it to the touchscreen's front surface with tape,
to prevent damage to cable wires while removing and replacing the touchscreen.
2. Use a piece of 18 gauge insulated wire approximately 30 inches (760 mm) in length to separate the touch
screen from the monitor. Carefully insert the wire between the edge of the touch screen and the monitor
surface and split the gasket. Work around the screen from top to bottom and split all gasket material until
the touch screen is free.
3. If either the touchscreen or the monitor are to be retained, remove all gasket material and tape residue
from the assemblies.
2.9.2.5 Installing the Touchscreen – If a new touchscreen is being installed, it is supplied with the two-sided
gasket tape used for installing the replacement assembly. If a removed touchscreen is being remounted, it is
necessary to use the proper width and type gasket tape for installation. Using this tape ensures proper installation
of the touchscreen and prevents the touchscreen from coming loose at a future time. (It also prevents the
touchscreen from becoming impossible to remove at a future time as a result of dried glue, or the gasket being
too thin or too hard to cut free.)
The materials required for installing the touchscreen are:
# 12.7 mm (½ inch) wide x 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick double-sided foam tape, Scotch® Brand 3M, Core
Series 2-0300, or equivalent
# Any commercial glass cleaner or water
Install the touchscreen as follows:
1. Using the glass cleaner and a soft lint-free cloth, clean the back surface of the touchscreen and the front
surface of the monitor to remove all dust and old tape.
2. Proper installation of the touchscreen requires aligning the touchscreen with the monitor.
3. Remove the monitor bezel by removing the 8 allen bolts securing it to the top console section.
4. Cut 4 strips of double-sided tape (Sperry Marine P/N 1897193-1) ½ the length of each side of the
touchscreen. Place the strips at the center of the sides of the touchscreen as shown in Figure 2-55.

Figure 2-55: Applying the Tape to the Monitor Screen
5. Cut four strips of double-sided tape the full length of each side of the touchscreen. Place the strips on
top of the ones installed in step 4.
6. Carefully press the touchscreen onto the surface of the monitor. Be certain the touchscreen is centered
horizontally and vertically .
7. Carefully re-install the bezel. Check for proper closure and sealing of the bezel gasket around the front
surface of the monitor.
CAUTION
Be certain that the touchscreen is not touching any metal surface, and check that
there is approximately 1.5 mm (1/16 inch) clearance between the back surface of
the touchscreen and the front surface of the monitor.
8. Clean the front surface of the touchscreen with the glass cleaner.
9. Connect the touchscreen lead to the touchscreen controller board (mounted on the side of the
monitor). Connect the green ground lead to the monitor chassis using a star washer.

CAUTION
Before power is ever applied to the system, it is very important that the
ground terminal provided in the touchscreen to controller cable be firmly
grounded to the monitor chassis using a star washer, and that the monitor,
controller, and cabinet all be grounded to the ship's structure (or earth, in
land-based installations). Both the monitor and touchscreen are powerful
generators of static electrical forces that can destroy the touchscreen
controller if not properly shunted to ground.
10. Touchscreen calibration is discussed in chapter 2.9.1.6.
2.9.2.6 Common Problems – The most common service problem with touchscreen systems is failure of the
controller electronics due to a combination of static electricity and improper grounding.

2.9.3 MicroTouch 24" Touchscreen, Sperry Marine P/N 1812567
Ground
Terminal
Controller
Connector
Figure 2-56: MicroTouch Systems Touchscreen For 26" Monitors
The MicroTouch touchscreen is the capacitive sensor portion of a system which allows the position of a touch
from a human finger on a computer screen to be sensed, thereby allowing the operator to directly interact with
and control a graphical display. The touchscreen is a piece of molded tempered glass with a conductive material
bonded to its surface. Electrodes around the edge of the screen distribute a voltage field around the glass.
Touching the screen with a finger or other conductive object disturbs the field in such a way that the controller
can determine the position of the touch.
2.9.3.1 Manufacturer – The MicroTouch touchscreen is supplied by:

Methuen, MA 01844
2.9.3.2 Application – The MicroTouch touchscreen is intended for use with 26" Vision color monitors.
2.9.3.3 Interfaces – The MicroTouch touchscreen has one electrical interface (shown in Figure 2-56) which
mates to the touchscreen controller.
2.9.3.4 Replacing the Touchscreen – All Sperry Marine products featuring a touchscreen are supplied with
the touchscreen already installed. The following information is supplied for those occasions when a defect with
a monitor or a touchscreen requires the removal or replacement of a touchscreen.
Removing the Touchscreen – The touchscreen is secured to the front surface of the monitor display tube
using two-sided gasket tape. This touchscreen may be replaced without replacing the complete monitor.
Conversely, if it is necessary to replace the monitor, the touchscreen must be removed from the defective
display for installation onto the new monitor. The touchscreen is made of curved glass to fit the front surface
of the monitor tube. Care must be exercised in removing and replacing the touchscreen to avoid damage
resulting from stress induced during removal or handling.

CAUTION
Do not attempt to simply pull the touchscreen free of the monitor's display tube
(CRT). Carefully remove all gasket material which secures the touchscreen.
1. Disconnect the touchscreen lead from the touchscreen controller board, and disconnect the ground lead
from the monitor chassis. Fold back the cable and secure it to the touchscreen's front surface with tape,
to prevent damage to cable wires while removing and replacing the touchscreen.
2. Use a piece of 18 gauge insulated wire approximately 30 inches (760 mm) in length to separate the touch
screen from the monitor. Carefully insert the wire between the edge of the touch screen and the monitor
surface and split the gasket. Work around the screen from top to bottom and split all gasket material until
the touch screen is free.
3. If either the touchscreen or the monitor are to be retained, remove all gasket material and tape residue
from the assemblies.
2.9.3.5 Installing the Touchscreen – If a new touchscreen is being installed, it is supplied with the two-sided
gasket tape used for installing the replacement assembly. If a removed touchscreen is being remounted, it is
necessary to use the proper width and type gasket tape for installation. Using this tape ensures proper installation
of the touchscreen and prevents the touchscreen from coming loose at a future time. (It also prevents the
touchscreen from becoming impossible to remove at a future time as a result of dried glue, or the gasket being
too thin or too hard to cut free.)
The materials required for installing the touchscreen are:
# 12.7 mm (½ inch) wide x 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick double-sided foam tape, Scotch® Brand 3M, Core
Series 2-0300, or equivalent
# Any commercial glass cleaner or water
Install the touchscreen as follows:
1. Using the glass cleaner and a soft lint-free cloth, clean the back surface of the touchscreen and the front
surface of the monitor to remove all dust and old tape.
2. Proper installation of the touchscreen requires aligning the touchscreen with the monitor.
3. Remove the monitor bezel by removing the 8 allen bolts securing it to the top console section.
4. Cut 4 strips of double-sided tape (Sperry Marine P/N 1897193-1) ½ the length of each side of the
touchscreen. Place the strips at the center of the sides of the touchscreen as shown in Figure 2-57.

Figure 2-57: Applying the Tape to the Monitor Screen
5. Cut four strips of double-sided tape the full length of each side of the touchscreen. Place the strips on
top of the ones installed in step 4.
6. Carefully press the touchscreen onto the surface of the monitor. Be certain the touchscreen is centered
horizontally and vertically .
7. Carefully re-install the bezel. Check for proper closure and sealing of the bezel gasket around the front
surface of the monitor.
CAUTION
Be certain that the touchscreen is not touching any metal surface, and check that
there is approximately 1.5 mm (1/16 inch) clearance between the back surface of
the touchscreen and the front surface of the monitor.
8. Clean the front surface of the touchscreen with the glass cleaner.
9. Connect the touchscreen lead to the touchscreen controller board (mounted on the side of the monitor).
Connect the green ground lead to the monitor chassis using a star washer.

CAUTION
terminal provided in the touchscreen to controller cable be firmly grounded to
the monitor chassis using a star washer, and that the monitor, controller, and
cabinet all be grounded to the ship's structure (or earth, in land-based
installations). Both the monitor and touchscreen are powerful generators of
static electrical forces that can destroy the touchscreen controller if not properly
shunted to ground.
10. Touchscreen calibration is discussed in chapter 2.9.1.6.
2.9.3.6 Common Problems – The most common service problem with touchscreen systems is failure of the
controller electronics due to a combination of static electricity and improper grounding.

2.10 Keyboards
2.10.1 IBM-to-PS/2 Keyboard Adapter Cable, Sperry Marine P/N 1813063
Figure 2-58: IBM-to-PS/2 Keyboard Cable Adapter
The keyboard cable adapter is shown in Figure 2-58. The adapter is required to connect a standard IBM-AT type
keyboard to the Pentium computer, Sperry Marine P/N 1820488.
2.10.1.1 Vendor and Manufacturer –
Belkin Components, CAGE code 68167

Compton, CA
The vendor's part number is F2N017-06INCH
Network Technologies, CAGE code 0LWF1

Aurora, OH
The vendor’s part number is ADP-5D-6MD
2.10.1.2 Application – Reference Figure 2-58. The standard keyboard connects to the 5 DIN end. The 6
DIN mini connector goes to the computer.

2.10.2 Key Tronics KB101 Enhanced Keyboard, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-105
The keyboard is designed to work with the IBM PC-compatibles.
Figure 2-59: Key Tronic KB101 Enhanced Keyboard
2.10.2.1 Vendor and Manufacturer –
Key Tronic
P. O. Box 14687
Spokaine, WA 99214-0687
1-800-262-6006
The vendor's part number is KB101-C.
2.10.2.2 Application – The KB101 keyboard is supplied with all VMS equipment having an operator
interface: namely, the Command Station and the Navigation Workstation.
2.10.2.3 Interfaces – The keyboard’s only interface is the industry-standard 5-pin DIN plug, shown in
Figure 2-60.

Pin 1: KEYBD CLOCK 3
Pin 2: KEYBD DATA 5 industry-Standard
Pin 3: KEYBD RESET 2 DIN Keyboard Plug
Pin 4: GROUND 4
Pin 5: +5V IN 1
Figure 2-60: The KB101 Keyboard Connector
2.10.2.4 Configuration – The keyboard is configured to operate in the Enhanced XT, AT & PS/2 mode.
DIP switch settings determine the configuration and options for the keyboard. The possible settings are as
follows:
Table 2-25: DIP Switch Parameters
Switch Parameter
1-2 Controls keyboard operation mode.
3 Used to eliminate audible tones that may be

generated with some IBM-PCS. Disables
scan codes.
4 Used to switch the functions of Caps Lock

and Ctrl keys.
5-7 Not used.
8 Reserved - leave at factory settings.
2.10.2.5 Replaceable Items – The KB101 keyboard has no replaceable items.
2.10.2.6 Software Support – Support for keyboard operation is provided as standard features of the BIOS.
CAUTION
Power down the PC before connecting the keyboard cable.
1. Reference Figure 2-61. Locate the configuration switch on the bottom of the keyboard. Remove the
cover.
2. Reference Figure 2-62. Configure the keyboard for Enhanced XT/AT & PS/2.

3. Connect the keyboard to the computer. If necessary, use the IBM-to-PS/2 adapter, Sperry Marine P/N
1813063.
Figure 2-61: Location of Configuration Switches
Figure 2-62: Configuration Switch Settings

2.11 SeaNET
As long as all necessary bridge integration and automation functions can be accomplished by a single computer
and display system, and if the number of sensor and equipment interfaces is not too large, there may be no
requirement for a network. If two or more computers are needed, however, the situation changes drastically, with
the number of interconnections required quickly becoming unmanageable. SeaNET is a Local Area Network
(LAN) that Sperry Marine developed to solve the interconnection problem.
SeaNET is a central integrating element of Sperry Marine's Integrated Bridge systems. SeaNET is an application
of the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet Standard providing real-time sensor data distribution and file transfer. The Ethernet
architecture and Sperry's real-time interface provide a distributed network that can guarantee access to the
network for all devices, with an end-to-end message delay less than a tenth of a second.
SeaNET provides two basic services that make it a very valuable tool for accomplishing the integration of bridge
equipment:
# high-speed message distribution, and

# highly reliable file transfer
SeaNET's message distribution service makes the data from any sensor connected to SeaNET almost instantly
available to every other device on the network. The Peripheral and Interface Specifications chapter of this
document describes these messages in detail. The VMS Command Station monitors all information on SeaNET.
In addition, the VMS Command Station directs most of the system commands to the other Integrated Bridge
components.
SeaNET also provides a distributed file transfer capability that requires no file server. Files can be transferred
from any network node to any other node at speeds comparable to the speeds that files can be written to a hard
disk. (Any device with a direct network interface is referred to as a network node). The file transfer facility is
valuable for moving chart, NAVLINE, and voyage plan files from the Planning Station where they are usually
created to the VMS Command Station, where they are most often used when under way.
2.11.1 SeaNET Specifications & Operation
SeaNET adheres to the ISO 8802/3 (IEEE 802.3) Ethernet LAN Standard.
2.11.1.1 Protocol – Ethernet uses Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD).
In this method, multiple workstations access a transmission medium (Multiple Access) by listening until no
signals are detected (Carrier Sense). Then the workstations transmit and check to see if more than one signal is
present (Collision Detection). Each station attempts to transmit when it “believes” the network is free. If there
is a collision, each station attempts to re-transmit after a preset delay. This delay is different for each workstation.

2.11.1.2 Hardware Installation – Reference Figure 2-63. The stations are connected to each other in a
peer-to-peer configuration.
CAUTION
cables.
Cable Assembly –
NOTE:
1. The total cable length between the first and last station cannot exceed 185 meters.
2. The minimum distance between two stations is 0.5 meters.
3. A 50 ohm BNC terminator must be placed at each extreme end of the cable. One of the
terminators must be grounded at the computer chassis.
Reference Figure 2-64 for cable assembly instructions. The components for building the cables are part of the
SeaNET Bridge Installation Kit, Sperry Marine P/N 1981085. Those components are as follows:
Table 2-26: Ethernet Installation Kit Components
Item QTY Part Number Description
1 1 1812446-2 Plastic carrying case.
2 1 1812446-3 Coaxial wire stripper.
3 1 1812446-4 Ratchet hex crimping tool.
4 15 1812446-5 BNC coaxial connector.
5 8 1812446-6 BNC “T” adapter.
6 4 1812446-7 BNC incline splice adapter.
7 4 1812446-8 BNC 50 ohm terminator.
8 1 1812446-8 Tool operating instructions.
9 1 1812451 Ground lead, electrical.
10 1 P1898048-1 Ethernet cable, Belden 89907.

Figure 2-63: SeaNET Configuration

Cable Test Procedure –
NOTE:
IT IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT THAT THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE BE
PERFORMED BEFORE CONNECTING ANY CABLE SEGMENTS.
1. Check all crimps for workmanship - loose wire, nicks etc.
2. With a calibrated volt/ohm meter, perform these measurements
a. Check the BNC’s center conductor to shield for shorts.
b. Check center conductor at each end of the cable for continuity.
c. Check the outer case of the BNC connectors at each end of the cable for continuity.
d. Install 50 ohm terminator at one end of the cable and check the opposite end of the cable. The BNC
connector at the other end of the cable should measure 50 ohms between the outer case and the
center conductor.
e. Remove the terminator and repeat step 2d with the second terminator. Note that only two terminators
are required for the installation. One of the terminators must be modified by adding a ground strap
(step 5 in Figure 2-64).
Station Connections – The details of connecting the stations are shown in Figure 2-63. The item numbers
shown on the drawing are listed in table 2-26.
2.11.1.3 Software Installation – The SeaNET software installation is part of the Windows NT installation.

Figure 2-64: SeaNET Cabling

2.11.2 Adtron AE-200LC Ethernet Adapter Card, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-175
Figure 2-65: Adtron AE-200LC Ethernet Interface Board
The AE-200LC complies with IEEE-802.3 10Base2 and 10BaseT Ethernet standard. The card is also compatible
with IBM PC 386 (and higher) systems. There is an interface for BNC and RJ-45 connectors.

Adtron Technology Co,. LTD.

Phone 800-998-4646.
The vendor’s part number is AE-200LC.
2.11.2.2 Application – The Ethernet Adapter board connects the station PCS on the SeaNET LAN.
2.11.2.3 Interfaces – The Adtron Ethernet Adapter board is located in slot 5 on the motherboard. Refer to
chapter 2.2 to locate slot 5.
PC Bus Interface – The card requires power from the PC bus as follows:
+5 VDC @1 Amp max.
2.11.2.4 Configuration – Figure 2-65 shows jumper settings for the VMS-VT. Table 2-27 shows the
configuration settings for the VMS-VT.
Table 2-27: Configuration Setup for Adtron Ethernet Board
Configuration Option VMS-VT Setting
RJ-45/BNC connector BNC
Interrupt Level IRQ 10
Base Address 340 hex
PC Mode Mode 0
2.11.2.5 Hardware Installation – Installing the Adtron Ethernet Adapter Card consists of following:
1. Set the proper configuration options, as previously detailed in this section.
2. Install the board in slot 5 of the Vision computers.
3. Install the BNC connector.
4. Reference section 2.11.1.2 of this manual for instruction regarding SeaNET Installation.
CAUTION
cables.

2.11.2.6 Software Installation – Part of the installation of Windows NT.
2.11.2.7 Common Problems – Most problems encountered with the SeaNET interface are traced to (1)
wiring problems, (2) adapter card mis-configuration, and (3) software installation problems.
LED Indicators – Figure 2-66 shows two LED indicators on the Ethernet card. These LEDs indicate the
presence of station link and activity status for installation and diagnostic purposes.
The red activity LED blinks when data is transmitted or received. The green link LED is associated with the
RJ-45 phone jack and therefore has no useful function in the VMS-VT at this time.
Figure 2-66: Adtron AE-200LC LED Indicators

2.12 Serial Ports
2.12.1 Serial Interface Basics
Many of the VMS equipment's "standard" peripherals and direct-connected sensors employ serial interfaces. A
serial interface allows one device to communicate to another (or two devices to communicate to each other) via
a serial stream of digital bits representing messages. The interface is digital rather than analog because the
voltages on the signal lines only represent binary "1"s and "0"s. The interface is serial as opposed to parallel
because the bits are transmitted one after another over a single wire (or wire pair) rather than byte-wise over
multiple wires.
There are a very large number of varieties of serial interfaces employed in communications. A smaller but still
large number of variations will be encountered with bridge equipment interconnection. Some of the areas which
vary are:
# the physical connecting means: cables and connectors;
# the electrical signaling method: the voltage or current levels that correspond to "1"s and "0"s;
# the logical protocol used: the definition of sequences of bits for representing higher-order data entities –
characters, bytes, words, messages, etc.
The following sections describe some of the terms and concepts important for understanding the variety of serial
interfaces encountered on the VMS workstations.

2.12.1.1 Electrical Protocols Encountered in Serial Interfaces – There interfaces employ one of two
different electrical signaling methods for representing a stream of bits: RS-232 or RS-422.
RS-232C – An EIA/ANSI standard specifying RS-422 – An EIA/ANSI standard which specifies

electrical, mechanical and signal functional electrical interface characteristics only.
characteristics for connecting data terminal
equipment (DTE-terminals) to data communication
equipment (DGE-modems).
Electrical Interface Electrical Interface
Single-ended (unbalanced), ground-referenced Dual-ended (balanced) isolated (floating) signals.

signals: Every logical signal requires a complementary pair
of electrical signals (A and B):
1 = MARK = OFF (A with respect to B):

1 = MARK = OFF: -3..-25V (typically -12) -2..-6V (typically TTL levels)
0 = SPACE = ON (A with respect to B):
0 = SPACE = ON: +3..+25V (typically +12) +2..+6V (typically TTL levels)
+12V
SPACE
+5V
+3V B B
0V
–3V MARK SPACE
(Typical levels shown)

MARK A A
–12V
0V
Figure 2-67: Typical RS-232 Signal Levels

Figure 2-68: Typical RS-422 Signal Levels
Maximum Signaling Rate and Cable Length Max. Signaling Rate Based on Cable Length
20,000 bits/sec (19.2 kilobaud is highest 10 megabaud up to 12 meters (40 feet);

standard rate) up to 15 meters (50 feet). (Baud 1 megabaud up to 75 meters (250 feet);
= bits/sec; kilobaud = 1000 bits/sec). 100 kilobaud up to 1.2 kilometers (4000 feet).
2.12.1.2 Data Transmission Formats (Not Specified by EIA Standards) – There are two major
categories of data transmission formats commonly use for communications: synchronous and asynchronous.
Synchronous communications adds special synchronization characters to the data stream so as to make the
greatest possible use of the available bandwidth. Synchronous protocols have not been used by any equipment
integrated thus far by Sperry Marine.

STOP BIT FIRST STOP BIT
MARK
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 PAR.
SPACE
START BIT DATA BIT 0 (LSB)
Figure 2-69: Typical Asynchronous Bit Sequence (8 Data Bits, 1 Stop Bit, Plus Parity Shown)
Asynchronous communications protocols prefix a START bit and append one or more STOP bits and
(optionally) a PARITY bit to every character (or byte) transmitted. Figure 2-69 shows a typical bit sequence used
in asynchronous transmission.
2.12.1.3 Data Representation – The data transmitted by serial means may be either straight binary data
(understandable only by other computers) or text data (representing written language used by humans). Text data
may be represented as EBCDIC (Enhanced Binary-Coded-Decimal Information Code, an IBM standard) or ASCII
(American National Code for Information Interchange). Most serial interfaces on IBS use ASCII, a few use
binary data or binary-coded decimal (BCD), and none use EBCDIC.
2.12.1.4 IBM PC Serial Port Conventions – Almost every IBM Personal Computer or compatible is
furnished with a least one RS-232 serial port. IBM developed hardware conventions (supported by the BIOS and
DOS) for I/O address and interrupt line usage which supports up to four serial ports per PC, known as devices
COM1, COM2, COM3, and COM4.
All Sperry Marine VMS-VT computers have two serial ports, COM 1 & COM2 as standard. These are RS-232
ports with COM1 at 3F8HEX /IRQ4 and COM2 at 2F8HEX /IRQ3.
Two different connector conventions are common with RS-232 serial PC interfaces. One is based on the 25-pin
male D-connector used for the standard serial port on the original IBM PC and PC/XT. The second uses a 9-pin
male D-connector that first appeared on the IBM PC/AT. The pin assignments of these two conventions are
listed in Table 2-28.
Table 2-28: Serial Port Signal Pin Assignments

DB-25 Male DE-9 Female
Connector Signal Connector
Pin Signal Description Pin
))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))
1 Gnd Equipment ground (none)
2 TxD Transmit Data (O) 3
3 RxD Receive Data (I) 2
4 RTS Request To Send (O) 7
5 CTS Clear To Send (I) 8
6 DSR Data Set Ready (I) 6
7 Gnd Signal Ground 5
8 DCD Data Carrier Detect (I) 1
20 DTR Data Terminal Ready (O) 4
22 RI Ring Indicator (I) 9
(O) means output from computer port,

(I) means input to port

2.12.1.5 Debugging tools for serial interfaces – The following tools may be useful when installing or
debugging serial interfaces:
1) Mating connectors (unaired) – use to allow easy access to connector pins.
2) Meters –
a) use to check cable continuity (probably 90% of serial interface problems are traced to cabling);
b) use to detect presence/absence of signals.
3) Signal indicators – use bi-color LEDs to indicate the status of data and handshaking signal lines.
4) Scopes –
a) use to detect the presence/absence of signals;

b) use to look at signal quality;
c) it is sometimes possible to use them to determine baud rate (always possible with storage scopes).
5) Break-out boxes –
a) usually have signal indicators built-in;

b) allow trial re-wiring of cables;
c) allow trial insertion of handshaking signals;
d) some have pulse detection capability.
6) Data analyzers –
a) allow viewing and/or storage of actual data streams (sequences of bits, characters, bytes);
b) allow trial use of various baud rates, number of data bits, stop bits, parity bits.
7) A PC equipped with the appropriate hardware (a COM port with the appropriate electrical interface) and
software (a terminal-emulation or communications package – Procomm, for instance) can function as
a data analyzer.

2.12.2 RocketPort 16-Port Serial Interface, Sperry Marine P/N 1812576
The RocketPort 16 multi-port serial controller provides intelligent control of 16 RS-232 or RS-422 ports. The
hardware consist of an ISA-compatible controller board (1812576-3) and the connector interface block
(1812576-6).
Figure 2-70: RocketPort 16 ISA-Compatible Controller Board
Comtrol Corp.
2675 Patton Road, Dock D.
Saint Paul, MN 55113.
USA.
Phone 800-926-6876.
2.12.2.2 Application – The RocketPort provides 16 serial interfaces for the Vision computers.
PC Bus Interface – The controller card requires power from the PC bus as follows:
+5 VDC 1.3 Amps

+12 VDC 0.17 Amps
-12 VDC 0.29 Amps
Host Connection – The RocketPort cable male end connects to the controller (Figure 2-70). The female end
connects to the connector interface block (Figure 2-71).
Serial Port Connectors – Refer to Figure 2-71. The 16 serial ports are identified as channels 0-15. The
signal pin-outs are as shown in the following table.

Table 2-29: RocketPort 16 Serial Connector Pinouts
Pin RS-232 Signal RS-422 Signal
1 Not used Not Used
2 TxD Not Used1
3 RxD Not Used1
4 RTS Not Used1
5 CTS Not Used1
6 DSR Not Used1
7 Signal ground Signal ground1
8 DCD Not Used1
9-14 Not used Not Used
15 Not used RxD+
16 Not used Not used
17 Not used RxD-
18 Not used Not used
19 Not used TxD+
20 DTR Not used1
21-24 Not used Not used
25 Not used TxD-

1
All RS-232 signals are present in RS-422 mode.

Figure 2-71: RocketPort 16 Connector Interface Block

RocketPort Controller Card – The VMS uses one RocketPort controller configured for the default address
range of 180-1C3 hex. The default switch setting is shown in Figure 2-72.
Connector Interface Block – The 16 serial ports connect to the connectors marked 0 - 15. The switch for
each connector is set for RS-232.
Figure 2-72: RocketPort Controller DIP Switch Setting

Hardware Installation –
CAUTION
cables.
2. Remove the PC cover.
3. Install the RocketPort controller card into an expansion slot. Make sure the card is properly seated.
4. Secure the card with the expansion slot screw.
5. Re-install the PC cover.
6. Attach the male end of the RocketPort cable to the controller. Install the female end to the connector
labeled “Host” on the Connector Interface Box.
7. Install the serial cables to the Connector Interface Box.
NOTE:
Chapter 3 of this manual provides a complete overview of the software installation for
the VMS-VT
1. At the DOS prompt, insert the ROCKET DIAGNOSTIC DISK into Drive A: and enter "rocket".
2. Follow the prompts to test the hardware by pressing "Enter" twice.
3. Specify ROCKETPORT 16 PORT DB25 by selecting "E" and press "Enter".
4. Specify the Base Address of 180-1C3 by selecting "C" and press "Enter".
5. Specify Interrupt 5 by selecting "C" and press "Enter".
6. Specify Board 2 is Not Installed by selecting "G" and press "Enter".

7. Verify Board 1: TYPE is "RocketPort 16 Port DB25"
I/O Range is "180-1C3"
IRQ is 5
Enter "Y" and verify a "Board Passed Message" appears. Then press "Enter" to continue.
8. Insert the LOOPBACK PLUG into PORT 0 of the External Module Block and press "Enter". Verify
the Port 0 test passed and move the Loopback Plug into the remaining ports sequentially starting with
PORT 1 and finishing with PORT 15. Finally enter "N" to exit the test program.
9. Restart the computer and start Windows NT. From the Windows NT Program Manager Window, select
the CONTROL PANEL window. Select the NETWORK icon.
10. Select ADD ADAPTER. Under the NETWORK ADAPTER CARD, select <OTHER> REQUIRES
DISK FROM MANUFACTURER. Then press CONTINUE.
11. Insert the ROCKETPORT DEVICE DRIVER FOR WINDOWS NT diskette into drive A: and select
"OK". Then select "OK" again to install the driver.
12. Under the I/O ADDRESS RANGES select ROCKETPORT 1 address 180-1C3. Under the IRQ
NUMBER select IRQ5. Under the STARTING COM PORT select COM3. Then select OK TO
INSTALL. Select "OK" twice to continue.
13. Select "OK" and then select RESTART NOW.
2.12.2.7 RocketPort Software Utilities – RocketPort provides several utilities to assist in maintaining the
system. Installing the RocketPort driver provides a program group in Windows NT. This is where the utilities
are accessed.
Changing Device Driver Settings – If you want to change the device I/O address, IRQ or the starting COM
number, use the following procedure:
1. Double-click on the RocketPort Driver Configuration icon in the RocketPort program group.
2. Make any necessary changes and select the Update Configuration button.
NOTE:
If you change the I/O Address, make sure that you shut down the PC, remove the
controller and change the DIP switch settings to match the new selection.

Viewing The Current Parameter Settings –
1. Double-click on the RocketPort COM Setting icon in the RocketPort program group.
2. Select Settings from the menu bar.
3. Select the COM port that you want to look at.
4. Click on the Get Current Settings button. The current settings for the port displays in the selection
boxes.
Changing The Default Settings for Boot-Up – Use the following procedure to permanently change the
COM port default settings.
1. Start Control Panel from Program Manager.
2. Double-click on the Ports icon to start the Ports applet.
3. Select the desired COM port.
4. Click on the Settings... button.
5. Choose the desired settings for the COM port.
6. Close the Settings window.
7. Close the Control Panel.
8. Re-boot the PC.
Changing The Default Settings – Use the following procedure to change the COM port settings.
NOTE:
The settings configured by the RocketPort COM Settings program take affect
immediately. However, when the system is re-booted, the settings revert to the default
parameters.
1. Double-click on the RocketPort COM Setting program in the RocketPort program group.
2. Select Settings from the menu bar.
3. Select the desired COM port.
4. Make the desired selection for each of the parameters and click on the Apply New Settings button to
program these selections for the COM port.
5. After your finish, click on the Quit button and select Exit from the menu bar.

Removing The Device Driver – Use the following procedure to remove an existing copy of the RocketPort
device driver (level 1.2 and higher) before installing a new version or release of the device driver.
NOTE:
If you are upgrading from Version 1.0 or 1.1 of the device driver, remove the old driver
by double-clicking on the RocketPort Driver Removal icon in the RocketPort program
group.
1. Start the Control Panel from the Program Manager.
2. Double-click on the Network icon in the Control Panel to start up the network applet.
3. Select the Comtrol RocketPort entry from the Installed Adapter Cards list (not the Installed Network
Software list) when the Network Settings dialog box appears.
4. Click on the Remove button.
5. Close the Network Settings dialog box.
6. Re-boot the PC so that the driver removal takes effect.
7. Remove the RocketPort icons from the Comtrol RocketPort Group Program Manager.
Resolving Installation Problems – If installation fails or you are trying to resolve a problem, you should
try the following before calling Comtrol technical support.
1. Check the signals between the peripherals and the interface box.
2. Check for proper cable connections.
3. Check to see if the DIP switches are properly set by double-clicking on the INSATLL.LOG icon in the
RocketPort group.
4. Re-seat the controller in the PC expansion slot.
5. Make sure that the expansion slot screw was replaced after re-inserting the controller.
6. Re-install the device driver, selecting a different I/O address range for the controller.
adapters save one may be removed, then re-added one at a time. Note that the Pentium CPU ( Sperry Marine
P/N 1820488) is equipped with on-board serial ports which have a strong potential for conflict with other serial
port adapters.

2.12.3 Hostess 550/16 Serial Interface, Sperry Marine P/N 1812346
CAUTION
Use of this serial interface could degrade the computer’s system performance. It is
recommended that any system using this interface be upgraded to the RocketPort 16.
Comtrol Corp.
2675 Patton Road, Dock D.
Saint Paul, MN 55113.
USA.
Phone 800-926-6876.
The vendor’s part numbers are:
HOXX5008A for 1812346-1 Host Interface;

INHI1610A for 1812346-7 Connector Interface Block.
2.12.3.2 Application – The RocketPort provides 16 serial interfaces for the Vision computers.
PC Bus Interface – The Host Interface card requires power from the PC bus as follows:
+5 VDC 1.2 Amps

+12 VDC 0 .06 Amps
-12 VDC 0.05 Amps
Host Connection – The connector interface block cable mates to the host interface board that’s installed
in the PC.
Serial Port Connectors – Refer to Figure 2-74. The 16 serial ports are identified as channels 1-16.

Figure 2-73: Hostess 550/16 Host Interface Board

Figure 2-74: Hostess 550/16 Connector Interface Block
Hostess Interface Board Card – The VMS uses one Hostess controller card configured for address 500
hex. Jumpers must also be set for each port to select RS-232 or RS-422 operation. The switch setting is
shown in Figure 2-73.
Connector Interface Block – The 16 serial ports connect to the connectors marked 1 - 16. There are
jumpers to configure each channel for RS-232 or RS-422 operation. The jumpers are shown in Figure 2-75.
The following table shows how to set the jumpers.

Table 2-30: Jumper Settings For Hostess 550 Connector Interface Block
Port RS-232 RS-422
1 JP5 & JP6 (OFF) JP5 & JP6 (ON)
2 JP7 & JP8 (OFF) JP7 & JP8 (ON)
3 JP1 & JP2 (2-3) JP1 & JP2 (2-3)

JP9 & JP10 (OFF) JP9 & JP10 (ON)
4 JP3 & JP4 (2-3) JP3 & JP4 (2-3)

JP15 & JP16 (OFF) JP15 & JP16 (ON)
5 JP11 & JP12 (OFF) JP11 & JP12 (ON)

JP37 & JP38 (1-2) JP37 & JP38 (1-2)
6 JP17 & JP18 (OFF) JP17 & JP18 (ON)
7 JP13 & JP14 (OFF) JP13 & JP14 (ON)
8 JP19 & JP20 (OFF) JP19 & JP20 (ON)
9 JP21 & JP22 (OFF) JP21 & JP22 (ON)
10 JP29 & JP30 (OFF) JP29 & JP30 (ON)
11 JP23 & JP24 (OFF) JP23 & JP24 (ON)
12 JP31 & JP32 (OFF) JP31 & JP32 (ON)
13 JP25 & JP26 (OFF) JP25 & JP26 (ON)
14 JP33 & JP34 (OFF) JP33 & JP34 (ON)
15 JP27 & JP28 (OFF) JP27 & JP28 (ON)
16 JP35 & JP36 (OFF) JP35 & JP36 (ON)

Figure 2-75: Hostess 550/16 Jumper Setting
CAUTION
cables.

1) Power down the PC.
2) Remove the PC cover.
3) Install the RocketPort controller card into an expansion slot. Make sure the card is properly seated.
4) Secure the card with the expansion slot screw.
5) Re-install the PC cover.
6) Attach the cable from the connector interface block to the interface board.
7) Install the serial cables to the Connector Interface Box.
NOTE:
Chapter 3 of this manual provides a complete overview of the software installation for
the VMS-VT
1. Boot the computer with the Hostess Diagnostic Disk inserted in Drive A:. Then start the "hostest"
program.
2. At the CONTROLLER TYPE section, select "E".
3. At the CONTROLLER BASE I/O ADDRESS SELECTION, select "H".
4. At the CONTROLLER IRQ SELECTION, select "D".
5. Verify the selections are (550 16 PORT, 500, 5) and press "Y".
6. Verify the Ports are "OK". Then continue the Port test using the Hostess Interface Plug in each port as
directed by the program.
7. From the Windows NT Program Manager Window, select and enter the MS DOS icon.
8. Insert the Comtrol Hostess Windows NT Driver Disk and change to the "A:" prompt. Then enter the
"Setup" command.
9. Verify and enter "A:" is the path containing the Comtrol Configuration Files.
10. Verify "C:\Comtrol" is the path to the destination directory. Then select and enter "OK".
11. Select and enter the "Hostess" icon. Then select and enter "Controller Configuration".
12. Select "Hostess 550" and "Ports". Then set "Starting Comport" to "COM3", "Base I/O Port Address"
to "500", and "Interrupt Request (IRQ) to "5". Select and enter "OK".

NOTE:
If you experience serial driver “stop” messages in the Event Viewer, do the following:
1. Remove the Hostess icon by selecting it and using the Program Manager FILE DELETE
sequence.
2. Remove the Hostess window by selecting and using the Program Manager FILE DELETE
sequence.
3. Delete ports 3 - 18 using the Control Panel, Ports, DELETE command.
4. Shutdown Windows NT and disconnect the Hostess cable from the interface card.
5. Re-start Windows NT and repeat steps 8 - 12.
13. Select and enter "Communication Settings". Then select "Communication Port" and change to "COM3".
Select each parameter block and change to the following:
Baud Rate :4800

Data Bits :8
Stop Bits :1
Parity :None
Flow Control :None
14. Perform step 11 for "COM4 through COM18". Then select and enter "OK". When complete, select and
enter "Exit".
15. When prompted to "Update NT Registry", select and enter "Yes".
adapters save one may be removed, then re-added one at a time. Note that the Pentium CPU ( Sperry Marine
P/N 1820488) is equipped with on-board serial ports which have a strong potential for conflict with other serial
port adapters.
2.12.4 Other Serial Ports
The Control Concepts Combination Interface Board contains two serial ports that are used in the VMS. This
board is covered in chapter 2.3 of this manual. The Pentium PC contains two serial ports. Reference chapter 2.2.

2.12.5 NMEA Splitter/Buffer Assembly, Sperry Marine P/N 1812195
The NMEA Splitter/Buffer board expands RS-232/422 signals. There are two input ports. Each input port can
receive an RS-232 or RS-422 signal. The 8 output ports are configurable for a combination of the input signals.
Assembly 1812195-1 operates from a +24 volt supply. Assembly 1812195-2 operates from a +5 volt supply.
Figure 2-76: NMEA Splitter/Buffer Assembly Board
2.12.5.1 Manufacturer – Sperry Marine.
2.12.5.2 Interfaces – Reference Figure 2-76. Signals are interfaced through terminal blocks TB1-TB3.
Power – Power is connected to either 5 volts from the computer or 24 volts from the ship.
PIN SIGNAL
TB1-9 +5 VDC from PC (1812195-2)
TB1-10 GND from PC (1812195-2)
TB1-11 +24 VDC from ship (1812195-1)
TB1-12 GND from ship (1812195-1)

Input Ports –
PIN SIGNAL
TB1-1 Port 1 RS-232 SIG
TB1-2 Port 1 RS-232 RTN
TB1-3 Port 1 RS-422 -
TB1-4 Port 1 RS-422 +
TB1-7 Port 2 RS-422 -
TB1-8 Port 2 RS-422 +
Output Ports –
PIN SIGNAL
TB2-1 Port 5 RS-422 -/RS-232 SIG
TB2-2 Port 5 RS-422 +
TB2-3 Port 5 RTN
TB2-5 Port 6 RS-422 +
TB2-6 Port 6 RTN
TB2-8 Port 7 RS-422 +
TB2-9 Port 7 RTN
TB2-10 Port 8 RS-422 -/RS-232 SIG
TB2-11 Port 8 RS-422 +
2.12.5.3 Configuration – The NMEA Splitter/Buffer is configured to receive an RS-232 signal on Port 1
and transfer to all 8 output ports. There are three jumpers to set configuration, E1-E3. Set the jumpers as follows:
Table 2-31: Configuration Options For NMEA Splitter
Configuration
Input Ports/Signal Type Output Ports Jumper Settings
RS-232_1_IN RS-232_OUT_1,2 (Ports 1,2) E1: 1-2

RS-422_OUT_1,2 (Ports 5,6) E2: none
RS-232 input E3: none

Table 2-31: Configuration Options For NMEA Splitter
Configuration
Input Ports/Signal Type Output Ports Jumper Settings

RS-422 input E3: none

RS-232 input E3: 2-3
RS-422_2_IN RS-232_OUT_3,4 (Ports 3,4) E1: none

RS-422_OUT_1,2 (Ports 7,8) E2: 2-3
RS-232_1_IN RS-232_OUT_1,2,3,4 (Ports 1,2,3,4) E1: 1-2

RS-422_OUT_1,2,3,4 (Ports 5,6,7,8) E2: none
RS-422_1_IN RS-232_OUT_1,2 (Port 1,2,3,4) E1: 2-3

RS-422_OUT_1,2 (Port 5,6,7,8) E2: none
CAUTION
or cables.
1. Attach a strip of double-sided tape to the mounting (parts list item 3 in the NMEA Splitter Assembly
Installation Kit) to the mounting rail (item number 2). Peel the paper off of one side of the tape and affix
to the flat side of the rail.
2. Slide the mounting feet of the NMEA Splitter Assembly onto the flanges of the mounting rail. The
NMEA Splitter Assembly should be located in the center of the mounting rail.
3. Secure the NMEA Splitter Assembly onto the mounting rail by snapping one of the end stops (item
number 4 in the kit) onto each end of the mounting rail. This prevents the NMEA from sliding off the
rail.
4. Select a mounting location for the completed assembly. Clean and de-grease the surface selected for
mounting.

5. Peel off the remaining paper from the double sided tape and press the completed assembly onto the
cleaned mounting area. Apply sufficient pressure to form a bubble-free bond between the surface and
tape.
6. Set the configuration jumpers E1-E3 according to the required configured.
7. Connect the signals and power to terminal blocks TB1-TB3.
2.12.5.5 Replaceable Items – All components on the NMEA Splitter/Buffer circuit board are field
replaceable.

2.13 Analog Interface Components
This subsystem provides input/output of the ship’s analog signals for processing by the Vision computer. Table
2-32 summarizes the operation of the analog components.
Table 2-32: Overview of Analog Components
Analog Component Description
DAS-4 8-bit/8-channel Analog to PC-compatible expansion card. Connects to the Analog

Digital (A/D) Converter. Signal Conditioner.
16-channel Analog to Digital Isolator. Use with DAS-4. Houses 16 analog Input/Output (I/O)
modules.
4-channel Analog Kit. Use with DAS-4 and. Houses 4 analog I/O modules.
4-20 mA current input module. Provides single channel current input from ship signals.
±10 V voltage input module. Provides single channel voltage input from ship signals.
4-20 mA current output module. Provides single channel current output to ship signals.
DAS-1602 I/O Card Analog and Digital I/O.
Kamewa Interface Kit Analog/Discrete Speed Pilot interface designed to interface

to the Kamewa Engine Control System.
Alarm Relay Interface Kit. This card provides up to 3 isolated relay contact closures
(normally open or closed).

2.13.1 MetraByte DAS-4 Data Acquisition Card, Sperry Marine P/N 1810320
A/D Zero potentiometer A/D Full scale potentiometer
19 37
BASE ADDRESS DA-37

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(Male)
N
IRQ LEVEL
2 3 4 5 6 7 X
J2 20
1
S1: Base Address Switches Interrupt Level Select Jumper
Figure 2-77: The MetraByte DAS-4 Data Acquisition Card
The DAS-4 data acquisition card pictured in Figure 2-77 contains an 8 channel 8 bit analog-to-digital (A/D)
converter and digital inputs and outputs (I/O). The following is a list of the major features of the DAS-4:
# 8 channel, 8-bit successive-approximation A/D converter with sample and hold (AD7574);
# A/D inputs are single ended with a common ground, ±5 volts full scale, with a resolution of 0.0391 volts
(39.1 millivolts); can withstand continuous overload of ±30 volts, brief transients of several hundred volts;
# A/D conversion time 20 microseconds typical, 30 µsec maximum;
# +5.0 (±0.2) volt reference output, capable of sourcing/sinking 5 mA;
# 4 digital outputs, 3 digital inputs (TTL levels, +5 VDC nominal);
# PC bus power (+5, +12, -12 VDC) available on the external connector.
2.13.1.1 Manufacturer – The DAS-4 is manufactured by:
MetraByte Corporation.
A Division of Keithley Instruments.
440 Myles Standish Boulevard.
Taunton, MA 02780.
USA.
Phone (508) 880-3000.
The manufacturer's part number for the board is DAS-4.
2.13.1.2 Interfaces – The DAS-4 plugs directly into one of the expansion slots in the PC. All external
connections for analog inputs and external digital I/O interfaces to the computer are then made via a 37-pin male
D-connector on the card. These interfaces are described below.

PC Bus Interface – The card uses four read/write I/O registers whose base address is switch-selectable.
The card requires power from the PC bus as follows:
+5 VDC 170 mA typ./240 mA max.

+12 VDC 7 mA typ./ 11 mA max.
-12 VDC 7 mA typ./ 11 mA max.
External Interface Connector – The DAS-4 provides several different types of electrical interfaces:
# 8 channels of single-ended analog inputs (+5 volt full scale input range)
# 4 digital (TTL) outputs and 3 digital (TTL) inputs
# +5.0 ±0.2 vdc voltage reference for external sensors
# PC bus power (+5, +12, and -12 vdc) for operation of external circuits
Table 2-33: DAS-4 I/O Connector Pin Assignments
Pin Signal Name Description Pin Signal Name Description
1 +12V +12 VDC PC bus power 19 VREF +5.0 VDC (±0.2v) precision
2 (N.C.) reference voltage from A/D
3 (N.C.) converter
4 (N.C.) 20 -12V -12 VDC from PC bus
5 (N.C.) 21 (N.C.)
6 (N.C.) 22 (N.C.)
7 OP1 Digital output 1 23 (N.C.)
8 OP2 Digital output 2 24 INT. IN Interrupt input. Positive edge-
9 OP3 Digital output 3 triggered input
10 OP4 Digital output 4 25 IP1 Digital input 1
11 DIG COM Digital & power common. Return for all 26 IP2 Digital input 2
logic signals and power supply 27 IP3 Digital input 3
currents. Connected to computer 28 DIG. COM Digital & power common (same
chassis. (see pin 28) as pin 11)
29 +5V +5 VDC power from PC bus
12 L.L. COM Low level grounds. These are common 30 IN7 Analog input channel 7
13 L.L. COM returns and shields for the analog 31 IN6 Analog input channel 6
14 L.L. COM input channels. 32 IN5 Analog input channel 5
15 L.L. COM 33 IN4 Analog input channel 4
37 IN0 Analog input channel 0
The assignment of signals to connector pins is shown in Table 2-33.
2.13.1.3 Configuration – There are four configurable items on the DAS-4: the Base Address Select switch
block, the Interrupt Request (IRQ) Level Select jumper, and two A/D trimmer potentiometers (R8 and R10).
These items (shown in Figure 2-77 ) are described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 2-78: Base Address Switches and IRQ Level Select Jumper
Base Address Switches and IRQ Level Jumper – Reference Figure 2-78. The DAS-4 interfaces to the host
computer via a block of four contiguous I/O addresses and one (optional) interrupt request line. The eight
DIP switches labeled "BASE ADDRESS, 9 .. 2" correspond to address bits A9 .. A2, with the OFF position
of the switch setting the corresponding address bit to "1". This allows the DAS-4 to be placed anywhere in
the lower 1K of I/O address space. Likewise, the "IRQ LEVEL" jumper allows any IRQ level from 2 to 7
to be selected.
A/D Trimmer Potentiometers – In most applications, the A/D does not require adjustment. An adjustment
procedure is described in Chapter 5 of the DAS-4 User's Manual, supplied with the card. This procedure
requires a 4½ digit multi-meter, a noise-free voltage source, a personal computer with monitor, keyboard,
disk drive, DOS and GWBASIC, and a program called CAL.EXE (supplied with the card on a 5¼" floppy
disk).
CAUTION
cables.
1. Reference Figure 2-78. Configure the card’s address according to the following:
! The first DAS-4 card is address 300h.

! The second DAS-4 card is address 310h.
! The third DAS-4 card is address 200h.
2. Configure the interrupt jumper for no interrupt (install jumper on X).

2.13.1.5 Software Installation – Reference chapter 3 of this manual.
2.13.1.6 Replaceable Items – There are no field-replaceable components on the DAS-4.

2.13.2 MetraByte 16 Channel Analog-to-Digital Isolator Kit, Sperry Marine P/N 1812402
Figure 2-79: Analog to Digital Isolator
The Analog to Digital Isolator is comprised of several components:
Table 2-34: Parts List for 16 Channel Analog to Digital Isolator
Component Sperry Marine P/N MetraByte P/N
Mounting rack 1811803-3 MB-01
+5 V @ 2 A max. external power 1810056 PMC15E-1 (vendor is Total

supply Power International)
19" rack enclosure 1811803-5 RMT-MBBP
Interface cable 1811803-6 C8-MB1
Taunton, MA 02780.
USA.
Phone (508) 880-3000.

DAS-4 Interface – The isolator has a ribbon cable that connects to the DAS card.
Power – 110/120 VAC .100 Watts (varies according to modules installed).
Analog I/O Modules – Reference Figure 2-79. The modules plug into the 16 slots of the mounting rack.
Each slot contains four terminal screws for connecting ship analog signals (see Table 2-35).
Table 2-35: Signal Connections For Analog Modules
Module Terminal-1 Screw Terminal 2 Screw Terminal 3 Screw Terminal 4
MB31-03 -EXC (not used) VIN LO VIN HI +EXC (not used)
MB 32-01 -EXC (not used) IIN LO IIN HI +EXC (not used)
MB39-01 Not assigned OUT LO OUT HI Not assigned
CAUTION
or cables.
1. Secure the mounting with four screws.
2. Install the analog I/O modules in the mounting rack.
3. Connect the ship’s analog signals to the field wiring terminals for each module.
4. Connect the ribbon cable to the DAS-4 card in the computer. The computer should be powered off.
5. The computer should be powered up and the DAS-4 card operating before applying power to the Analog
Isolator.
2.13.3 4-Channel Analog Kit, Sperry Marine P/N 1820512

Figure 2-80: 4-Channel Analog

2.13.3.1 Manufacturer – The 4-channel analog kit is manufactured by Sperry Marine. It consists of the
following components:
4-Channel Analog Kit
1812538-1 Terminal Screw Adapter

1812538-8 Interface Cable
1810056 Power Supply
T969137 AC Power Cord
T979138 DC Power Output
P1897697-3 Industrial Velcro
1812489-1 Phoenix Connector
1812490-5 Phoenix Connector
2.13.3.2 Application – The 4-Channel Analog Kit is used to interface ship analog signals using the analog
modules. The kit is designed to be mounted in small places.
Card Installed In The Computer – There are two 37-pin connectors for connection to the DAS-4 or other
converter card. These connectors are wired identically.
Screw Terminal I/O – The 37 signals from the DAS-4 card are brought out to screw terminals for field
wiring. The available signals are shown in Table 2-33.
Power – There are two screw terminals for wiring +5 volts and GND. This power can be supplied from the
converter card. For example, power can be supplied from the DAS-4 card by making the following
connections shown in Figure 2-81.
CAUTION
There is no protection against reverse polarity. Reversing the power supply connections
can destroy any installed modules.
Input Signals To Modules – Reference Figure 2-80. There are four sets of signals for the four modules.
The signals are labeled “HI”, “LO”, “+EXC” and “-EXC”. The signals available depend on the module
type installed (reference chapter 2.13.2). The signal sets for the four modules are labeled CHAN 0 -
CHAN 3.
Output Signals From Modules – There are two output signals available for each module. The signals
are labeled “+” and “-”. The output signal available depends on the module type installed.

Figure 2-81: 4-Channel Analog Power Connections to DAS-4 Card
Differential vs. Single-Ended Inputs – There are four switches to allow each module to be set for
differential or single-ended inputs.
1. Physically mount the 4-channel analog unit at its designated location.
2. Make all required electrical connections.
3. Set the switches for differential or single-ended input as required.
4. Install the analog modules.

2.13.4 Analog I/O Modules
There are three analog I/O modules as shown in Table 2-36. These modules are used in the 16-Channel
Analog Isolator, the 4-Channel Analog Kit and the Kamewa Interface Kit.
Table 2-36: Analog I/O Modules
Analog Module Sperry Marine P/N MetraByte P/N
4-20 mA current input 1811803-1 MB32-01
±10 V voltage input 1811803-2 MB31-03
4-20 mA current output 1811803-7 MB39-01
Figure 2-82: Analog I/O Module
Taunton, MA 02780.
USA.
Phone (508) 880-3000.

2.13.4.2 Specifications –
Table 2-37: Analog Module Specifications
Parameter MB32-01 MB31-03 MB39-01
Input Range 4-20 mA ±10 V 0-5 V
Output Range 0-5 V ±5 V 4-20 mA
Accuracy ±0.05% span ±0.05% span ±0.2 mW ±0.05% span
Input Resistance N/A 650 KS N/A
Nonlinearity ±0.02% ±0.02% span ±0.02%
Power Supply 5 V ±5% 5 V ±5% 5 V ±5%
Power Consumption 150 mW (30 mA) 150 mW (30 mA) 850 mW (170 mA)
Voltage Output Protection continuous short to N/A N/A

ground
Normal Mode Output N/A N/A 240 V RMS continuous

Protection
2.13.4.3 Interfaces – See chapter 2.13.2.2.
2.13.4.4 Hardware Installation – See chapter 2.13.2.4.
2.13.4.5 Replaceable Items – None.

2.13.5 MetraByte DAS-1602 I/O Interface Card, Sperry Marine P/N 1812689
This card is primarily used in the Kamewa Interface Kit.
Figure 2-83: DAS-1602 I/O Interface Card
Taunton, MA 02780.
USA.
Phone (508) 880-3000.
The vendor’s part number is DAS-1602.
2.13.5.2 Specifications –
Analog Inputs –
Channels: 8 differential or 16 single-ended.

Accuracy: 0.01% of reading ±1 bit.
Resolution: 12 bits.
Input Impedance: ,25 MS.
Conversion Time 8 µS max.
Acquisition Time: 1.4 µS.

Analog Outputs –
Channels: 2.
Voltage Range: 0 to 5V, 0 to 10 V, ±5 V, ±10 V.
Output Current: ±5 mA max.
Linearity: ±½ bit.
Resolution: 12 bits.
Output Impedance: + 0.1 S.
Digital Inputs –
Bits: 4.
Voltage Low: 0.8 V max.
Voltage High: 2.0 V min.
Low Current: -0.2 mA max.
High Current: 20 µA max.
Digital Outputs –
Bits: 4.
Voltage Low: 0.5 V max. @ Isink = 0.8 mA.
Voltage High: 2.4 V min @ Isource = 0.4 mA.
2.13.5.3 Interfaces – The signals on the edge connector J1 are the ones primarily used in the Vision
System. The following table shows the signal pin-outs.
Table 2-38: DAS-1602 Connector Pin Assignments

Pin Signal Name Pi Signal Name
n
1 + 5V PWR 20 CTR 2 OUT
2 CTR 0 OUT 21 CTR 0 CLOCK IN
3 OP 3 22 OP 2
4 OP 1 23 OP 0
5 IP 3 24 IP 2/CTR 0 GATE
6 IP 1/XTRIG 25 IP 0/TRIG 0/XPCLK
7 POWER GND 26 D/A 1 REF IN
8 VREF (-5) 27 D/A 1 OUT
9 D/A 0 OUT 28 LL GND
10 D/A 0 REF IN 29 LL GND
11 CH 7 LO IN/CH 15 HI IN 30 CH 7 HI IN

Table 2-38: DAS-1602 Connector Pin Assignments
Pin Signal Name Pi Signal Name
n
19 LL GND
2.13.5.4 Configuration – Figure 2-83 shows the default configuration settings. Switch S6 controls the
base address. As shown, address bits 9 - 4 can be set. Address bits 3 - 0 are internally set to zero. The figure
shows the settings for address 300 hex.
CAUTION
cables.
2. Set DIP switches S1-S7 as shown in Figure 2-83.
3. Install the DAS-1602 card into a expansion slot.
4. Connect the 37-pin cable to J1. Connect the other end of the cable to the subsystem controlled by the
DAS-1602.
2.13.5.6 Software Installation – The DAS-1602 card must be included in the CONFIG.INI file.
Reference Appendix A of this Manual, Configuring VMS-VT. The information is in the section entitled
[SPEED_CONTOL_LDHx].
2.13.5.7 Replaceable Items – None.

2.13.6 Kamewa Interface Kit, Sperry Marine P/N 1810328
This system interfaces with the Kamewa Engine Control System.
2.13.6.1 Manufacturer – The Kamewa Interface consists of several components:
Table 2-39: Components for Kamewa Interface System
Component Part Number
DAS-1602 Analog Interface Card 1812689
STA-MB Screw Terminal Adapter 1812538-1
Interface Cable 1812538-8
MB39-01 Current Output Module 1811803-7
MB32-01 Current Input Module ( 3 required) 1811803-1
Power Cable T968820
Resistor (2 required) RLR07C4701GS
Alarm Relay 1810822
2.13.6.2 Interfaces – Reference Figures 2-84 and 2-85.
1. The four DIP switches on the STA-MB board (CH0-CH3) must be set to “SE”.
2. Configure the DAS-1602 card as shown in Figure 2-86.
Mounting The STA-MB –
1. Degrease the bottom of the box on each corner.
2. Peel the protective backing from one side of the Velcro mounting pad. Press a 1" by 1" pad
firmly into place for each corner of the box. Surfaces should be above 20o C.
3. Locate the STA-MB box at designated location. Degrease the area under the pads.
4. When dry, peel the protective backing from all pads and carefully press the box into place. Allow
48 hours for maximum bond strength to develop.

Mounting The Alarm Panel –
1. Attach the alarm panel to the rail that is included in the kit.
2. Degrease the bottom of the rail. Once dry, attach one side of the double-sided tape included in
the kit.
3. Locate alarm panel & rail at designated location. Degrease area & allow to dry.
4. Peel the bottom of the double sided tape and carefully press the alarm into place.
5. Allow 48 hours for maximum bond strength to develop.
Electrical Installation –
CAUTION
or cables.
1. Mount the three MB32-01 modules onto the STA-MB. They go in sockets CHAN 0 to CHAN.
2.
2. Mount the MB39-01 module onto the STA-MB in socket CHAN. 3.
3. Complete the wiring as shown in Figures 2-84 and 2-85. The 37-conductor ribbon cable
connects to J1 of the DAS-1602 board.
2.13.6.5 Software Installation – The DAS-1602 card must be included in the CONFIG.INI file.
Reference Appendix A of this Manual, Configuring VMS-VT. The information is in the section entitled
[SPEED_CONTOL_LDHx].
2.13.6.6 Replaceable Items – All items in this kit are replaceable.

Figure 2-84: Kamewa Interface Schematic

Figure 2-85: Kamewa Interface Alarm Panel Connections

Figure 2-86: DAS-1602 Configuration For Kamewa Interface

2.13.7 Alarm Relay Assembly, Sperry Marine P/N 1810822
Regulations for bridges allowing reduced manning require that all navigation equipment on such bridges have
three special alarm outputs:
(1) an operator fitness alarm, also known as a "dead-man alarm", intended to detect absence of operator
activity;
(2) a system failure alarm to provide notice of an self-diagnosed equipment faults; and
(3) an operator warning alarm, signaling any operational warnings detected by the equipment, or the
need for operator intervention.
To support such a system, the VMS Command Station can be interfaced to an external alarm system through
the optional Alarm Relay Assembly, shown in Figure 2-87. The modem control lines of two of the Command
Plan View End View
ALARMRLY.WPG
Snap-in Wago Double-
TS-35
Terminal Block backed
Mounting Rail Tape
Figure 2-87: The Alarm Relay Interface Option for the VMS Command Station
Station's serial ports serve as relay control signals. Use of modem control lines for this purpose does not
affect the use of the data lines (RxD, TxD) of those ports for communications.
The Alarm Relay Assembly can also be used to provide a relay contact output that is activated whenever the
VMS Command Station's or Navigation Workstation's audible alarm ("beeper") is sounded. (Functionally,
the audible alarm is activated when either the system failure or operator warning alarm is activated).
The relays on the board are Aromat DS2D-S-DC5V, or equivalent, which are single-side stable relays with
two Form "C" contacts; only one set of contacts from each relay is brought out to terminals. Other important
specifications of these relays is given below (ratings are per relay):
Coil resistance: 125 S

Power requirement: 200 mW (nominal)
Contact ratings: 0.6 A, 125 VAC
0.6 A, 110 VDC
2.0 A, 30 VDC
Contact breakdown voltage: 1000 VDC

2.13.7.1 Manufacturer – The Alarm Relay Assembly is manufactured by Sperry Marine, Inc.
2.13.7.2 Application – This option is usually only employed in ships designed to meet the Det Norske
Veritas's "Rules for One-Man Bridge Operation in Ocean Areas and Coastal Waters," informally known as
"Watch-1".
K1
J1 Q1
R1
D6 J3 (OUT1)
IN1 1
D1 3 NO(Normally Open)
GND 2 1 NC(Normally Closed)
2 C (Common)
+5V 3
K2
J2 Q2
R2 D5
IN2 1 J4 (OUT2)
GND 2 1 NC(Normally Closed)
2 C (Common)
IN3 3 K3
R3 Q3
D4 J5 (OUT3)
1 NC(Normally Closed)
Notes:
2 C (Common)
1. All diodes: 1N4004 ALARMCKT.WPG
2. All resistors: 4.7KS,¼W
3. All transistors: 2N2222A 4. All relays: Aromat DS2-M-DC5, or equivalent
Figure 2-88: Circuit Diagram of the Alarm Relay Option
2.13.7.3 Interfaces – All electrical connections to the Alarm Relay are made via removable 3-pin Wago
connectors. The location of these connectors is shown in Figure 2-87, while their function is shown in Figure
2-88. The board also requires +5 VDC power; this is generally supplied in the Command Station cabinet
from terminal strip TB1 on the Power Termination Board. Typical wiring for the Alarm Relay Assembly is
shown and described below.
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing the Relay Assembly.

Stargate 8-line Port
P9
Pwr Gnd 1
A
TxD 2
RxD 3 These lines
RTS 4 available
CTS 5 for other
DSR 6 interfaces
Sig Gnd 7
DTR 20
TB1 1 IN1 NC 1 OPERATOR

(Located in 2 GND C 2 FITNESS
VMS Command 3
Station Cabinet) 5 3 +5V NO 3 ALARM RELAY
J1 J3
1 IN2 NC 1 SYSTEM
2 GND C 2 FAILURE
3 IN3 NO 3 ALARM RELAY
J2 J4
NC 1 OPERATOR
Stargate 8-line Port ALARM RELAY
C 2 WARNING
ASSEMBLY
P10 NO 3 ALARM RELAY
J5
A
Pwr Gnd 1
TxD 2 These lines
RxD 3 available
RTS 4
for other
CTS 5
DSR 6 interfaces
Sig Gnd 7
ALARMCK3.WPG
DTR 20
Figure 2-89: Typical Wiring of the Alarm Relay Assembly for Watch-1 Alarms
Wiring for Watch-1 Alarms – The typical wiring of relay control signals from the Command Station's
Star Gate 8-line Interface ports to the board for control of the Operator Fitness, System Failure, and
Operator Warning alarms is shown in Figure 2-89.
Stargate 8-line Port
P1
A
Pwr Gnd 1
TxD 2 These lines
RxD 3
RTS 4 available
CTS 5 for other
DSR 6 interfaces
Sig Gnd 7
DTR 20
TB1 1 IN1 NC 1
(Located in 2 AUDIBLE
3 2 GND C
VMS Command ALARM RELAY
Station Cabinet) 5 3 +5V NO 3
J1 J3
1 IN2 NC 1
2 GND C 2
3 IN3 NO 3
J2 J4
NC 1
ALARM RELAY
C 2
ASSEMBLY NO 3
J5
ALARMCK4.WPG
Figure 2-90: Typical Wiring of the Alarm Relay Assembly for Control of an Audible Alarm
Wiring for the Audible Alarm – The typical wiring of relay control signals from the Command
Station's Star Gate 8-line Interface ports to the board for control of an external Audible Alarm is shown
in Figure 2-90.
NOTE:
The Alarm Relay Assembly is not commonly used for this purpose, but it can be.

Table 2-40: Typical Configuration File Entry for Alarm Interface Configuration
;*******************************************************************
;
; Alarm Port Configurations
;
; port number, register number, bit mask, OFF status
; port numbers: 1 = COM1, 2 = COM2, 3..10 = P1 thru P8
; register num: 4 = MCR
; bit mask : 1 = DTR, 2 = RTS
; off status : 0 = cleared, 1= set
;
; NOTE: The beeper will not function correctly if any two lines
; have the same port number and bit mask number.
;
>ALARM_PORTS
3,4,1,0 ; Audible Alarm (beeper in VMS stands use P1,DTR: 3,4,1,0)
9,4,2,1 ; Operator Fitness Alarm (P9, RTS)
10,4,1,1 ; System Failure Alarm (P10, DTR)
10,4,2,1 ; Operator Warning Alarm (P10, RTS)
;
;*******************************************************************
2.13.7.4 Configuration – The VMS software can be configured via the ">ALARM_PORTS" section
of DEVICES.DAT to use the DTR or RTS modem control lines of its serial ports as relay control signals.
The relevant section is reproduced in Table 2-40, set up to match the wiring shown in Figure 2-89 and Figure
2-90.
2.13.7.5 Replaceable Items – There are no replaceable items on the Alarm Relay Assembly.
2.13.7.6 Software Support – The Sperry Marine applications programs for the VMS Command Station
and the Navigation Workstation both support the Alarm Relay Assembly. There are no special drivers
programs or files required for proper operation.

2.14 Vision Synchro Interfaces
2.14.1 Single Channel 16-Bit Synchro Card Assembly, Sperry Marine P/N 1812405
This Synchro assembly is comprised of the following:
• Synchro card, Sperry Marine P/N 1812345-1;

• Cable assembly, Sperry Marine P/N T968784.
Figure 2-91: Single Channel Synchro Card
Computer Conversion Corporation, CAGE code 51086.

Northport, NY.
The vendor’s part number is IBR-A5000-X12-SD-R1.
2.14.1.2 Application – The Synchro card interfaces synchro displacement transducers to an IBM PC bus.
These transducers are commonly found on Sperry Marine (and competitor’s) gyroscopes and rudder angle
transmitters.

PC Interface – The Syncro card installs into a ISA-compatible expansion slot.
Electrical –
+12 VDC @ 32 mA/channel;

-12 VDC @ 45 mA/channel;
+5 VDC @ 0.8 Amp. typical, +125 mA/channel.
Synchro Interface – The synchro channels are connected using the interface cable P/N T968784. The cable
connects to edge connector of the Synchro card. The signal pin-outs are as shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-92: Single Channel Synchro Card Signal Connections
NOTE:
Earlier versions of the Synchro card used a 50-pin connector, therefore the signal pin-out
was different than what is shown in Figure 2-92.
2.14.1.4 Configuration – There are four jumpers to be configured on the card. The jumper settings for the
VMS-VT are as shown in Figure 2-91. The complete options for the jumpers are shown in the following table.

Table 2-41: Configuration Options for Single-Channel Synchro Card
Jumper Setting Options
JP1 - Read/Write Select. JP1-WR3: (N/A)

(Jumper installed selects module JP1-RD3: (N/A)
for Read or Write). JP1-WR2: (N/A)
JP1-RD2 (N/A)
JP1-WR1: (N/A)
JP1-RD1: (N/A)
JP1-WR0: Channel 0 = Write
JP1-RD0: Channel 0 = Read
JP2 - Select Base Address. JP2-4 Address Bit A4

(Jumper installed sets address JP2-5 Address Bit A5
bit to 0). JP2-6 Address Bit A6
JP2-7 Address Bit A7
JP3 - Select Base Address. JP3-8: Address Bit A8

(Jumper installed sets address JP3-9: Address Bit A9
bit to 0). JP3-10: Address Bit A10
JP3-11: Address Bit A11
Address bits A3-A0 are set to zero by the vendor.
JP4 - Single or Multiple Turn JP4-MS9 (N/A)

Operation. JP4-MS10: Channel 0 Jumper installed = Single Turn.
CAUTION
cables.
1. Set the configuration jumpers as shown in Figure 2-91.
3. Remove the computer cover. Install the Synchro card into the computer.

4. Re-install the computer cover.
5. Connect the cable to the external connector on the Synchro card.
6. Power on the computer.
Software Installation – Reference chapter 3 of this manual.
Replaceable Items – There are no field replaceable components on the Synchro card.

2.14.2 Dual Channel 16-Bit Synchro Card Assembly, Sperry Marine P/N 1812406
This synchro assembly is comprised of the following:
• Synchro card, Sperry Marine P/N 1812345-2;

• Harness assembly, Sperry Marine P/N T968784.
Figure 2-93: Dual Channel Synchro Card
Computer Conversion Corporation, CAGE code 51086.

NorthPort, NY.
The vendor’s part number is IBR-A5A500-X12-SD-R1.
2.14.2.2 Application – The Synchro card interfaces synchro displacement transducers to an IBM PC bus.
These transducers are commonly found on Sperry Marine (and competitor’s) gyroscopes and rudder angle
transmitters.

PC Interface – The Syncro card installs into a ISA-compatible expansion slot.
Electrical –
+12 VDC @ 32 mA/channel;

-12 VDC @ 45 mA/channel;
+5 VDC @ 0.8 Amp. typical, +125 mA/channel.
Synchro Interface – The synchro channels are connected using the interface cable P/N T968784. The cable
connects to edge connector of the Synchro card. The signal pin-outs are as shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-94: Dual-Channel Synchro Card Signal Connections
NOTE:
Earlier versions of the Synchro card used a 50-pin connector, therefore the signal pin-out
was different than what is shown in Figure 2-94.
2.14.2.4 Configuration – There are four jumpers to be configured on the card. The jumper settings for the
VMS-VT are as shown in Figure 2-93. The complete options for the jumpers are shown in the following table.

Table 2-42: Configuration Options for Dual-Channel Synchro Card
Jumper Setting Options
JP1 - Read/Write Select. JP1-WR3: (N/A)

(Jumper installed selects module JP1-RD3: (N/A)
for Read or Write). JP1-WR2: (N/A)
JP1-RD2: (N/A)


Address bits A3-A0 are set to zero by the vendor.
JP4 - Single or Multiple Turn JP4-MS9: N/A

Operation. JP4-MS10: Channel 0 & 1 Jumper installed = Single Turn.
CAUTION
cables.
1. Set the configuration jumpers as shown in Figure 2-93.
3. Remove the computer cover. Install the Synchro card into the computer.

4. Re-install the computer cover.
5. Connect the cable to the external connector on the Synchro card.
6. Power on the computer.
Software Installation – Reference chapter 3 of this manual.
Replaceable Items – There are no field replaceable components on the Synchro card.

2.15 Vision Pointing Devices
2.15.1 Location of COM Ports
Figures 2-95 and 2-96 show the location of the COM ports.
Figure 2-95: COM Ports for 486-PC
COM1 is item D, COM2 is E.
Figure 2-96: COM Ports for Pentium

2.15.2 Microsoft Mouse, Sperry Marine P/N 1812410
Microsoft Corporation
One Microsoft Way
Redmond, Washington 98052-6399
2.15.2.2 Application – The mouse is used in Vision computer systems.
CAUTION
cables.
2. Locate the COM1 connector. Reference Figures 2-96 And 2-95.
3. Connect the mouse to COM1.
2.15.2.4 Software Installation – The mouse driver is part of Windows NT.

2.15.3 Vision Trackball, Sperry Marine P/N 1812464
Figure 2-97: Vision Trackball

Microsoft Corporation
One Microsoft Way
Redmond, Washington 98052-6399.
2.15.3.2 Application – This trackball is used in Vision Computer systems.
CAUTION
Remove all power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards
or cables
2. Locate the COM1 connector. Reference Figures 2-95 and 2-96.
3. Connect the trackball to COM1.
2.15.3.4 Software Installation – The trackball driver is part of Windows NT.

2.15.4 Vision Digitizers
This section covers the Sperry Marine digitizers:
Sperry P/N 181214 (vendor P/N T12-1724 SLII) ,

Sperry P/N 181215 (vendor P/N T12-2436 SLII),
Sperry P/N 181216.(vendor P/N T12-3648 SLII).
Figure 2-98: Vision Digitizer
GTCO Corporation, CAGE code 62978

7125 Riverwood Drive
Columbia, MD 21046
301-381-6688
2.15.4.2 Application – The digitizers are used for data entry.
2.15.4.3 Configuration – The digitizer is installed on COM2 of the PC.

CAUTION
Remove all power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards
or cables
2. Connect the power supply to the digitizer controller box.
3. Connect the cable from the digitizer tablet to the controller box.
4. Connect the 4-button cursor to the controller box.
5. Connect the controller box to COM2 of the PC.
1. Power up the digitizer and then the computer.
2. Place the CUSTOM CONFIGURATION MENU CARD within the active area of the digitizer tablet.
Secure the card from moving during the installation process.
3. Using the DIGITIZER MOUSE, select the "P" located on the SUPERSET MENU (notice the proximity
light will flash slowly).
4. Select ALIGNMENT POINT 1 (small blue square) on the lower left corner of the CUSTOM
CONFIGURATION CARD (notice the proximity light will flash rapidly). Then select ALIGNMENT
POINT 2 on the lower right corner of the CUSTOM CONFIGURATION CARD.
Notice: If three beeps are heard and three flashes on the proximity light are seen, an invalid
alignment point was entered or the CUSTOM CONFIGURATION CARD is not located
entirely within the active area of the digitizer tablet.
5. Using the DIGITIZER MOUSE, select the following configuration parameters on the CUSTOM
CONFIGURATION CARD:
BAUD: 4800
DATA BITS: 8
STOP BITS: 1
PARITY: NONE
GTCO: ASCII
BUTTON: INCLUDE
SPACE: INCLUDE
CALCOMP: N/A

LINE FEED: INCLUDE
SUMMA: N/A
DECIMAL: N/A
RETURN: INCLUDE
MODE: POINT
RATE: 12
RESOLUTION: 1000 LPI
6. Save the configuration by selecting "P" on the SUPERSET MENU (notice four beeps and four flashes
on the proximity light indicating a successfully saved configuration).

2.16 Vision Printers
2.16.1 Parallel Interface DeskJet Printer, Sperry Marine P/N 1820332
The DeskJet printer is available in the following configurations:
! DeskJet Printer for 110 V 60 Hz operation, P/N 1820332-1;
! DeskJet Printer for 230 V 50 Hz operation, P/N 1820332-2;
! DeskJet Printer for 220 V 60 Hz operation, P/N 1820332-3.
The components for the printers are as follows:
Table 2-43: Component List For Vision Printers
Component Sperry Marine P/N Hewlett Packard P/N
HP DeskJet 600C. 1812996-1. Used on 1820332-1, C2184A.

-2 & -3.
Black ink print cartridge. 1812996-2. Used on 1820332-1, 51629A.

-2 & -3.
Fastener tape. P1897697-3. Used on 1820332- N/A.

1, -2 & -3.
15-feet parallel cable. 1811989. Used on 1820332-1, N/A.

-2 & -3.
230 V 50 Hz power adapter. 1812996-5. Used on 1820332-2. 9100-5132 (C2176A).
222 V 60 Hz power adapter. 1812996-6. Used on 1820332-3. 9100-5126 (C2182A).
Hewlett Packard Corporation, CAGE CODE 28480.

Palo Alto, CA.
208-323-2551.

Figure 2-99: Hewlett Packard DeskJet 600C Printer
PC Interface – The DeskJet connects to a standard parallel printer port.
Power Consumption – 4.5 Watts max. idle, 12 Watts max. printing.
2.16.1.3 Configuration – There are no jumper or switches to configure.
Unpacking The Printer – If necessary, perform the following steps.
1. Remove the packing tape securing the left side of the top cover, securing both sides of the OUT tray
packing material and the packing tape securing the paper length adjuster to the printer.
2. Remove the packing material.
3. Open the top cover and remove the tape securing the packing material inside the printer.
4. Lift the packing material up and out of the printer.

Electrical Connections –
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing the printer.
1. Install the power cable to the power module as shown in Figure 2-100.
2. Install the power cable to the power module as shown in Figure 2-101.
Figure 2-100: Connecting The Parallel Interface Cable

Figure 2-101: Connecting The Power Module
2.16.1.5 Installing The Printer Cartridges –
NOTE:
This chapter covers procedures that must be performed the first time the printer is used.
Initial Procedure –
1. Turn on the computer, then turn on the printer by pressing and releasing the power button. The very
first time you turn on the printer, the printer performs a start-up procedure.
2. Open the top cover of the printer. In a few moments the empty print cartridge cradle automatically
moves to the center of the printer and the resume light flashes.
NOTE:
If the resume light continues to blink and if the cradle does not move back to the right side
of the printer, remove and re-install the print cartridge. Make sure the print cartridge is
pressed down into the cradle before your snap it forward into position. Also, be sure the
cartridge guide is behind the black print cartridge.
3. Install either the black print cartridge or the color print cartridge as detailed in the following
procedures.

Installing The Black Print Cartridge –
1. Open the packaging for the black print cartridge. Grasp the print cartridge by the top and remove
the packaging. Be careful no to touch the ink nozzles or the copper contacts.
2. Remove both pieces of tape covering the ink nozzles and the vent hole on the black print cartridge.
3. Reference Figure 2-102. Drop the print cartridge into the cradle, making sure that the print cartridge
is in front of the movable cartridge guide. Align the arrow on the cartridge top with the dot on top
of the cradle.
4. Push the arrow toward the dot until the cartridge snaps into place (rocking of the cradle is normal).
Be sure that the movable cartridge guide is behind the black print cartridge.
Figure 2-102: Installing The Black Ink Cartridge
2.16.1.6 Software Installation – Reference chapter 3 of this manual.
2.16.1.7 Replaceable Items – The ink cartridge is replaceable. To replace the cartridge use the following
procedure.
1. With the printer turned on, open the top cover. In a few minutes, the print cartridge cradle automatically
moves to the center of the printer and the resume light flashes.
2. Reference Figure 2-103. Grasp the top of the print cartridge and pull it toward you until the cartridge
pops loose.

3. Lift the print cartridge out of the cradle.
Figure 2-103: Removing The Black Ink Cartridge

2.17 Power Conditioning Equipment
This power conditioning system consists of the following:
! Oneac 1.4 KW Power Conditioner, Sperry Marine P/N 1809982

! Un-interruptible Power Supply, Sperry Marine P/N 1812295-1 (reference chapter 2.17.3)
(6.5")
(12.50")
(12.00")
Top View
Output
TAP
PB3
PB2
PB1
PB0
(9.12") PA3
PA2
PA1
AC INPUT Input
PA0 L N G
Front View Side View
Figure 2-104: Oneac 1.4 KVA Power Conditioner
Oneac Power Conditioner (shown in Figure 2-104) is used to protect electronic systems from problems caused
by power line noise and transients. The unit has a power rating of 1440 VA at an operating frequency of 50/60
Hz. The input voltages are selected with the appropriate jumpers to provide an output voltage of 120 VAC. This
power conditioner is shipped from Sperry Marine for an input of 240 VAC as a safety precaution. The unit
weights 18.6 Kg (41 Lbs.).
2.17.1.1 Manufacturer – The power conditioner is manufactured by:
ONEAC Corporation
27944 N. Bradley Road
Libertyville, IL. 60048
1-800-243-4543
The vendor’s part number is FT1115.

2.17.1.2 Application – Ship power is notorious for noise and transients. Since power line disturbances can
wreak havoc with electronic equipment, Oneac power conditioners are recommended in the AC power distribution
for all Integrated Bridge System components.
2.17.1.3 Interfaces – The power conditioner has two terminal blocks, one for AC input voltage and one for
AC output voltage.
AC Input – The Input terminal block, as shown in Figure 2-105 , has three terminals labeled "L" (Line or
"hot" or AC high), "N" (neutral or AC low) and "G" (chassis ground).
Jumper Configuration For Input
Of 240 VAC Vendor Information
TAP
PB3
PB2
Voltage Tap PB1
PB0
Selection Jumpers PA3
PA2
AC INPUT AC OUTPUT
PA1
PA0 L N G L N G
Vendor
Information
Front View Rear View
Note that terminal board covers are removed for clarity.
Figure 2-105: Terminal Blocks & Voltage Tap Location
AC Output – The Output terminal block, as shown in Figure 2-105, has three terminals labeled "L" (line),
"N" (neutral) and "G" (chassis ground).
2.17.1.4 Configuration – The input voltages are selected with the appropriate jumpers to provide an output
voltage of 120 VAC, as shown in Table 2-44.

Table 2-44: Input Voltage Tap Selection
Input Voltage Voltage Tap Jumper
100 VAC TAP to PB1

PB1 to PA1
PB0 to PA0
110 VAC TAP to PB2

PB2 to PA2
PB0 to PA0
120 VAC TAP to PB3

PB3 to PA3
PB0 to PA0
2001 VAC TAP to PB1

PB0 to PA1
2101 VAC TAP to PB2

PB0 to PA1
2201 VAC TAP to PB2

PB0 to PA2
2301 VAC TAP to PB3

PB0 PA2
2401,2 VAC TAP to PB3

PB0 to PA3
Note1 These voltages use only TWO wires. Connect both ends of the extra wire to PA0 to avoid losing it.
Note2 The power conditioner is shipped from Sperry Marine jumpered for 240 voltage input as a safety
precaution.
2.17.1.5 Installation Procedure – The power conditioner must be installed using the IBS installation
drawings provided and the following instructions. A typical IBS power distribution installation wiring schematic
is shown in Figure 2-106.

Three Prong 120 VAC
Outlet Connector
A fused disconnect can be
substituted for circuit breakers.
Ship's
220 VAC
Service
AC High
AC Low
IBS
Equipment
Circuit Breakers
Oneac Power
Conditioner
Figure 2-106: Typical IBS Power Distribution Installation
1. Determine from the installation drawing whether the output neutral (N) should be isolated from the
power conditioner chassis ground. The power conditioner is shipped with the output neutral (N)
connected to the chassis ground.
2. If the output neutral (N) and chassis ground are connected for the installation, all electronic equipment
to be protected by the Oneac power conditioner must be grounded to the Oneac only. Do not connect
any other grounds to the protected equipment.
3. If the output neutral (N) is to be disconnected from the chassis ground, unscrew the eight (8) screws from
the cover and remove the cover. Inside the power conditioner on the output end, remove the one (1)
green wire with a red stripe as shown in Figure 2-107 and 2-108. The green wire with a red stripe
connects the filter printed circuit board to the chassis ground stud. Replace cover.
WARNING!

CAUTION
all equipment served by the Oneac does not exceed 1440 VA.
Transformer
Filter Printed Circuit Board
Voltage Tap
Selection
Terminal Block
Output Terminal
Block
Remove green with red stripe

wire to isolate output ground Chassis Ground Stud (2)
"G" from chassis ground.
Figure 2-107: Removal Of Output Chassis Ground Wiring
4. The actual physical placement of the power conditioner should be as close as possible to the electronics
within the equipment enclosure.

Jumpers Voltage Tap
(240 VAC) Terminal Block
TAP Transformer
PB3 Filter Printed
PB2 Circuit Board
PB1
PB0
PA3
PA2
PA1
PA0 Output
Terninal Block
Input
Terminal Block L
L N
N G
G Chassis Ground
Remove this jumper wire (green with red stripe) to

disconnect output neutral "N" from chassis ground.
Figure 2-108: Power Conditioner Wiring Schematic
5. The physical placement should also take into consideration that the power conditioner power input wiring
will follow the branch service circuit breakers (or disconnects and fuses).
6. Once the location for the power conditioner has been determined, the power conditioner should be bolted
firmly on a sturdy panel or structure.
WARNING!
7. Check to see that the main power source and your electronic equipment are turned OFF.
8. Connect the power wiring from the power source line to the input terminals on the power conditioner.
NOTE:
Only jumper wires are to be connected to the voltage tap terminal block. Connect input
wires to the input terminal block only.

9. A heavy gauge wire, equal to or larger in diameter than the power carrying conductors, should be used
to connect the chassis ground.
10. Turn the power source ON at the branch service disconnect.
WARNING!
11. Use a voltmeter to measure voltage between the L (line) and N (neutral) input terminals. If the voltage
reading is correct, the primary coils of the power conditioner are operational.
12. If there is no voltage reading, turn the main power source OFF. Disconnect the power conditioner and
contact the nearest Oneac Service Representative.
13. Measure the output voltage between the L (line) and N (neutral) terminals. The output voltage readings
should be 120 VAC. If the reading is not correct, turn the main power source OFF and recheck the
voltage tap jumpers.
14. Connect the electronic equipment to the power conditioner output terminal block terminals.
15. Turn the main power source and the electronic equipment ON.
16. Verify that the proper voltage is present at the output terminals of the power conditioner.

This power conditioning system consists of the following:
! Oneac 2.8 KW Power Conditioner, Sperry Marine P/N 18112512

! Un-interruptible Power Supply, Sperry Marine P/N 1812295-1 (Reference chapter 2.17.3)
(7.5")
(12.50")
(12.00")
Top View
Output
TAP
PB3
PB2
PB1
PB0
(9.12") PA3
PA2
PA1
AC INPUT Input
PA0 L N G
Front View Side View
Figure 2-109: Oneac 2.8 KVA Power Conditioner
Oneac Power Conditioner (shown in Figure 2-109) is used to protect electronic systems from problems caused
by power line noise and transients. The unit has a power rating of 2880 VA at an operating frequency of 50/60
Hz. The input voltages are selected with the appropriate jumpers to provide an output voltage of 120/240 VAC,
split phase. This power conditioner is shipped from Sperry Marine for an input of 240 VAC as a safety
precaution. The unit weights 41.7 Kg (92 Lbs.).
2.17.2.1 Manufacturer – The power conditioner is manufactured by:
ONEAC Corporation
27944 N. Bradley Road
Libertyville, IL. 60048
800-243-4543
The vendor part number is FT1328/2328.

2.17.2.2 Application – Ship power is notorious for noise and transients. Since power line disturbances can
wreak havoc with electronic equipment, Oneac power conditioners are recommended in the AC power distribution
for all Integrated Bridge System components.
2.17.2.3 Interfaces – The power conditioner has two terminal blocks, one for AC input voltage and one for
AC output voltage.
AC Input – The Input terminal block, as shown in Figure 2-110, has three terminals labeled "L" (Line or
"hot" or AC high), "N" (neutral or AC low) and "G" (chassis ground).
Jumper Configuration For Input
Of 240 VAC Vendor Information
TAP
PB3
PB2
Voltage Tap PB1
PB0
Selection Jumpers PA3
PA2
AC INPUT AC OUTPUT
PA1
PA0 L N G L N G
Vendor
Information
Front View Rear View
Note that terminal board covers are removed for clarity.
Figure 2-110: Terminal Block Locations
AC Output – The Output terminal block, as shown in Figure 2-110, has three terminals labeled "L" (line),
"N" (neutral) and "G" (chassis ground).
2.17.2.4 Configuration – The input voltages are selected with the appropriate jumpers to provide an output
voltage of 120 VAC, as shown in Table 2-45.

Table 2-45: Input Voltage Tap Selection
Input Voltage Voltage Tap Jumper
100 VAC TAP to PB1

PB1 to PA1
PB0 to PA0
110 VAC TAP to PB2

PB2 to PA2
PB0 to PA0
120 VAC TAP to PB3

PB3 to PA3
PB0 to PA0
2001 VAC TAP to PB1

PB0 to PA1
2101 VAC TAP to PB2

PB0 to PA1
2201 VAC TAP to PB2

PB0 to PA2
2301 VAC TAP to PB3

PB0 PA2
2401,2 VAC TAP to PB3

PB0 to PA3
Note1 These voltages use only TWO wires. Connect both ends of the extra wire to PA0 to avoid losing it.
Note2 The power conditioner is shipped from Sperry Marine jumpered for 240 voltage input as a safety
precaution.
2.17.2.5 Installation Procedure – The power conditioner must be installed using the IBS installation
drawings provided and the following instructions. A typical IBS power distribution installation wiring schematic
is shown in Figure 2-111.

Three Prong 120 VAC
Outlet Connector
A fused disconnect can be
substituted for circuit breakers.
Ship's
220 VAC
Service
AC High
AC Low
IBS
Equipment
Circuit Breakers
Oneac Power
Conditioner
Figure 2-111: Typical IBS Power Distribution Installation
1. Determine from the installation drawing whether the output neutral (N) should be isolated from the
power conditioner chassis ground. The power conditioner is shipped with the output neutral (N)
connected to the chassis ground.
2. If the output neutral (N) and chassis ground are connected for the installation, all electronic equipment
to be protected by the Oneac power conditioner must be grounded to the Oneac only. Do not connect
any other grounds to the protected equipment.
3. If the output neutral (N) is to be disconnected from the chassis ground, unscrew the eight (8) screws from
the cover and remove the cover. Inside the power conditioner on the output end, remove the one (1)
green wire with a red stripe as shown in Figure 2-112 and 2-113. The green wire with a red stripe
connects the filter printed circuit board to the chassis ground stud. Replace cover.
WARNING!

CAUTION
all equipment served by the Oneac does not exceed 2880 VA.
Transformer
Filter Printed Circuit Board
Voltage Tap
Selection
Terminal Block
Output Terminal
Block
Remove green with red stripe

wire to isolate output ground Chassis Ground Stud (2)
"G" from chassis ground.
Figure 2-112: Removal Of Output Chassis Ground Wiring
4. The actual physical placement of the power conditioner should be as close as possible to the electronics
within the equipment enclosure.

Jumpers Voltage Tap
(240 VAC) Terminal Block
TAP Transformer
PB3 Filter Printed

PB2 Circuit Board
PB1
PB0
PA3
PA2
PA1
PA0 Output
Terninal Block
Input
Terminal Block L
L N
N G
G Chassis Ground
Remove this jumper wire (green with red stripe) to

disconnect output neutral "N" from chassis ground.
Figure 2-113: Power Conditioner Wiring Schematic
5. The physical placement should also take into consideration that the power conditioner power input wiring
will follow the branch service circuit breakers (or disconnects and fuses).
6. Once the location for the power conditioner has been determined, the power conditioner should be bolted
firmly on a sturdy panel or structure.
WARNING!
7. Check to see that the main power source and your electronic equipment are turned OFF.
8. Connect the power wiring from the power source line to the input terminals on the power conditioner.
NOTE:
Only jumper wires are to be connected to the voltage tap terminal block. Connect input
wires to the input terminal block only.

9. A heavy gauge wire, equal to or larger in diameter than the power carrying conductors, should be used
to connect the chassis ground.
10. Turn the power source ON at the branch service disconnect.
WARNING!
11. Use a voltmeter to measure voltage between the L (line) and N (neutral) input terminals. If the voltage
reading is correct, the primary coils of the power conditioner are operational.
12. If there is no voltage reading, turn the main power source OFF. Disconnect the power conditioner and
contact the nearest Oneac Service Representative.
13. Measure the output voltage between the L (line) and N (neutral) terminals. The output voltage readings
should be 120 VAC. If the reading is not correct, turn the main power source OFF and recheck the
voltage tap jumpers.
14. Connect the electronic equipment to the power conditioner output terminal block terminals.
15. Turn the main power source and the electronic equipment ON.
16. Verify that the proper voltage is present at the output terminals of the power conditioner.

2.17.3 Un-interruptable Power Supply, Sperry Marine P/N 1812295-1
Figure 2-114: Un-interruptable Power Supply
The UPS includes the following specifications:
! Nominal input voltage 120 VAC

! Input voltage range 88-138 VAC, 45-65 Hz
! Output voltage 105-136 VAC, user adjustable
! Output waveform sine-wave # 5% THD
! Automatic current and overvoltage protection
! Brownout protection
Best Power Technology, CAGE code 3S966

Necedah, WI
The vendor’s part number is LI 660B.

2.17.3.2 Application – This UPS is part of the Sperry Marine Power Distribution Systems, part numbers
1812418 & 1812419.
2.17.3.3 Interfaces – Reference Figure 2-114. Incoming power connects to the line cord receptacle. The
Vision computers connect to the output receptacles.
2.17.3.4 Configuration – There are no configuration switches or jumpers to set.
1. Reference Figure 2-115. Mount the UPS using two brackets, Sperry Marine P/N 1859986.
2. Make sure the power switch on the UPS is turned OFF.
3. Connect power from the power conditioner to the line cord receptacle on the UPS.
4. Make sure all Vision equipment to be connected to the UPS is turned off.
5. Connect the PC to the output receptacles on the UPS.
6. Power on the UPS.
Figure 2-115: Un-interruptable Power Supply Mounting

2.18 Vision Upgrade Kits
2.18.1 CPU Upgrade Kit For 486 PCS, Sperry Marine P/N 1813194
This upgrade is for the Vision computer, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-50
2.18.1.1 Kit Contents – The CPU Upgrade Kit contains the following:
• DX5-133 MHZ processor, Sperry P/N 1813193-1.

• Voltage Regulator for 486/66, Sperry Marine P/N 1813193-2.
• Heatsink and fan assembly, Sperry Marine P/N 1812583.
• Anti-static wrist strap, P/N SUN0119-5.
• Heat sink compound, Sperry Marine P/N A56022-1.
• Anti-static foam.
• Anti-static bag.
NOTE:
The processor, regulator and fan/heat sink are pre-assembled at the factory.
2.18.1.2 Upgrade Procedure –
CAUTION
This procedure is specific to the 486/66 processor shipped with VMS-VT systems.
Attempts to upgrade machines other than Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-50 may result in
permanent damage to the processor chip and motherboard. Please call Charlottesville
Engineering to ensure compatibility with your system.
1. Turn of power to the computer at the front panel power switch. Remove the power plug from the rear
of the computer chassis.
2. Turn power off all peripherals connected to the computer. Remove all interface cables and move the
computer to a location where adequate light is available to view internal components.
3. Remove the computer cover. Locate the 486/66 processor (reference Figure 2-116). Be certain of the
orientation of the 486/66 processor and the location of pin 1.
4. Pin 1 of the DX5-133 assembly can be identified by the white arrow located on the 3-volt regulator
socket. This assembly comes pre-assembled to facilitate field installation. Pin 1 must be mated to pin
1 of the processor locking socket. Pin 1 of the processor locking socket is located at the base of the
locking bar. That is, when the locking bar is fully raised is points to pin 1 of the socket.

Figure 2-116: Location Of 486/66 CPU
CAUTION
All parts in this kit are static sensitive. Use the ground strap provided in the kit before
handling any computer components.
5. Unplug the power plug that connects to the processor fan. Fully raise the locking bar on the locking
processor socket.
6. Remove the 486/66 processor and place on the anti-static foam pad provided in the kit.
7. Use the packing material from the DX5-133 to store the old 486/66 processor for transporting. Do not
touch the pins of either processor.

CAUTION
If the DX5-133 is improperly installed, it will be destroyed. Be certain of the location of

pin and the orientation of the DX5-133 before inserting.
8. Insert the DX5-133 assembly into the locking socket, noting the location of pin 1. When inserted
correctly there should be a vacant row of pins around all 4 sides of the new processor. The row at one
end of the locking socket may be hidden by the regulator board.
9. Lock the processor in place by lowering the locking bar so that it’s again parallel to the motherboard.
Again note that the base of the locking bar is aligned with the white arrow (pin 1) of the DX5-133
assembly. Reconnect the power plug to the heatsink fan.
10. Re-install the cover and all peripheral cables to the computer. At power up everything should appear
normal but an overall increase in processor speed should be apparent.
11. The BIOS settings must edited. Re-boot the computer and press the “DEL” key during memory counting
to enter the BIOS setup.
12. Use the cursor arrows to highlight “ADVANCED CMOS SETUP” and press “ENTER”.
13. Press “ENTER” to enter the “Alter Options to make System Work” menu.
14. Use the cursor arrows to highlight “DRAM Wait State Selection”, then use the “PAGE UP” key to select
“0” (zero).
NOTE:
It has been observed that some computers will not run Windows NT with “0" wait states
selected. If this occurs, change the DRAM wait state selection to “1".
15. Use the cursor arrows to highlight “Decoupled Refresh Option”, then use the “PAGE UP” key to select
“ENABLED”.
16. Use the cursor arrows to highlight “Bus Clock Selection”, then use the “PAGE UP” key to select
“AUTO”.
17. Press the “ESC” key to return to the main menu.
18. Use the cursor arrows to highlight “WRITE TO CMOS AND EXIT”.
19. Press “ENTER” to exit the BIOS setup.
20. Re-boot the computer for the changes to take effect. Verify the new CMOS settings by repeating steps
12 through 19.

21. Cycle through some NT windows to verify operation.
22. Return the old 486/66 processor, heatsink/fan assembly and proper documentation to Charlottesville.
2.18.2 CD-ROM Reader Upgrade, Sperry Marine P/N 1812421
The CD-ROM Reader Upgrade is used on the 486 VMS-VT computer system, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-50.
Reference chapter 2.5 of this manual for installation of the CD-ROM.

Chapter 3: Software Installation and Maintenance
3.1 Introduction
This chapter contains the information necessary to install and configure the software for the Integrated Bridge
Systems. The steps involved are as follows:
! Setup BIOS/CMOS for PCS;

! Install Windows NT;
! Install VMS.
Some software installation also includes hardware (example, the Ethernet card). In those instances the software
installation is covered in section two. The following table details the location of all the software installation
instructions.
Table 3-1: Overview of VMS-VT Software Installation
Software Installation Procedure Section
CMOS setup for ‘486 2.2.1.5
CMOS setup for Pentuim 2.2.2.5
Adaptec AHA-2940 SCSI host adapter 2.3.2.6

BIOS setup
Windows NT installation 3.3
Format hard disk 2.4.1.6, 2.4.2.6
Graphics card drivers 2.7.1.6, 2.7.2.6,

2.7.3.6, 2.7.4.6
Install Windows NT using CD-ROM 3.3.1

Control Concepts driver
Install Windows NT using disks 3.3.2

Control Concepts driver
Install VMS program 3.4
Install drivers 3.4.1
Install DAS-4 card driver 3.4.2
Install Sperry Synchro card 3.4.3

Table 3-1: Overview of VMS-VT Software Installation
Software Installation Procedure Section
Edit CONFIG.INI 3.4.4
Install Auto Logon 3.4.5
Install Auto Program Startup 3.4.6
Install system protection 3.4.7
Edit TIMESYNC.INI file 3.4.8
Install Printer 3.4.9
Install Digitizer 2.15.4.5
Install RocketPort serial card 2.12.2.6
Install MicroTouch touch screen driver 2.9.1.6 - 2.9.1.7

3.2 Off-Line File Management
Off-line file management refers to the use of the Windows NT file management utilities. These utilities are
available at any IBS unit which has a keyboard and monitor attached. Off-line file management is also used for
file maintenance at any IBS station via the SeaNET network.
3.2.1 Procedure For Off-Line File Management
The basic procedure consists of the following:
! Re-install Windows NT normal Logon and Program Manager;
! Perform file maintenance under Windows NT;
! Un-install Windows NT Logon and Program Manager.
3.2.1.1 Re-Install Normal Windows NT Functions – During installation of the VMS software, the program
manager executable is given an alias name to prevent Windows NT from finding it. Also, the Windows NT logon
is replaced with the VMS auto-logon. The following steps re-enables Windows NT.
Re-Install Windows NT Program Manager: (un-protect system) –
1. Press "CTRL-ALT-DEL" keys simultaneously and select SHUTDOWN. Then enter "OK" and
select RESTART.
2. With the PC power OFF, insert the Microsoft MS-DOS 6.22 Setup Disk #1 into drive "A" and turn
on the PC power.
4. At the "C:" prompt, type "cd winnt35\system32". Then type "rename pman.exe progman.exe" and
press "Enter". Reboot the computer.
Re-Install Normal Windows NT Logon: –
1. From the PROGRAM MANAGER window, select FILE and RUN. At the COMMAND LINE
block, type "REGEDT32" and select "OK". Then select "HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE",
"SOFTWARE", "MICROSOFT", "WINDOWSNT", "CURRENTVERSION", "WINLOGON".
Then select "AutoAdminLogon" and press "Enter".
2. Change the STRING VALUE to "0" and enter "OK". Then SHUTDOWN the system and reboot
the computer.
3. The full capabilities of Windows NT is now available.

3.2.1.2 Disable Windows NT – Upon completion of file maintenance, Windows NT must be disabled again
to allow for normal VMS functioning. The following procedures are the same as those performed during the
initial VMS software installation.
Install Auto Logon –
1. From the Windows NT Program Manager Window, select and enter the ADMINISTRATIVE
TOOLS icon. Then select and enter USER MANAGER and select USER followed by NEW USER.
2. At the USERNAME block, type "sperry" (lower case). Also type "sperry" (lower case) in the
PASSWORD block and in the CONFIRM PASSWORD block.
3. Select the USER CAN NOT CHANGE PASSWORD by placing an "x" in its selection box. Then
select PASSWORD NEVER EXPIRES by placing an "x" in its selection box.
4. Select PROFILE and at the LOCAL PATH heading type "c:\users\install". Then select "OK" and
return to the PROGRAM MANAGER window.
SOFTWARE, MICROSOFT, WINDOWSNT, CURRENTVERSION, and WINLOGON.
6. At the top bar, select SECURITY, PERMISSIONS, and EVERYONE. At the TYPE block, select
FULL CONTROL and enter "OK".
7. Select EDIT and ADD VALUE. At the VALUE NAME block, type "AutoAdminLogon". At the
DATA TYPE block, select REG_SZ and enter "OK". Then change the STRING VALUE to "1" and
enter "OK". Select "DefaultUserName" and change the STRING VALUE to "sperry" and enter
"OK".
8. Select EDIT and ADD VALUE. At the VALUE NAME block, type "DefaultPassword". At the
DATA TYPE block, select REG_SZ and enter "OK". Then change the STRING VALUE to
"sperry" and enter "OK". EXIT the REGISTRY EDITOR.
9. From the PROGRAM MANAGER window, select MAIN, CONTROL PANEL, and SYSTEM.
At the SHOW LIST FOR block, change the value to "1" and enter "OK". Then SHUTDOWN AND
RESTART Windows NT.
Install Auto Program Startup –
SOFTWARE, MICROSOFT, WINDOWSNT, CURRENTVERSION, and WINLOGON.
2. Select "Userinit" and type "userinit, ndddagnt.exe,win.com, wowexec, c:\users\install\vmstart.bat"

and enter "OK".

3. From the PROGRAM MANAGER window, enter the MSDOS icon and edit the VMSTART.BAT
file. Type "edit vmstart.bat" and entering the following:
sleep5
start vms.exe
exit
4. To exit, press the <ALT> F keys simultaneously followed by "X" and select "YES" to write to the
file. SHUTDOWN Windows NT.
Install System Protection –
1. With the PC power OFF, insert the Microsoft MS-DOS 6.22 Setup Disk #1 into drive "A" and turn
on the PC power.
3. At the "C:" prompt, type "cd winnt35\system32". Then type "rename progman.exe pman.exe" and
press "Enter". Reboot the computer.

3.3 Windows NT Installation
Necessary Components for Installation:
Microsoft MS-DOS 6.22 Setup Disk

Windows NT version 3.5 Setup Diskettes
Windows NT version 3.5 Installation CD ROM or Diskettes
Control Concepts SCSI Multi I/O Card Driver Disk for NT
ATI Ultra Pro Disk #1 or Xpression Disk #1
Comtrol Hostess NT Driver Disk or Rocket NT Driver Disk
Comtrol Hostess Diag Disk or Rocket Diag Disk
VMS Installation Disk
Driver Installation Disk 1812124A #1-2
Touchscreen Driver Installation Disk 1812125 or 1813232
Microsoft Mouse connected to COM1
CD ROM Reader Installed
3.3.1 Installing Windows NT from CD-ROM
This procedure gives detailed instructions for installing Windows NT v3.5 on the pentium computer.
1. With the computer turned off, install a MICROSOFT MOUSE to COM1, a CD ROM reader to the
computer, and insert the Windows NT Setup Boot Disk into drive "A". Then re-boot the PC. (Note:
Pentiun PC’s have a CD ROM reader as part of the base assembly)
2. When prompted replace the Setup Boot Disk with Setup Disk #2 and press "Enter".
3. When prompted press "Enter" to SETUP WINDOWS NT NOW and press "Enter" again for EXPRESS
SETUP.
4. When prompted replace the Setup Disk #2 with Setup Disk #3 and press "Enter".
5. When prompted press "S" to SPECIFY DEVICE DRIVER. Then select OTHER (REQUIRES DISK)
and press "Enter".
Replace setup Disk #3 with the Adaptec 7800 Family Manager Set for WinNT 3.1/d1.20 3.5x/d1
Disk and press "Enter". Press "Enter" again to select Adaptec AHA-2940/AIC-78xx <PCI> driver.
Again press "Enter" to continue with NO ADDITIONAL DRIVERS.
6. When prompted replace the Control Concepts Driver Disk with Setup Disk #3 and press "Enter".
7. Press "Enter" to INSTALL WINDOWS NT FROM CD-ROM" DISK.
8. Select and enter "Load Windows NT into directory C:\FAT" to begin installing. Then select and enter
"Leave the Current File System Intact". Select and enter "Install into \WINNT 35".
9. When prompted replace the Setup Disk #3 with the Control Concepts Driver Disk and press "Enter".

10. If prompted, insert the CD-ROM Installation Disk and press "Enter". If the CD-ROM Installation Disk
is already installed, just press "Enter".
11. When prompted remove the floppy disk from drive "A" and press "Enter".
12. At the NAME prompt type the "VMS-VT". At the COMPANY prompt type "SMARINE" and press
"Enter". After verifying both NAME and COMPANY press "Enter" to continue.
13. When prompted for PRODUCT ID press "Enter" to continue. Then press "Enter" again.
14. At the COMPUTER NAME prompt enter "VMS-1" for the VMS NAVIGATION STATION. If the
ship also contains a VMS PLANNING STATION, name that computer "VMS-2". For any additional
computers name them "VMS-3" through "VMS-N" where N = the final number of IBS NT computers.
Note: (If the ship does NOT contain a VMS PLANNING STATION, all computers in addition to
the VMS NAVIGATION STATION will be named "VMS-2" through "VMS-N" where N = the final
number of IBS NT computers.)
Verify the COMPUTER NAME and press "Enter". Press "Enter" again to select ENGLISH.
15. When prompted for a PRINTER LOCATION, enter "CANCEL". Enter "OK" to continue.
16. When prompted verify and enter the network card IRQ = 10 and the I/O port = 340.
Select "TCP/IP TRANSPORT" by placing an X in the box. Also clear the X indicating
NWLINK IPX/SPX COMPATIBLE TRANSPORT and press "Enter".
17. At IP ADDRESS type "89.8.1.1" for VMS-1 or "89.8.1.2 through 89.8.1.N" for each additional
computer where N = the number corresponding to the VMS-N. At DEFAULT GATEWAY type
"90.7.1.3". Then select "OK". Select "YES" to continue.
18. Change WORKGROUP to "SMARINE" and enter "OK".
19. Enter PASSWORD = "sperry.." (in lower case letters). Then Confirm Password = "sperry.." (in lower
case letters) and enter to continue.
20. At the USER NAME prompt select and enter "CANCEL". Then select "OK" for NO LOCAL
ACCOUNT.
21. Set the Time and Date to "GMT" and also select and enter "AUTOMATICALLY ADJUST TO
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME". Then press "OK".
22. When prompted with DETECTED DISPLAY (ati compatible display adapter), press "OK".
23. Under COLOR PALETTE select "256 Colors". Under DESKTOP AREA select "1280 by 1024 pixels".
Under CHANGE DISPLAY TYPE enter "Test" and press "OK" to view the new mode. Then under
TESTING MODE select "YES" if the display test was correct. Under DISPLAY SETTINGS enter
"OK" to continue setup. Finally under LIST ALL MODES enter "OK".
24. Select "NO" to create an EMERGENCY REPAIR DISK. Then press "Restart Computer".

3.3.2 Install Windows NT Using Diskettes: (If CD ROM Not Available)
1. With the computer turned off, install a MICROSOFT MOUSE to COM1 and insert the Windows NT
Setup Boot Disk into drive "A". Then re-boot the PC.
2. When prompted replace the Setup Boot Disk with Setup Disk #2 and press "Enter".
3. When prompted press "Enter" to SETUP WINDOWS NT NOW and press "Enter" again for EXPRESS
SETUP.
4. When prompted replace the Setup Disk #2 with Setup Disk #3 and press "Enter".
5. When prompted press "S" to SPECIFY DEVICE DRIVER. Then select OTHER (REQUIRES DISK)
and press "Enter".
Replace setup Disk #3 with the Control Concepts Driver Disk and press "Enter". Press "Enter"
again to select QLA400 DRIVER. Again press "Enter" to continue with NO ADDITIONAL
DRIVERS.
6. When prompted replace the Control Concepts Driver Disk with Setup Disk #3 and press "Enter".
7. If prompted, press "A" to INSTALL WINDOWS NT FROM 3.5" DISKS otherwise go to step 8.
8. Select and enter "Load Windows NT into directory C:\FAT" to begin installing. Then verify and enter
"Leave the Current File System Intact". Verify and enter "Install into \WINNT 35".
9. When prompted replace the Setup Disk #3 with the Control Concepts Driver Disk and press "Enter".
10. When prompted replace the Control Concepts Driver Disk with Setup Disk 4 and press "Enter".
11. Follow the prompts to enter Setup Disk 5 through Setup Disk 9. Then remove Setup Disk 9 and press
"Enter" to restart the computer.
12. At the NAME prompt type the "VMS-VT". At the COMPANY prompt type "SMARINE" and press
"Enter". After verifying both NAME and COMPANY press "Enter" to continue.
13. When prompted for PRODUCT ID press "Enter" to continue. Then press "Enter" again.
14. At the COMPUTER NAME prompt enter "VMS-1" for the VMS NAVIGATION STATION. If the
ship also contains a VMS PLANNING STATION, name that computer "VMS-2". For any additional
computers name them "VMS-3" through "VMS-N" where N = the final number of IBS NT computers.
(If the ship does NOT contain a VMS PLANNING STATION, all computers in addition to the
VMS NAVIGATION STATION will be named "VMS-2" through "VMS-N" where N = the
final number of IBS NT computers.)
Then verify the COMPUTER NAME and press "Enter". Press "Enter" again to select
ENGLISH.

15. When prompted for a PRINTER LOCATION, enter "CANCEL". Enter "OK" to continue.
16. When prompted verify and enter the network card IRQ = 10 and the I/O port = 340.
Select "TCP/IP TRANSPORT" by placing an X in the box. Also clear the X indicating
NWLINK IPX/SPX COMPATIBLE TRANSPORT and press "Enter".
17. Re-insert Setup Disk 9 into drive "A" and press "OK". The files will be copied into
C:\WINNT35\SYSTEM32.
18. Follow the prompts to enter Setup Disk 10 through Setup Disk 20.
19. At IP ADDRESS type "89.8.1.1" for VMS-1 or "89.8.1.2 through 89.8.1.N" for each additional
computer where N = the number corresponding to the VMS-N. At DEFAULT GATEWAY type
"90.7.1.3". Then select "OK". Select "YES" to continue.
20. Change WORKGROUP to "SMARINE" and enter "OK".
21. Enter PASSWORD = "sperry.." (in lower case letters). Then Confirm Password = "sperry.." (in lower
case letters) and enter to continue.
22. At the USER NAME prompt select and enter "CANCEL". Then select "OK" for NO LOCAL
ACCOUNT.
23. Set the Time and Date to "GMT" and also select and enter "AUTOMATICALLY ADJUST TO
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME". Then press "OK".
24. When prompted with DETECTED DISPLAY (ati compatible display adapter), press "OK".
25. Under COLOR PALETTE select "256 Colors". Under DESKTOP AREA select "1280 by 1024 pixels".
Under CHANGE DISPLAY TYPE enter "Test" and press "OK" to view the new mode. Then under
TESTING MODE select "YES" if the display test was correct. Under DISPLAY SETTINGS enter
"OK" to continue setup. Finally under LIST ALL MODES enter "OK".
26. Select "NO" to create an EMERGENCY REPAIR DISK. Then press "Restart Computer".

3.4 Install VMS Program:
1. When prompted press "CNTL-ALT-DEL" keys simultaneously. Then type "administrator" at the
Username prompt and type "sperry.." at the Password prompt.
2. From the Windows NT Program Manager Window, select and enter the ADMINISTRATIVE TOOLS
icon. Then select and enter USER MANAGER and select ADMINISTRATOR.
Select PROFILE and under HOME DIRECTORY select LOCAL PATH and enter "c:\users\install".
Then press "OK" twice and shutdown and restart the computer.
3. From the Windows NT Program Manager Window, select and enter the MS-DOS icon. Verify the
working directory is C:\USERS\INSTALL.
4. Insert the VMS-VT INSTALLATION DISK into drive A: and enter "a:\pkunzip a:\vms.zip". When
prompted to INSERT THE LAST DISK OF THE BACKUP SET, press "Enter".
5. At the C:\USERS\INSTALL prompt create the following directories by entering:

md charts
md dlog
md navlines
md plans
3.4.1 Install Drivers:
1. From the WINDOWS NT MS-DOS window insert the Driver Configuration Disk (1812124A 1 of 2)
into the "A" drive and change the directory to A:\ by entering "a:". Then enter "setup".
Change the directory to C:\USERS\INSTALL by entering "c:".
2. Remove the disk and insert the Driver Configuration Disk (1812124A 2 of 2) into the "A" drive and
enter "copy a:.".
3. Install the TIME SYNC SERVICE by typing: "tsinstal c:\users\install\timesync.exe".
4. Remove the floppy disk, "shutdown" NT, and then re-start NT as ADMINISTRATOR.
5. From the Program Manager, select the MS-DOS Icon and
Edit the HOSTS file by changing directories to:

C:\WINNT35\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS\ETC and entering "edit hosts".
Then edit the HOSTS file as shown below:
127.0.0.1 local host (this is the last line shown)

89.8.1.1 vms-1
89.8.1.2 vms-2
. .
. .
89.8.1.n vms-n (where n = total number of VMS computers on the ship)

To exit, press the <ALT> F keys simultaneously followed by "X" and select "YES" to write to
the file.
6. From the C:\USERS\INSTALL directory type "setup2".
7. Configure each VMS computer according to its interface requirements.
3.4.2 Install DAS-4 Driver (If Part of System)
1. Enter "setup2" followed by ISA and DAS. At the DAS #0 section select PORT until the ADDRESS is
set to 300-307. Then select INSTALL.
2. For additional DAS-4 cards in the same VMS computer also configure the DAS #1 and DAS #2 sections
by selecting PORT until the ADDRESS is set to 310-317 and 200-207 respectively. Then select
INSTALL followed by MAIN MENU and QUIT.
3.4.3 Install Sperry SYNCHRO Card (If Part of System)
1. Enter "setup2" followed by ISA. Then select SYNCHRO followed by PORT until the ADDRESS is set
to 380-3AF.
Select INSTALL and verify a SYNCHRO VALUE WINDOW appears. Then select MAIN MENU
and QUIT. (If the SYNCHRO VALUE WINDOW did NOT appear, "shutdown and restart"
windows NT. Again select the MS-DOS window and enter "setup2". Select SYNCHRO and verify
a SYNCHRO VALUE WINDOW appears).
Select MAIN MENU and QUIT.
3.4.4 Edit CONFIG.INI File
1. Use the SECRETS OF CONFIG.INI as a Guide
2. At the C:\USERS\INSTALL prompt type "edit config.ini".
3.4.5 Install Auto Logon:
1. From the Windows NT Program Manager Window, select and enter the ADMINISTRATIVE TOOLS
icon. Then select and enter USER MANAGER and select USER followed by NEW USER.
2. At the USERNAME block, type "sperry" (lower case). Also type "sperry" (lower case) in the
PASSWORD block and in the CONFIRM PASSWORD block.
3. Select the USER CAN NOT CHANGE PASSWORD by placing an "x" in its selection box. Then select
PASSWORD NEVER EXPIRES by placing an "x" in its selection box.
4. Select PROFILE and at the LOCAL PATH heading type "c:\users\install". Then select "OK" and return
to the PROGRAM MANAGER window.

5. From the PROGRAM MANAGER window, select FILE and RUN. At the COMMAND LINE block,
type "REGEDT32" and select "OK". Then select "HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE", SOFTWARE,
MICROSOFT, WINDOWSNT, CURRENTVERSION, and WINLOGON.
6. At the top bar, select SECURITY, PERMISSIONS, and EVERYONE. At the TYPE block, select FULL
CONTROL and enter "OK".
7. Select EDIT and ADD VALUE. At the VALUE NAME block, type "AutoAdminLogon". At the DATA
TYPE block, select REG_SZ and enter "OK". Then change the STRING VALUE to "1" and enter
"OK". Select "DefaultUserName" and change the STRING VALUE to "sperry" and enter "OK".
8. Select EDIT and ADD VALUE. At the VALUE NAME block, type "DefaultPassword". At the DATA
TYPE block, select REG_SZ and enter "OK". Then change the STRING VALUE to "sperry" and enter
"OK". EXIT the REGISTRY EDITOR.
9. From the PROGRAM MANAGER window, select MAIN, CONTROL PANEL, and SYSTEM. At the
SHOW LIST FOR block, change the value to "1" and enter "OK". Then SHUTDOWN AND
RESTART Windows NT.
3.4.6 Install Auto Program Startup
1. From the PROGRAM MANAGER window, select FILE and RUN. At the COMMAND LINE block,
type "REGEDT32" and select "OK". Then select "HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE", SOFTWARE,
MICROSOFT, WINDOWSNT, CURRENTVERSION, and WINLOGON.
2. Select "Userinit" and type "userinit,ndddagnt.exe,win.com, wowexec,c:\users\install\vmstart.bat" and

enter "OK".
3. From the PROGRAM MANAGER window, enter the MSDOS icon and edit the VMSTART.BAT file.
Type "edit vmstart.bat" and entering the following:
sleep5
start vms.exe
exit
4. To exit, press the <ALT> F keys simultaneously followed by "X" and select "YES" to write to the file.
SHUTDOWN Windows NT.
3.4.7 Install System Protection
the PC power.
3. At the "C:" prompt, type "cd winnt35\system32". Then type "rename progman.exe pman.exe" and press
"Enter". Reboot the computer.

3.4.8 Edit TIMESYNC.INI File
1. Use SECRETS OF TIMESYNC.INI as a Guide
2. At the C:\USERS\INSTALL prompt type "edit timesync.ini".
3. Scroll down to the "[TIME_SYNC]" block heading. Modify the [TIME_SYNC] section as shown
below:
[TIME_SYNC]
PERIOD=3.0
COUNT=20
Where the PERIOD is the time in seconds between broadcasts of the Timesync message. COUNT is
the number of timesync samples received from other nodes that are to be averaged to determine the local
clock adjustment.
4. Scroll down to the "[LINKS.xxx]" headings. Modify the [LINKS] section as shown below:
[LINKS]
PORT=6000
1=vms-1,6000
2=vms-2,6000
.
.
n=vms-n,6000
Where the [LINKS] section links the TIMESYNC PROCESS at PORT 6000 to each VMS computer
1 through n PORT number 6000.
3.4.9 Install Printer (If Part of System)
1. Login to Windows NT and from the Program Manager select MAIN followed by PRINT MANAGER.
Then select PRINTER followed by CREATE PRINTER.
2. At the PRINTER NAME type "HP Deskjet" and then "TAB" to DRIVER and select HP DESKJET 520
and press "Enter".
3. Verify the path of the Windows NT distribution files is A:\i386\ and press "Continue".
4. Follow the prompts to insert the Windows NT Workstation CD-ROM or Setup Disk #16 into Drive A:
and press "OK". (If using Setup Disk #16, follow the prompts to insert Setup Disk #17 and Setup Disk
#19).
5. Under the PRINTER SETUP window, Verify the section entitled FORMS (SOURCE) contains AUTO
and the section entitled NAME contains LETTER.
6. Remove Setup Disk #19 from Drive A: and press "OK". Then SHUTDOWN and RESTART Windows
NT.

Chapter 4: Peripheral and Interface Specifications
4.1 Introduction
This chapter contains details for interfacing different types of peripherals and external devices with Voyage
Management System (VMS) equipment: the VMS Command Station (VMS CS), Navigation Workstation and
the Planning Station. The peripheral devices are grouped into the following categories:
# Operator Input
# Operator Output
# Collision Detection/Avoidance
# Depth
# Direction
# Piloting
# Position
# Propulsion
# Speed
# Steering
# Weather
The devices for each category are listed in the tables below.
NOTE:
The devices listed in this chapter are subject to change.
Table 4-1: Approved Serial Interfaces

NMEA
Manufacturer/ Model(s) Message Talker/
Category Device Interface Type Message
Heading Gyrocompass Sperry Marine Digital MK-37 RS-422 NMEA 0183 $HEHDT
$HEROT
Gyrocompass Lehmkuhl LR40 Repeater RS-422 NMEA 0183 $HEHDT
Repeater
Lehmkuhl LR60 Repeater RS-422 NMEA 0183 $HEHDT
Sperry Marine DTR 600 RS-422 NMEA 0183 $HEHDT

RS-232
Sperry Marine DBR 600 RS-422 NMEA 0183 $HEHDT
RS-232
Magnavox MX4200 RS-422 NMEA 0183 $GPVTG
GPS $GPGGA
$GPZDA

NMEA
$GPGGA
$GPZDA
$GPGGA
$GPZDA
Navstar XR4 RS-422 NMEA 0183 $GPVTG
$GPGGA
$GPZDA
Trimble NavTrack RS-422 NMEA 0183 $GPVTG
$GPGGA
$GPZDA
Trimble 4000SST RS-232 NMEA 0183 $GPVTG
$GPGGA
$GPZDA
Trimble NT100 RS-422 NMEA 0183 $GPVTG
$GPGGA
$GPZDA
Trimble NT200 RS-422 NMEA 0183 $GPVTG
$GPGGA
$GPZDA
Trimble NT200D RS-422 NMEA 0183 $GPVTG
$GPGGA
$GPZDA
$GPVDR
Robertson-Shipmate RS5300 RS-232 NMEA 0183 $GPVTG
w/ RS5310 control head $GPGGA
$GPZDA
Robertson-Shipmate RS5500 RS-232 NMEA 0183 $GPVTG
$GPGGA
$GPZDA
Digital Marine Northstar 8000 RS-422 NMEA 0183 $GPVTG
w/ Model 800 GPS control head $GPGGA
$GPZDA
Digital Marine Northstar 9200 RS-422 NMEA 0183 $GPVTG
w/ Model 9400 control head $GPGGA
$GPZDA
Position Loran C Digital Marine Northstar 800 RS-422 NMEA 0183 $LCGLL
(continued)
Digital Marine Northstar 9000 RS-422 NMEA 0183 $LCGLL
w/ 9400 control head
Raytheon RayNav 780 RS-422 NMEA 0183 $LCGLL
Loran C/GPS Digital Marine Northstar 9000 RS-422 NMEA 0183 $LCGLL
Loran-C, 9200 GPS & 9400
control head
Transit Magnavox MX5102 RS-422 NMEA 0183 $TRGLL
Robertson-Shipmate RS-5100 RS-422 NMEA 0183 $TRGLL
Transit/GPS Magnavox MX4102 RS-422 NMEA 0183 $TRGLL

NMEA
Magnavox MX5102 w/ MX5400R RS-422 NMEA 0183 $TRGLL

Transit/ GPS/ Maganavox MX1105 RS-232 Proprietary n/a
Loran C/ Omega
Transit/ GPS/ Racal Decca MNS-2000 RS-232 NMEA 0183 $IIGLL
Loran C/ Decca
Decca Navigator
Speed Speed Log Sperry Marine SRD-421S RS-232/422, NMEA 0183, $VDVBW
contact closure 200 p/nmi
Sperry Marine SRD-331 contact closure 200 p/nmi n/a
Sperry Marine SRD-301 contact closure 200 p/nmi n/a
Aquaprobe MK-5 RS-232 NMEA 0183 $VDVBW
Ametek-Straza contact closure 200 p/nmi n/a
Depth Depth Sounder Honeywell-Elac LAZ-51AT RS-422 NMEA 0183 $SDDBT

Echosounder
w/ DAZ-25 Digital Display
Marconi Seachart 3 Serial TTL Proprietary n/a
Sperry Marine SRD-421S RS-232/422 NMEA 0183 $VDDRU
Skipper GDS101 Echosounder RS-232 NMEA 0183 $SDDBT
Weather Weather Station

R.M.Young RS-422 NMEA 0183 $IIMHU
$IIMMB
$IIMTA
$IIMWD
$IIMWV
Obsermet 2901 RS-422 NMEA 0183 $IIMHU
(sensor options must be included to $IIMMB
obtain desired NMEA message) $IIMTA
$IIMWD
$IIMWV
Wind Speed/ Malling Anemometer RS-232 NMEA 0183 $WIMWV
Direction System 879 $IIMWD
$IIMWV
Biral-Gill RS-422 NMEA 0183 $IIMWD
$IIMWV
Radar Charts Radar/ARPA Sperry Marine RASCAR RS-232 Proprietary $RANPO
(Navlines)
Radar Targets Radar/ARPA Sperry Marine RASCAR RS-232 SMI $RARTA
Proprietary
Raytheon Pathfinder ST RS-232 SMI $RARTA
Proprietary
Kelvin Hughes Nucleus RS-232 SMI $RARTA
Proprietary
Track- Keeping Autopilot Sperry Marine ADG 3000 RS-232/422 NMEA 0183 & **
Proprietary

NMEA
Sperry Marine ADG 6000 RS-232/422 NMEA 0183 & **
Proprietary
Emri Micropilot SEM-1000 RS-422 NMEA 0183 & **
Proprietary
Speed Pilot KaMeWa Analog/ Proprietary **

Speed Control (Pitch Control) Discrete
Engine Room Engine Room
Monitoring
** NMEA interface definition beyond the scope of this table. Refer to the manual supplied with
the device and the NMEA 0183 Standard for Interfacing Marine Electronic Navigational
Devices, Version 1.5, December 1987, and Version 2.0, January 1992, published by the
National Marine Electronics Association.

Table 4-2: Approved Non-serial Interfaces
Electrical
Category Signal Name Description Signal Parameters1
Gyrocompass Heading 1x synchro, 115VAC ref 0–359.9E
Heading 24, 35, & 70 VDC step data 0–359 5/6E, 1/6E steps
Speed Log Water Speed Voltage-free contact closure 0–99.9 knots, 200
pulses/nmi
Water Speed analog2 0–99.9 knots
Engine Room Engine RPM analog2 up to ±1000 RPM
(Propulsion)
Shaft RPM analog2 up to ±1000 RPM
2
Fuel Consumption analog 0–3000 L/hours
Shaft Horse Power analog2 0–20,000 HP
Shaft Thrust analog2 0–200 Tons
Shaft Torque analog2 0–200 Ton-meters
2
Starting Air Pressure analog 0–35 kg/cm²
Control Air Pressure analog2 0–15 kg/cm²
Sea Water Temperature analog2 -5–99.9EC
Load Indication analog2 0–10 (unitless)
2
Steering Rudder Angle analog up to ±180E
Weather Wind Speed (relative) analog2 0–199.9 knots
Wind Direction (relative) analog2 0–359.9E
Air Temperature analog2 -50–99.9EC
2
Relative Humidity analog 0–100%
Barometric Pressure analog2 0.800–1.200 Bar
Note 1: Except for gyro heading, all parameter ranges must be configurable at installation up to the
limits listed. Displayed units will be operator-selectable.
Note 2: Signals denoted as "analog" may be configured at installation for 0–10VDC or ±10VDC
voltage signals, 4–20mA current loop signals.

Appendix A: Configuring VMS-VT
Sperry Marine Proprietary - See Notice On Page i A-1

COMPANY PROPRIETARY UNRELEASED 03 956-SCM-25288 REV G
WORKING COPY 4 April 1996
Configuring VMS-VT
CONFIG.INI
1812354G
Build 2??
This document and the information disclosed herein are proprietary

data of Sperry Marine Inc. Neither this document non the information
contained herein shall be reproduced or disclosed to others without
the written authorization of Sperry Marine Inc.
Sperry Marine Proprietary - See Notice On Page i 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
EDITOR'S NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
BUILD UPDATE REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Software Release to Build Number Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
CONFIGURATION TECHNIQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
ARCS_CHARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
rootDir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
permitTransfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
NOAA_RASTER_CHARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
rootDir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
[BSB_RASTER_CHARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
[ASSOCIATED_CHART_DATA@node] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
PORTFOLIO_MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
CHART_CATALOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
COVERAGE_MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
AUTOPILOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
BASE_PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
SEND_SPD_PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
SEND_HDG_PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
GAIN_SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
LDH_PERIOD_SECONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
LDH_TIMEOUT_SECONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
NO_PLAN_ALERT_SECONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
NO_PLAN_REANNOUNCE_SECONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
NO_RESPONSE_ALARM_SECONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
PERIOD_SECONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
XTE_AVERAGING_SECONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
ALWAYS_ACCEPT_TURNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
OFFTRACK_REANNOUNCE_SECONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
[COMPORTS,<process>@<node>] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
COM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
[EXTERNAL_ALARMS@<node>] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2 Sperry Marine Proprietary - See Notice On Page i

FAILURE_UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
FITNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
FITNESS_TIMEOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
FITNESS_UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
PULSE_DURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
WARNING_TIMEOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
WARNING_UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
[FILE_MANAGER@node] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
[LINKS.VMS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
[KEYBOARD@node] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
INSTALLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
[COURSE_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
[DEPTH_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
[ENGINEPOINT_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
[ENGINEROOM_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
[GROUNDSPEED_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
[HEADING_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
[HUMIDITY_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
[NAVLINES_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
[POSITION_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
[PRESSURE_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
[SETDRIFT_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
[TARGET_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
C_FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
CORRELATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
DELTA_POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
DELTA_VELOCITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
DROP_PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
LOST_PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
UPDATE_PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
TEMPERATURE_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
[TRIMBLE_CONFIGURATION_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
[WIND_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
[NOTES] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

[OWNSHIP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
BEAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
DNV_WATCH1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
MAXDEEPDRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
MAXSPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
MAXTURNRATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
MINTURNRADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
SENSOR_TIMEOUT_SECONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
[PRESENTATION_LIBRARY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
[SAFETY_CHECKING] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
DO_SHIP_SAFETY_CHECKING_BOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
DO_RUNNING_VP_SAFETY_CHECKING_BOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
DO_VP_EDITOR_SAFETY_CHECKING_BOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
DISPLAY_SHIP_SAFETY_ZONE_BOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
DISPLAY_RUNNING_VP_SAFETY_ZONE_BOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
DISPLAY_VP_EDITOR_SAFETY_ZONE_BOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
[SCREEN_MILLIMETERS@node] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
[SEA_PAGES] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
[COMPUTED_SETDRIFT] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
[SERIAL_OUT<serial index>] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
BASE_PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
MSGOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
SHARES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
SPEED_CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
ENABLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
MANUAL_SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
TC_SHIP_SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
TC_SPEED_ADVANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
TC_ORDERED_SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
MIN_SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
MAX_SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
ACCEL_LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
SAF_HOLD_TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
USE_SHIP_SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
[SPEED_CONTROL_LDHx] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
NODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
BOARD_ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
CONTROL_AVAIL_CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
CONTROL_AVAIL_SENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
CONTROL_REQUEST_CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
CONTROL_REQUEST_SENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

CONTROL_GRANT_CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
CONTROL_GRANT_SENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
LDH_SELECTED_CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
LDH_SELECTED_SENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
ORDER_CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
ORDER_CAL_FULL_LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
ORDER_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
MANUAL_OVERRIDE_CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
MANUAL_OVERRIDE_SENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
FUEL_CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
FUEL_CAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
THROTTLE_CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
PROP_PITCH_CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
RPM_CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
THROTTLE_CAL_FULL_LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
THROTTLE_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
PROP_PITCH_CAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
RPM_CAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
THROTTLE_SPEED_TOLERANCE=<speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
THROTTLE_TIME_TOLERANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
[TOUCH_SCREEN@node] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
TOUCHCAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
[USER_INTERFACE@node] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
STYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
[VIDEO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
INSTALLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
[VIGILANCE_MON] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
ENABLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
PERIOD_MINUTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
REJECT_MINUTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
RESTORE_SECONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
[VMS_SECURITY_DATA@node] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
[VOYAGE_PLAN] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
APPROACH_SECONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
TRACK_ADVANCE_METERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
TURN_RATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
WARNING_SECONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
APPENDIX A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
config.ini EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
APPENDIX B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Track Keeping and the PID Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
APPENDIX C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Sensor Offset Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
APPENDIX D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
HOW TO CONNECT BETWEEN NODES

using Microsoft Windows NT 3.5, VMSTART.BAT, and CONFIG.INI

..................................................................................... 64
Part 1, For Build 135 and Earlier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Part 2, for Build 136 and Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Part 3, Using FILE_MANAGER in config.ini . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
APPENDIX E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Preventing System Errors in a VMS-VT System Without a Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
APPENDIX F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Access To OSI Weather Routing Software VIA a Novell File Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
APPENDIX G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
General Considerations when configuring SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Appendix H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Connections to Novell File Servers that have NO Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
APPENDIX I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
General Considerations when Configuring Chart Directories,
Chart Catalog, and Portfolio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
APPENDIX J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
ADJUSTING ANALOG VALUES IN THE [ENGINEROOM_MANAGER] SECTION OF THE VMS-VT
CONFIG.INI FILE: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
APPENDIX K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Information About Use of Portfolios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
APPENDIX L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
VMS-VT Speed Control Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
APPENDIX M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Multiple NMEA Sentences for a Given Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
APPENDIX N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Gain configuration for builds prior to 136 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

EDITOR'S NOTE
I had wanted to hold the release of this new version of "Configuring VMS-VT" until some additional changes and corrections
could be made. However, I see that I can not do that. It is of no use to anyone sitting on my desk but, it is very useful to those
who must configure VMS-VT systems. Be sure to look over the Build Update Reference for new VMS features (next page)
and the new information found in the Appendices at the end of the document.
If (when) you find errors please feel free to FAX or email the information to me and I will make corrections. The FAX number
is 804-974-2696 attention: Sam Gentry. My internet Email address is hsgentry@cstone.net. Sperry email ID is HSG0241.
You will notice that this document has a new name. It is now called "Configuring VMS-VT". The previous name, "Secrets of
Config.ini", was intended to indicate that we were telling everything we know about config.ini.

BUILD UPDATE REFERENCE

This reference list provides a record of which version of VMS-VT first contained a specific configuration item. If you see a
block indicator such as [SERIAL_OUT] with nothing indented below it then that entire block was introduced in the build. If
the block indicator has one or more items indented below it then the block is not new, but those items are new to the block.
Build 66:
[SERIAL_OUT]
Build 70:
[ENGINEPOINT_MANAGER]
Build 93:
[SERIAL_OUT]
BASE_PERIOD
SEND_SPD_RATE
SEND_HDG_RATE
[EXTERNAL_ALARMS@vms-1]
[FILE_MANAGER]
[COMPORTS,<process>@<node>]
PLOTTER
Build 109:
[ALL_TRACK]
[OWNSHIP]
SENSOR_TIMEOUT_SECONDS
Build 109.6
[COMPORTS]
COM
MARCONI
[DEPTH_MANAGER]
MARCONI
[VIDEO]
ENABLED
Build 109.9
[VIGILANCE_MON]
Build 130
[SETDRIFT_MANAGER]
COMPUTED
[COMPUTED_SETDRIFT]
Build 136
[AUTOPILOT]
GAIN_SET
ALWAYS_ACCEPT_TURNS
[ARCS_CHARTS]

[NOAA_RASTER_CHARTS]
[PORTFOLIO_MANAGER]
[CHART_CATALOG]
[CONNECTION]
[SHARES]
Build 163
[CHART_MANAGER] No longer required.
[VMS_SECURITY_DATA]
Build 163.17
[SPEED_CONTROL]
[AUTOPILOT]
LDH_PERIOD_SECONDS
[USER_INTERFACE]
[TOUCH_SCREEN]
Build 2??
[ASSOCIATED_CHART_DATA]
[AUTOPILOT]
LDH_PERIOD_SECONDS
OFFTRACK_REANNOUNCE_SECONDS
[BSB_RASTER_CHARTS]
[KEYBOARD@node]
[USER_INTERFACE]
STYLE
[SAFETY_CHECKING]
[SCREEN_MILLIMETERS]
[TRIMBLE_CONFIGURATION_MANAGER]
APPENDIX M
APPENDIX N
[FILE_MANAGER@node]
[TOUCH_SCREEN@node]

Software Release to Build Number Cross Reference
Build numbers are numbers that are automatically assigned by our internal version control process every time a new
INTERNAL build of VMS-VT is done. When the software is ready for test the integer part of the build number may be frozen
and a fractional part added as changes and corrections are made. e.g. Build 163 went to test and a few problems were
discovered and corrected. This resulted in 163.7. Build 163.7 was released for distribution to ships as 1812354D. Additional
corrections were applied and 163.15 was released as 1812354E and later 163.17 as 1812354F. While these corrections are
being made major new features are being added to the software. This will eventually result in a new major release to test (e.g.
228) and in time changes to that release (e.g. 228.5). It is important to note that the BUILD number is a unique identifier that
can tell the software release (e.g. 1812354F). Inside the Charlottesville facility we may have many "builds" that are never
released to ships. This build number also uniquely identifies these builds. The build numnber can be determined from any
running VMS-VT node by pressing SYSTEM MENU then DIAGNOSTICS then BUILD. All reports of problems in the in
the field MUST include the build number. Because of the version control software that we use, ANY build can be recreated.
The following table will help in determining the Software Release for a build.
Build Number Software Release
93 1812354A
109.14 1812354B
109.17 1812354C
163.7 1812354D
163.15 1812354E
163.17 1812354F
2?? 1812354G

INTRODUCTION
This document describes the VMS-VT config.ini file that controls the configuration of the entire VMS-VT system. All connections
between nodes and all connections from nodes to sensors and peripheral devices are controlled by this file. With the exception of
the [KEYBOARD] block, EVERY NODE IN THE SYSTEM must have the same config.ini file.
This config.ini description is a reference for config.ini. The Build Update Reference is a chronological index to config.ini features
added in system versions after than the original.
NOTE: If this file is changed, the .dim files must be deleted. To delete the .dim files after editing the config.ini file, enter the
following command:
del *.dim
If this is not done, some of the config.ini changes may not be recognized by the system.
A copy of the config.ini file is included as APPENDIX A. This file may be used as a template for creation of usable config.ini files.
NOTE: Each definition in the configuration blocks of this file must appear on the same line. Line wrapping is not currently
supported. Display panel definition examples and formats are spanned across several lines in this document to make
the document easier to read and understand.

CONFIGURATION TECHNIQUES
The release disk for VMS-VT includes a sample CONFIG.INI file. This file can be used as a starting point for the
configuration of a VMS-VT system. However, since every installaiton is different if is important to be sure that the
CONFIG.INI file has everything that it needs and nothing that it does not need. The following information is intende to help
decide what is needed and what is not needed in a specific system.
- Every CONFIG.INI must start with the [NOTES] block with at least the VERSION number. Currently there
is only one version (1). This is a convenient place to put comments (start the line with a ;) that indicate who
configured the system and what ship it is for.
- [LINKS.VMS] You may find some older versions of CONFIG.INI that have [LINKS] blocks other than
.VMS. Other than in Navy Patrol Craft installations NO [LINKS] blocks are required other than .VMS.
Every system should be configured just as shown in the example. You can delete any lines for nodes that are
not available in your system. e.g. delete the line for vms-6 if you do not have a vms-6.
- [COMPORTS...] This block describes the comports on each node of the system and the type of information
that is received or sent over that comport. NO COMPORT WILL BE AVAILABLE TO THE SYSTEM
UNLESS IT IS LISTED IN A COMPORT BLOCK.
- [SERIAL_OUTx] If your system requires that VMS-VT send NMEA messages to some external device then
you will need one or more [SERIAL_OUTx] block.
- [AUTOPILOT] This block is required if the VMS-VT is conected to an autopilot. The type of autopilot is
set as well as several parameters that are critical to proper control of an autopilot.
- [VOYAGE_PLAN] This block is ALWAYS REQUIRED.
- [FILE_MANAGER] This block is required if the operator will transfer voyage plans, charts, etc between
system nodes or to other devices (e.g. APL file server).
- [OWNSHIP] This block is ALWAYS REQUIRED. If the correct information about the ship is not provided
the VMS-VT will not operate correctly.
- [VIGILANCE_MON] This block is required if the customer needs the BV Vigilance monitor option.
- [KEYBOARD] This block is ALWAYS REQUIRED.
- [COURSE_MANAGER] This block is required if COURSE information is to be received from an external

source. e.g. from a GPS receiver.
- [DATA LOG] This block is ALWAYS REQUIRED.
- [DEPTH_MANAGER] This block is required if DEPTH information is to be received from a depth

sounder.
- [ENGINEPOINT_MANAGER] This block is required if engine room information is to be received from an

external source by way of the NMEA $ERPNT message.
- [ENGINEROOM_MANAGER] This block is required if engine room informat;ion is to be received from

analog sources.
- [GROUNDSPED_MANAGER] This block is required if GROUND SPEED information is to be received

from an external source. e.g. from a GPS receiver.
- [HEADING_MANAGER] This block is ALWAYS REQUIRED.

- [NAVLINES_MANAGER] This block is required if the customer needs the RASCAR Navlines transfer
option.
- [POSITION_MANAGER] This block is ALWAYS REQUIRED.
- [PRESSURE_MANAGER] This block is required if barometric pressure information is to be received from

an external source.
- [SETDRIFT_MANAGER] This block is required if Set and Drift are to be received from an external source.
e.g. from a GPS receiver. -OR- If Set and Drift is to be computed by the VMS-VT. If computed set and drift
are enabled see [COMPUTED_SETDRIFT]
- [TARGET_MANAGER] This block is required if the customer needs the RASCAR Target transfer option.
- [WATERSPEED_MANAGER] This block is ALWAYS REQUIRED.
- [WIND_MANAGER] This block is required if wind speed and direction information is available from an
external source.
- [EXTERNAL_ALARMS...] This block is required if the customer needs the external alarms option.
- [SEA_PAGES] This block is required if the customer needs one or more of the configurable display pages.
These pages can be configured by VMS-VT engineering to display a vast array of information that is
available to the system. This information includes: navigation data, weather data, engineering data, etc.
Please refer to "Configuring VMS-VT Sea Pages" 03956-SCM-25320 for information on Sea Pages.
- [VIDEO] This block is required if the customer needs the VIDEO WINDOW option.
- [USER_INTERFACE...] This block is required if one or more nodes in the system are to use the
Configurable Standalone Display (CSD) option or the PLANNING option. The CSD option allows a
configurable display page (see SEA_PAGES]) to be the only page displayed on a node. That is, the
configurable display occupies all the display area and the standard VMS display is not available. The
PLANNING option configures the node to be a planning station.
- [ARCS_CHARTS] This block is required if British Admiralty ARCS charts are to be in use. Please note
that ARCS charts are encrypted and a security key is required to read them.
- [BSB_RASTER_CHARTS] This block is required if BSB (NOAA, NDI, etc.) charts are to be used. BSB
charts are not encrypted.
- [PORTFOLIO_MANAGER] This block is always required. The portfolio manager handles the storage of
chart portfolios.
- [CHART_CATALOG] This block is always required.
- [SHARES] This block is required if one node is to share resources (e.g. CD ROM, disk directories) with
another node.
- [CONNECTIONS] This block is required if one node is to use shared resources on another node (see
[SHARES])
- NOTE: Every VMS-VT node must have a network adapter driver installed EVEN IF IS A ONE
NODE (STANDALONE) SYSTEM. This requirement can be met in one of two ways. If a real
network card is installed in the computer then the driver for that card must be installed. If there is
no network card then the "MS Loopback Adapter" must be installed. This is done in the same way
as installing a driver for a real network card. i.e., CONTROL PANEL | NETWORKS | ADD
ADAPTER | Select MS Loopback Adapter.

When editing config.ini DO NOT COMMENT OUT A SECTION MARKER (e.g.

[VOYAGE_PLAN]) and leave the lines following the sectin marker enabled. If it is necessary to
remove a section from config.ini either delete the entire section or comment out the entire section.

[ARCS_CHARTS@node]
Defines the location and directory names of the ARCS charts and the location of a local arcs directory.
storage=<arcs storage path 1>, <arcs storage path 2>,. . . <arcs storage path n>
<arcs storage path1> is the path to the first storage location for ARCS charts. Probably a CDROM
drive. This path may be a local path such as "charts\arcs\cd1" or a drive letter such as "e:". The
drive letter may be a local drive or a network connection.
rootDir=<local directory>
<local directory> is the name of a local directory that will be used to store files created by the vms
software. The local directory name "charts\arcs" should be used.
permitTransfer=<floppy drive>
<floppy drive> is the drive letter associated with the floppy disk drive into which the ARCS permit
diskette will be inserted when the permit is read.
Ex. [ARCS_CHARTS@vms-1]
storage=c:\charts\arcs\cd1,d:
rootDir=charts\arcs
permitTransfer=p:
NOTE: The permit diskette must be read by every node in the system. This can be accomplished by setting
"permitTransfer=A:" and placing the diskette in the local A: drive, selecting SYSTEM MENU, ARCS SECURITY,
and READ PERMITS. Since some nodes in the system may not have convenient access to the floppy dirve the best
way to accomplish this is to configure the system to have all nodes read the permit diskette from the floppy drive on
one of the nodes. This can be done as follows:
[SHARES@vms-3]
floppy=a:\,FULL
ARCS=d:\,FULL
[CONNECTIONS]
p:=floppy,vms-3
r:=ARCS,vms-3
[ARCS_CHARTS]
storage=r:
rootDir=charts\arcs
permitTransfer=p:
You will see that because there is no node name on the [CONNECTIONS] or [ARCS_CHARTS] every node
(including VMS-3) will make a network connection to the A: and D: drive on vms-3. EVERY NODE will read the
permit diskette from vms-3.
Please refer to [VMS_SECURITY_DATA] section in this document for additional information that is
required to configure ARCS charts.
IMPORTANT NOTE: Due to an error in build 163.? the "permitTransfer" does not properly read the
@node part of the [ARCS_CHARTS@node]. Because of this error the ARCS_CHARTS must be configured
as shown above. A later release of the software will allow additional flexibility.

[NOAA_RASTER_CHARTS@node]
This configuration of NOAA charts is used on BUILD 200 and earlier.

After BUILD 200 [BSB_RASTER_CHARTS] must be used to define NOAA charts.
Defines the location and directory names of the NOAA charts and the location of a local NOAA directory.
storage=<noaa storage path 1>, <noaa storage path 2>,. . . <noaa storage path n>
<noaa storage path1> is the path to the first storage location for NOAA charts. Probably a
CDROM drive. This path may be a local path such as "charts\noaa\cd1" or a drive letter such as
"e:". The drive letter may be a local drive or a network connection. Please see additional
information in [shares@...] and [connections@...] in this document.
rootDir=<local directory>
<local directory> is the name of a local directory that will be used to store files created by the vms
software. The local directory name "charts\noaar" should be used.
Ex. [NOAA_RASTER_CHARTS@vms-1]
storage=c:\charts\noaar\cd1,d:
rootDir=charts\noaar
[BSB_RASTER_CHARTS@node]
This configuration of NOAA or other BSB charts is used after build 200.
Before BUILD 200 [NOAA_RASTER_CHARTS] must be used to define NOAA charts.
Defines the location and directory names of BSB charts The BSB chart format is a rasterscan format adopted by chart
suppliers. Such suppliers include NOAA and NDI. The content lines of this section all specify a supplier and then a
comma separated list of storage locations for the charts.
Definition syntax:
<type>=<location 1>, <location 2>,. . .
<type> is the name of the supplier (e.g. NOAA or NDI)

<location 1> is the first location for the type of chart
<location 2> is the second location for the type of chart
etc.
Ex. [BSB_RASTER_CHARTS]
NOAA=f:,s:
NDI=d:\charts\bsb\ndibsb
BSB charts can be placed either on a CDROM or on the hard disk. Some extra steps are required if the charts are
located onthe hard disk. The storage location (e.g. location 1 above or d:\charts\bsb\ndibsb in the example) must point
to a directory that contains a subdirectory called BSBCHART. A file called volume.ini must be place in the
BSBCHART directory. This file tells the VMS-VT what the volume of charts actually is. The volume.ini file is
created by the installer when the VMS-VT is installed. This file must contain the section [VOLUME_ID] and the
name of the supplier. e.g.:
[VOLUME_ID]
name=NDI

[ASSOCIATED_CHART_DATA@node]
The vms can share danger area information and chart annotation information with other vms nodes on the network.
This is accomplished by adding the [ASSOCIATED_CHART_DATA] section to the config.ini. This section has two
fields, local and central. Central should point to the central location where all of the data is to be stored. The central
directory can must be a directory on the planning station. Local should point to a different location that acts as like a
cache for the local nodes. The nodes do not access data stored in the central location. They access data stored in the
local location. The vms software will not allow these two fields to point to the same location.
Ex. : [ASSOCIATED_CHART_DATA]
local=local
central=q:\central
This section can be node specific(by adding @node) or used in general like the above example. At system startup, the
local directory will be wiped clean and the data in the central directory will be copied to it. If the directories do not
exist, they will be created. If this section is not in the config.ini, the user will not able to associate danger areas or chart
annotations to charts.
DO NOT FORGET, THE CENTRAL LOCATION MUST BE A DIRECTORY ON THE PLANNING

STATION. If the central directory is not located on the planning station, then it is possible to start the machines in an
order where one or more machines will not see the associated data.
[PORTFOLIO_MANAGER@node]
The portfolio manager manages the chart portfolios.
LOCATION=<folio directory>
<folio directory> is the name of the directory that will contain the folios. The directory name "folios" should
be used. The directory may be local or on a remote node. Please see additional information in [shares@...]
and [connections...] in this document.
Ex. 1, folio located on this node:

[PORTFOLIO_MANAGER]
LOCATION=folios
Ex. 2, folio located on this a remode node:

[PORTFOLIO_MANAGER]
LOCATION=r:\folios
NOTE: While it is possible to have each node in a VMS-VT system use a different folio this is not the proper
configuration. The VMS-VT system should be configured so that all nodes use one folio on one specific node.
[CHART_CATALOG@node]
The chart catalog is responsible for displaying charts.
LOCATION=<catalog directory>
<catalog directory> is the name of the directory that will be used as the catalog. The directory name
"catalog" should be used.
COVERAGE_MAP=<portfolio>
<portfolio> is the portfolio that will be used when displaying the graphical chart catalog. The
portfolio must be in the directory specified by LOCATION.

Ex. [CHART_CATALOG@vms-1]
LOCATION=catalog
COVERAGE_MAP=WORLD COVERAGE MAP
[AUTOPILOT]
Define the autopilot parameters.
Definition syntax:
TYPE=<autopilot name>
{ADG3000, ADG6000, EMRI}
(The following three components BASE_PERIOD, SEND_HDG_PERIOD, and SEND_SPD_PERIOD are

used ONLY FOR SIMULATION OR TRAINER SITUATIONS when the autopilot needs to receive heading
and speed information over the serial line. They are NOT to be used on a ship. These components are only
read and compatible if TYPE=ADG6000).
BASE_PERIOD=<send period, (seconds)>
periodic rate of the message sending task
Ex. BASE_PERIOD=0.5 for a 2Hz task,

BASE_PERIOD=2.0 for a 0.5Hz task
NOTE: BASERATE was changed to BASE_PERIOD in Build 93.
SEND_SPD_PERIOD=<send period, (seconds)>
periodic rate at which the updated speed is to be sent to the autopilot
(Refer to the example included with the <send period> definition for BASE_PERIOD above).
NOTE: SEND_SPD_RATE was changed to SEND_SPD_PERIOD in Build 93.
SEND_HDG_PERIOD=<send period, (seconds)>
periodic rate at which the updated heading is to be sent to the autopilot
NOTE: SEND_HDG_RATE was changed to SEND_HDG_PERIOD in Build 93.
NOTE: Two methods for setting track keeping gains have been
implemented. Prior to BUILD 136 please refer to APPENDIX N for
gain configuration information. The information provided here is for
Build 136 and later.
The following lines define one gain set. The first line devines the name of the set that is seen by the operator,
two keys for dGPS and GPS gains, and the track advance for this gain set. Note: prior to build 136 the track
advance could not be set for each gain set, but was set in the [VOYAGE_PLAN]

GAIN_SETn=<name of the gain set for operator selection>,

<dGPS gains key>,
<GPS gains key>,
<track advance>
<dGPS gains key>
A name that is used to identify the line that defines the PID gains that will be used
when in dGPS mode.
<GPS gains key>
A name that is used to identify the line that defines the PID gains that will be used
when in non-dGPS mode.
<track advance>
The distance (in meters) prior to the wheel over point that the turn order must be
sent to the autopilot so that the ship will start the turn at the proper time.
The following lines actually contain the gain information for the GAIN SET. The key name that is used in the
GAIN SET line must match the key name that is used on these lines:
<dGPS gains key>= ,
,
<D term straigh dGPSt>,
,
,
<D term turn dGPS>,
<cross track error limit distance, (meters) dGPS>,
<cross track averaging time dGPS>
<GPS gains key>= ,

,
<D term straight GPS>,
,
,
<D term turn GPS>,
<cross track error limit distance, (meters) GPS>,
<cross track averaging time GPS>

P term for tracking control during ship travel in a straight line

I term for tracking control during ship travel in a straight line
<D term straight>
D term for tracking control during ship travel in a straight line

P term for tracking control during ship travel in a turn


I term for tracking control during ship travel in a turn. This term should always be 0.0
<D term turn>
D term for tracking control during ship travel in a turn
<cross track error limit distance, (meters)>
The distance off the track that will rresult in an off track alarm
<cross track averaging time>
The length of time (seconds) that cross track error will be averaged to determine
the cross track error that is used to compute the heading correction. NOTE:
Prior to build 136 this parameter could not be set for each gain set. For
builds prior to BUILD 136 please see XTE_AVERAGING_ SECONDS
below.
One GAIN_SET line and two gain key lines defines a complete gain set for dGPS and non-dGPS operation of
the PID track controller. There may be as many gain sets as necessary. The first would be GAIN_SET1, the
nest GAIN_SET2, etc.
Please see APPENDIX B for a description of the PID track controller.
LDH_PERIOD_SECONDS=<steering period, (seconds)>
time interval between steering messages sent to the autopilot. If this parameter is set to -1 the
sending of information to the pilot will be stopped if track keeping is stopped for some reason. This
is the proper setting for all DNV approved ships and is the recommended setting for all ships.
NOTE: Starting with build 224 LDH_PERIOD_SECONDS is no longer required. If it is

included in the config.ini it will be ignored. The system will always perform as though
LDH_PERIOD_SECONDS were set to -1.
LDH_TIMEOUT_SECONDS=<timeout limit, (seconds)>
time interval that the LDH will wait for a message from the autopilot before SETTING OFF AN
ALARM
NO_PLAN_ALERT_SECONDS=<no plan timeout limit, (seconds)>
time interval that the system will operate with the autopilot enabled (i.e. controlling the autopilot)
but with no plan running before SETTING OFF AN ALARM
NO_PLAN_REANNOUNCE_SECONDS=<reannouncement delay, (seconds)>
time interval between each reoccurring SETTING OFF AN ALARM event because no plan is
running
NO_RESPONSE_ALARM_SECONDS=<response timeout limit, (seconds)>
time interval the system will wait for a response from the autopilot before SETTING OFF AN
ALARM

PERIOD_SECONDS=<autopilot control update delay, (seconds)>
time interval between each autopilot control update
XTE_AVERAGING_SECONDS=<cross track error average rate, (seconds)>
how often the cross track error is averaged to reduce noise. NOTE: This method of setting the
cross track averaging will only work in builds prior to BUILD 136. After BUILD 136 please
see GAIN_SETn above.
ALWAYS_ACCEPT_TURNS=<status>
{ENABLED, DISABLED}
If this feature is ENABLED the operator will be asked to accept waypoint turns, but if the
turn is not approved then it will be made anyway and an operator message will be
displayed. This feature MUST be enabled on DnV watch 1 ships.
OFFTRACK_REANNOUNCE_SECONDS=<reannounce period, seconds>
This parameter controls the rate at which the "Autopilot active and track keeping stopped"
message is displayed. This error will occur when a Voyage Plan is active but track
keeping has been stopped. This can happen for two reasons: position source is not valid or
the XTE is too large for track keeping. In the first case the Operator Message, "Position
Loss. Track keeping stopped.", will be issued. In the second case "Off track. Track
keeping stopped." will be issued. These messages are issued when the condition begins.
As long as the condition persists the message, "Autopilot active and track keeping
stopped.", will be issued every OFFTRACK_REANNOUNCE_SECONDS.
Time interval between recurring messages when the ADG3000 or ADG6000 NAV mode is selected and the
VMS-VT IS NOT following a voyage plan. The VMS-VT will default to 30 seconds if this entry is not
present.
NOTE: Be very careful when setting the TRACK ADVANCE. Prior to build 136 the
TRACK_ADVANCE_METERS parameter set the Track Advance. For build 136 and later the
track advance is set for each gain set. Notice the last parameter in the GAIN_SETx lines in the
examples that follow and in the description in the previous pages. e.g. in the line
GAIN_SET1=SET 1, dGPS1, GPS1, 180 The Track Advance is 180 meters.
Ex.
[AUTOPILOT]
TYPE=ADG6000
;BASE_PERIOD=0.125
;SEND_HDG_PERIOD=0.125
;SEND_SPD_PERIOD=1.0
GAIN_SET1=SET 1, dGPS1, GPS1, 180
dGPS1= 0.13, 0.0006, -0.8, 0.255, 0.000, -1.6, 600,10
GPS1= 0.07, 0.0003, -0.4, 0.13, 0.000, -1.0, 600,10
GAIN_SET2=SET 2,dGPS2,GPS2,180
dGPS2= 0.07, 0.0003, -0.4, 0.13, 0.000, -1.0, 800,10
GPS2= 0.03, 0.00001, -0.2, 0.05, 0.000, -0.5, 800,10
dGPS3= 0.02, 0.0000, -0.2, 0.03, 0.000, -0.5, 1000,10

GPS3= 0.02, 0.0001, -0.2, 0.03, 0.000, -0.5, 1000,10

LDH_TIMEOUT_SECONDS=15.0
LDH_PERIOD_SECONDS=-1
NO_RESPONSE_ALARM_SECONDS=30
NO_PLAN_ALERT_SECONDS=30
NO_PLAN_REANNOUNCE_SECONDS=30
PERIOD_SECONDS=1
ALWAYS_ACCEPT_TURNS=ENABLED
NOTE: In this example, semicolons precede the three lines used only for simulation or trainer situations, disabling
these lines. These three lines must NOT be enabled if the system is to be used on a ship.
[COMPORTS,<process>@<node>]
Define all communication ports on a process <process> and a node <node>. This block is repeated for every node that
has communication ports.

Definition syntax:
COM<index of the port being defined>=<baud rate, (bits/second)>,

<parity mode>,
<stop bits>,
<data bits, (bits)>,
<flow control>,
<port type>
<baud rate, (bits/second)>
data transfer rate supported by the port
<parity mode>
{0 - no parity, 1 - odd parity, 2 - even parity}
<stop bits>
{0 - 1 stop bit, 1 - 1.5 stop bits, 2 - 2 stop bits}
<flow control>
{0 - no control, 1 - XONXOFF, 2 - DSRDTR, 3 - RTSCTS}
<port type>
{AUTOPILOT,
BEEPER,
DIGITIZER,
EXT_ALARM,
MARCONI,
NAVLINES,
NMEA,
PLGR,
PLOTTER (added in Build 93),
PULSELOG,
SERIAL_OUT<serial index>,
TARGET,
UPS}
NOTE: the MARCONI port type is for use with the MARCONI Seachart 3 Depth Sounder only.
Ex. [COMPORTS.VMS@vms-1]
COM1=4800,0,0,8,0,NMEA
COM2=4800,0,0,8,0,BEEPER
COM3=4800,0,0,8,0,AUTOPILOT
COM4=9600,0,0,8,0,EXT_ALARM
[COMPORTS.VMS@vms-2]
COM2=4800,0,0,8,0,SERIAL_OUT1
COM4=2400,0,0,8,0,DIGITIZER
COM5=2400,0,0,8,0,PLOTTER

[CONNECTIONS@node]
Defines network connections that are to be made by the node on another node.
<localResource>=<remote node>,<shareName>
<localResource> is the local drive letter that will be assigned to the resource
<remote node> is the name of the node that will be the target of the connection
<shareName> is the name of the shared resource on the remote node. NOTE: Please see the
[shares] section and Appendix D in this document for related information.
[DATA_LOG]
Define the data log parameters.
NOTE: Earlier versions of CONFIG.INI may contain the following, additional lines:
OWNSHIP=ownShipDItem
1=ownShipDItem,0,1
These lines were previously used for data logging purposes, but this use has since been discontinued. They
are ignored in the current version of config.ini; therefore, they will cause no problems if they are in
config.ini.
Definition syntax:
PATH=<location of the data log files>
PERIOD=<time delay between data log entries, (seconds)>
The 0.0 setting disables the data log feature.
Ex. [DATA_LOG]
PATH=.\logs
PERIOD=15.0
[EXTERNAL_ALARMS@<node>] (implemented in Build 93)
The dedicated port(s) for the external alarms must be defined in the [COMPORTS.<port>@<node>] block for the
local machine to enable the external alarms. The port type for the dedicated external alarms port(s) is EXT_ALARM.
An external alarm can only be assigned to one of the two control lines for a serial port; therefore, at least two serial
ports on the local machine must be dedicated to the external alarms for all three external alarms to be configured. (See
the definition of COM4 and COM5 on vms-1 in the example given for a [COMPORTS.<process>@<node>] block
above).
Definition syntax:
FAILURE=<communications port for the interface>,

<control line to use for the alarm, {RTS, DTR}>,
<line state for setting/activating the external alarm, {HIGH, LOW}>
EXTERNAL SYSTEM FAILURE ALARM configuration
FAILURE_UPDATE=<delay between checks for system failures, (seconds)>
NOTE: The EXTERNAL SYSTEM FAILURE ALARM is immediately activated when a system

failure is detected.
FITNESS=<communications port for the interface>,

EXTERNAL FITNESS ALARM configuration
FITNESS_TIMEOUT=<time VMS waits for an operator touch, (seconds)>
This value should be greater than 60 seconds.
FITNESS_UPDATE=<operator interaction check delay, (seconds)>
delay between checks for operator interaction with the VMS
PULSE_DURATION=<external operator fitness system pulse duration, (seconds)>
duration of the pulse to be sent to the external operator fitness system
WARNING=<communications port for the interface>,

EXTERNAL SYSTEM WARNING ALARM configuration
WARNING_TIMEOUT=<system warning acknowledgement timeout, (seconds)>
time VMS waits for operator acknowledgement of system warnings once a warning has been
detected
If this period expires, the EXTERNAL SYSTEM WARNING ALARM is activated.
WARNING_UPDATE=<delay between checks for system warnings, (seconds)>
Ex. [EXTERNAL_ALARMS@vms-1]
PULSE_DURATION=0.5
FAILURE_UPDATE=1.0
WARNING_UPDATE=1.0
WARNING_TIMEOUT=1.0
FITNESS_UPDATE=1.0
FITNESS_TIMEOUT=600.0
FITNESS=COM3,DTR,HIGH
FAILURE=COM3,RTS,HIGH
WARNING=COM4,RTS,LOW
[FILE_MANAGER@node] (implemented in Build 93, @node added in Build 224)
Define the file manager links to drives on other computers. This feature is primarily intended to provide a link to the
APL NOVELL file server.
Definition syntax:
<link index>=<name associated with the link>,

<drive associated with the link>,
<path associated with the drive associated with for the link>

<link index>
index associated with the link being defined
Ex. [FILE_MANAGER]
1=Drive A,A:,\
2=vms-1,c:,users\install
NOTE: Please read APPENDIX D for additional information required to make FILE_MANAGER connections
to other nodes.
[LINKS.VMS]
Define the system workstation intracommunication link.
Definition syntax:
PORT=<common port>
number of the port to be opened by the system for intracommunication among the system
workstations
<link index>=<node>,<common port>
<link index>
index of the communication link being defined
<node>
node assigned to this link
<common port>
(Refer to the <common port> definition for PORT above).
NOTE: <common port> in each link definition must be the same <common port> used
to define PORT
NOTE: The entire concept of LINKS and port numbers can be simplified for normal VMS-VT use by
including the following example and enabling as many nodes as are included in the system. Any
unused node names should be deleted or additional names added if required. Future VMS-VT
systems may require additional [LINKS] blocks.
IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT THE PORT NUMBER SELECTED FOR VMS BE DIFFERENT FROM THE
PORT NUMBER SELECTED FOR TIMESYNC. PLEASE REFER TO "SECRETS OF
TIMESYNC.INI" 03956-SCM-25289 FOR MORE INFORMATION ABOUT TIMESYNC.
Ex. [LINKS.VMS]
PORT=5000
1=vms-1,5000
2=vms-2,5000
3=vms-3,5000
4=vms-4,5000
5=vms-5,5000
6=vms-6,5000

[KEYBOARD@node]
Defines the onscreen keyboard status.
Definition syntax:
INSTALLED=<onscreen keyboard status>
{TRUE - onscreen keyboard enabled, FALSE - onscreen keyboard disabled}
Ex. [KEYBOARD]
INSTALLED = FALSE
NOTE: See APPENDIX E for more information information relating to VMS-VT systems WITHOUT a real
keyboard.
The capability to make [KEYBOARD] node specific (@node) was added in build 220.
MANAGERS:
The following fourteen managers each keep track of a different type of information. Each manager must know the source of this
information in the system since a specific device may be interfaced to more than one node, and different devices providing the
same type of information may be interfaced to one node. The general definition syntax for these managers is the same.
NOTE: Several MANAGERS require an x,y offset for the associated sensors. A description of this offset can be found
in APPENDIX C.
NOTE: Starting with build 220, when a MANAGER requires a NMEA message type (e.g. GPGGA) it is possible to
configure more than one type on a single line. This feature may be used only in very special cases and if it is used
incorrectly may result in loss of sensor data. PLEASE READ APPENDIX M of this document BEFORE using this
configuration.
[COURSE_MANAGER]
Define course handles.
Definition syntax:
<handle index>=<name of the device supplying the data>,

<process>@<node>,
<format of the data to be received>,
<number of the port the device is connected to>,
<x offset, (meters)>,
<y offset, (meters)>,
<NMEA message type >,
<name of the device supplying the data>
This name can be any string, but the same device should have the same name everywhere
that it appears in the system.
<process>
name of the process that handles this device

<node>
name of the node that handles this device
<format of the data to be received>
{NMEA, PLGR, PFM, . . .}
<port number>
The port number of the serial port
<x offset, (meters)>
x offset of the device in meters from the center line of the ship. See APPENDIX C
<y offset, (meters)>
y offset of the device in meters from the bow of the ship. See APPENDIX C.
<NMEA message type >
type of the ith NMEA message that will be used if <data format> is NMEA
Ex. [COURSE_MANAGER]
1=GPS,VMS@vms-3,NMEA,7,0,0,GPVTG
[DEPTH_MANAGER]
Define depth handles.
Definition syntax:

<process>@<node>,
<NMEA message type >,
<name of the device supplying the data>
<process>
<node>

{NMEA, PLGR, PFM, MARCONI . . .}
<port number>
<x offset, (meters)>
<NMEA message type >
type of the ith NMEA message that will be used if <data format> is NMEA
Ex. [DEPTH_MANAGER]
1=DEPTH,VMS@vms-3,NMEA,3,0,0,SDDBT
2=MARCONI,VMS@vms-3,MARCONI,3,0,0
NOTE: The MARCONI data format is for use with the MARCONI Seachart 3 depth sounder only.
[ENGINEPOINT_MANAGER] (implemented in Build 70)
Define the engine points.
Definition syntax:

<process>@<node>,
<NMEA identifier>,
<engine point number>,
<gain>,
<offset>,
<conversion factor>
<name of the device supplying the data>,
<process>
<node>
{NMEA}

<port number>
<NMEA identifier>
{ERPNT}
<engine point number>
specifies the engine room point number that is associated with the data
<gain>
<offset>
<conversion factor>
The data that is received in the message will be multiplied by <gain>, then <offset> will
be added and the result will be multiplied by <conversion factor>. These three
parameters allow a very flexible conversion of any data into any scale or units. In most
cases the adjustment of these parameters is easier if <conversion factor> is set to 1.0.
Ex. [ENGINEPOINT_MANAGER]
1=GEN1_POWR,VMS@vms-1,NMEA,1,ERPNT,1,1.0,0.0,1.0
5=OIL_PRESS,VMS@vms-1,NMEA,1,ERPNT,5,1.0,0.0,0.6894757
[ENGINEROOM_MANAGER]
Please see APPENDIX J of this document for information on the configuration of the [ENGINEROOM_MANAGER]
[GROUNDSPEED_MANAGER]
Define ground speed manager handles.
Definition syntax:

<process>@<node>,
<port number>
<NMEA message type>,
<handle index>
index of the ground speed manager handle being defined

<process>,
<node>,
<port number>


<NMEA message type>
(Refer to the respective definitions in the [COURSE_MANAGER] section above).
Ex. [GROUNDSPEED_MANAGER]
[HEADING_MANAGER]
Define heading manager handles.
Definition syntax:

<process>@<node>,
<NMEA message type 1>,
<handle index>
index of the heading manager handle being defined

<process>,
<node>,
<NMEA message type>
Ex. [HEADING_MANAGER]
1=GYRO,VMS@vms-6,SYNCHRO,1,0,0
3=GYRO,VMS@vms-1,NMEA,6,0,0,HEHDT
4=RASCAR_PORT,VMS@vms-6,NAVLINES,3,0,0
5=RASCAR_STBD,VMS@vms-6,NAVLINES,5,0,0
[HUMIDITY_MANAGER]
Define humidity manager handles.

Definition syntax:

<process>@<node>,
<handle index>
index of the humidity manager handle being defined

<process>,
<node>,
<NMEA message type>
Ex. [HUMIDITY_MANAGER]
1=GPS,VMS@vms-3,NMEA,7,0,0,WIMHU
2=GPS,VMS@vms-6,NMEA,8,0,0,WIXDR
[NAVLINES_MANAGER]
Define NAVLINES manager handles.
Definition syntax:
PATH=<location of the NAVLINES files>
<RASCAR index>=<name identifying the RASCAR handle being defined>,

<process>@<node>
<RASCAR index>
index of the RASCAR handle being defined
<process>, <node>
Ex. [NAVLINES_MANAGER]
PATH=.\navlines
1=RASCAR_PORT,VMS@vms-6
2=RASCAR_STBD,VMS@vms-6
NOTE: For the VMS-VT NAVLINES option to work correctly the RASCAR must be configured as a position
source in [POSITION_MANAGER]. This situation will be corrected in a later release of VMS-VT
software.
[POSITION_MANAGER]

Define position manager handles.
Definition syntax:

<process>@<node>,
<handle index>
index of the position manager handle being defined

<process>,
<node>,
<NMEA message type>
NOTE: GPGLL must NEVER be used as a source of GPS position. The GPGGA message must be used. The
GPGLL message does not indclude information required to warn the operator if the GPS has gone into DR
mode. If GPGGA is the only position sentence available from the GPS then you MUST CONTACT Field
Engineering in Charlottesville for instrucitons. The GLL messages are acceptable from Loran or Decca.
Ex. [POSITION_MANAGER]
1=GPS,VMS@vms-3,NMEA,7,0,0,GPGGA
3=LORAN-C,VMS@vms-3,NMEA,9,0,0,LCGLL
[PRESSURE_MANAGER]
Define pressure manager handles.
Definition syntax:

<process>@<node>,
<handle index>

index of the position manager handle being defined

<process>,
<node>,
<NMEA message type>
Ex. [PRESSURE_MANAGER]
1=PUMP1,VMS@vms-1,NMEA,1,0,0,GPVTG
[SETDRIFT_MANAGER]
Define set and drift manager handles.
Definition syntax:

<process>@<node>,
<handle index>
index of the set and drift manager handle being defined

<process>,
<node>,
<NMEA message type>
NOTE: For internally computed set and drift add a line to the [SETDRIFT_MANAGER] as follows:
<handle index>=COMPUTED,VMS,COMPUTED,COMPUTED,0,0
Ex. [SETDRIFT_MANAGER]
3=COMPUTED,VMS,COMPUTED,COMPUTED,0,0
[TARGET_MANAGER]

Define target manager handles.
Definition syntax:
C_FACTOR=<position factor used with velocity correlation check>
CORRELATOR=<target correlator name>,

<process>@<node>
<target correlator name>
This parameter must be unique if more than one target correlator exists.
<process>, <node>
DELTA_POSITION=<correlation failure distance, (meters)>
distance between two targets that will cause the targets to fail correlation
DELTA_VELOCITY=<correlation failure velocity difference, (meters/seconds)>
velocity difference in meters/second between two targets that will cause the targets to fail correlation
DROP_PERIOD=<time before master target is dropped, (seconds)>
LOST_PERIOD=<time before sensor target is declared lost, (seconds)>
UPDATE_PERIOD=<time delay between master target table updates, (seconds)>
<handle index>=<name used to identify the target source>,

<process>@<node>,
TARGET,
<time in seconds between each report of the target sensor tasks>,
<time in seconds before the target source times out>,
<target source indicator>,
<target type>,
<name used to identify the target sensor>
<handle index>
index of the target manager handle being defined
<process>,
<node>,
<target source indicator>

Target source indicators correspond to bit positions; therefore, a target source indicator
must be a member of the set {0, 1, 2, 4, 8,16, etc.}. The same target source on a different
computer must have the same source indicator (e.g. RASCAR_PORT has the same target
source indicator despite where it is connected).
<target type>
{air, water, etc.}
Use 1 for RASCAR targets.
Ex. [TARGET_MANAGER]
CORRELATOR=TARGET CORRELATOR,VMS@vms-1
LOST_PERIOD=15.0
DROP_PERIOD=30.0
UPDATE_PERIOD=5.0
DELTA_POSITION=500.0
C_FACTOR=1.1
DELTA_VELOCITY=1.0
1=RASCAR_PORT,VMS@vms-5,TARGET,4,0,0,5,16,4,1,RASCAR_PORT
2=RASCAR_STBD,VMS@vms-5,TARGET,5,0,0,5,16,2,1,RASCAR_STBD
5=GPS_TARGETS,VMS@vms-6,TARGET,1,0,0,1,120,8,1,GPS Targets
[TEMPERATURE_MANAGER]
Define temperature manager handles.
Definition syntax:

<process>@<node>,
<handle index>
index of the temperature manager handle being defined

<process>,
<node>,
<NMEA message type>
Ex. [TEMPERATURE_MANAGER]
1=THERMO1,VMS@vms-1,NMEA,1,0,0,GPVTG

[TRIMBLE_CONFIGURATION_MANAGER]
Defines a manager to handle the special configuration information provided by a Trimble GPS. The Trimble GPS has
been modified for Sperry to provide internal configuration information to the VMS-VT. This information allows the
VMS-VT to alarm the operator if the GPS is configured in a unsafe way.
Definition syntax:

<process>@<node>,
<format of the data to be received>, (always TRIMBLE in this manager)
<x offset, (meters)>, (not used in this manager, always set to 0)
<y offset, (meters)>, (not used in this manager, always set to 0)
<Trimble port>, (use 1 or 2)
Ex. [TRIMBLE_CONFIGURATION_MANAGER]
1=GPS1,VMS@vms-1,TRIMBLE,2,0,0,1
[WATERSPEED_MANAGER]
Define water speed manager handles.
Definition syntax:

<process>@<node>,
<handle index>
index of the water speed manager handle being defined

<process>,
<node>,
<NMEA message type>
Ex. [WATERSPEED_MANAGER]
1=SRD-331,VMS@vms-6,PULSELOG,2,0,0

[WIND_MANAGER]
Define wind manager handles.
Definition syntax:

<process>@<node>,
<handle index>
index of the wind manager handle being defined

<process>,
<node>,
<NMEA message type>
Ex. [WIND_MANAGER]
1=WEATHERPAK,VMS@vms-6,NMEA,7,0,0,IIMWV
[NOTES]
Define the system version number.
Definition syntax:
VERSION=<version number of the configuration file>
Ex. [NOTES]
VERSION=1
NOTE: Until further notice the version number is always 1.
[OWNSHIP]
Define general ship information.
Definition syntax:
BEAM=<ship width, (meters)>
DNV_WATCH1=<DNV WATCH 1 ship system status>

{TRUE - DNV ship system status is WATCH 1,

FALSE - DNV ship system status is not WATCH 1}
This parameter defaults to FALSE.
LENGTH=<ship length, (meters)>
NAME=<ship name>
MAXDEEPDRAFT=<maximum ship deep draft, (meters)>
MAXSPD=<maximum ship speed, (meters/seconds)>
MAXTURNRATE=<maximum ship turn rate, (radians/seconds)>
MINTURNRADIUS=<minimum ship turn radius, (meters)>
SENSOR_TIMEOUT_SECONDS=<time to sensor timeout, (seconds)>
Ex. [OWNSHIP]
NAME=PC Ships
LENGTH=50.0
BEAM=10.0
MAXSPD=20.0
MAXTURNRATE=0.1
MINTURNRADIUS=400.0
MAXDEEPDRAFT=5.0
DNV_WATCH1=FALSE
SENSOR_TIMEOUT_SECONDS=30.0
[PRESENTATION_LIBRARY]
The section [PRESENTATION_LIBRARY] configures the location of the presentation library. the keyword 'location'
specifies a full path to the presentation library. For example, if the presentation library is located on drive c: in the
usr\local directory, then the configuration would be:
[PRESENTATION_LIBRARY@vms-1]
location=c:\usr\local
This section does not have to be node specific. If this section is not specified, the vms will default the directory location
to the current vms directory. If this section has been configured correctly, the message "7Cs Ecdis kernel version:
SevenCs EC2007 ECDIS Kernel Version" will appear in the log file.
[SAFETY_CHECKING]
Enable the safety checking feature of VMS-VT.
Definition syntax:
DO_SHIP_SAFETY_CHECKING_BOOL=<TRUE, FALSE>
DO_RUNNING_VP_SAFETY_CHECKING_BOOL=<TRUE, FALSE>
DO_VP_EDITOR_SAFETY_CHECKING_BOOL=<TRUE, FALSE>
These three flags will enable the three types of safety checking. SHIP_CHECKING will check the future position of
the ship along the heading vector for danger areas. RUNNING_VP will check the voyage plan that is currently

running for danger areas. VP_EDITOR will check the voyage plan, while in the voyage plan editor, for danger areas.
Three additional flags control the diaplay of safety zones. They are:
DISPLAY_SHIP_SAFETY_ZONE_BOOL=<TRUE, FALSE>
DISPLAY_RUNNING_VP_SAFETY_ZONE_BOOL=<TRUE, FALSE>
DISPLAY_VP_EDITOR_SAFETY_ZONE_BOOL=<TRUE, FALSE>
If safety checking of a given type is being done, the DISPLAY flag of the same type controls whether the safety zone
for that safety checker is diaplayed.
[SCREEN_MILLIMETERS@node]
Specifies the size of the display screen in millimeters.
Definition syntax:
width=<width>
<width> is the width of the screen in millimeters
height=<height>
<height> is the height of the screen in millimeters
[SEA_PAGES]
NOTE!
A new document describing the Sea Pages configuration in detail is now available.
Please refer to "Configuring VMS-VT Sea Pages" 03956-SCM-25320
for detailed information. The [SEA_PAGES] section has been removed from this document.
[COMPUTED_SETDRIFT] (Implemented in build 124, changed in build 130)
The COMPUTED_SETDRIFT section is no longer required in config.ini. All of the parameters previously set by this
seciton have defaults that provide correct operation. Please remove this section from your config.ini file. In some
VERY special cases IBS Engineering may ask that one or more of the parameters be restored to the config.ini file.
[SERIAL_OUT<serial index>] (version implemented in Build 66)
Define message information for a serial communication port. A [SERIAL_OUT<serial index>] block must be defined for any
SERIAL_OUT<serial index> used in a [COMPORTS.<process>@<node>] block. (See the SERIAL_OUT<serial index>
reference in the example above for a [COMPORTS.<process>@<node>] block).
NOTE: This version of SERIAL_OUT was implemented in version 66. The previous version implemented in Build 55 had
limited capability and was configured in a slightly different way. If it is necessary to configure SERIAL_OUT in version 55,
please contact SMI IBS engineering at the Charlottesville, Virginia, U.S.A. location.
Definition syntax:
BASE_PERIOD=<send rate, (seconds)>

periodic rate of the message sending task
Ex. BASE_PERIOD=0.5 for a 2Hz task,

BASE_PERIOD=2.0 for a 0.5Hz task
NOTE: BASERATE was changed to BASE_PERIOD in Build 93.
MSGOUT<message index>=<type of NMEA message to send>,

<send rate, (seconds)>,
<PNT message type>,
<PNT message type index>
<message index>
index of message being defined
<send rate, (seconds)>
periodic rate at which the defined message will be sent
(Refer to the example included with the <send rate> definition for BASE_PERIOD
above).
<PNT message type>
type of PNT message to send
Include this parameter only when <NMEA message type>=PNT.
<PNT message type index>
index for the type of PNT message to send
Include this parameter only when <NMEA message type>=PNT.
Ex. [SERIAL_OUT1]
BASE_PERIOD=1.0
MSGOUT1=DBT,1.0
MSGOUT2=GGA,2.0
MSGOUT3=STA,3.0
MSGOUT4=HDT,1.0
MSGOUT5=PNT,10.0,R1ANG,1
[SHARES@node}
Defines shared resources that are to be made available to another node.
<shareName>=<path>,<access>
<shareName> is the shared resource name that will be seen by other nodes
<path> is the path to the resource to be shared
<access> is the access rights to the resource {FULL}
NOTE: Please see the section [CONNECTIONS] and Appendix D for related information.

[SPEED_CONTROL]
Define various control items for a SPEED CONTROL. NOTE: See related section [SPEED_CONTROL_LDHx].
Please see APPENDIX G for general information relating to speed control configuration.
Definition syntax:
ENABLED=<status>
<status>
allows or inhibits speed control operation
{ON, OFF}
MANUAL_SPEED=<status>
<status>
allows/inhibits a manual speed control user interface function.
{ON, OFF.}
TC_SHIP_SPEED=<tc ship>
<tc ship>
time constant (seconds) used in filtering ownship speed. Default = 10.
{4 to 40}
TC_SPEED_ADVANCE=<tca advance>
<tcs advance>
time constant (seconds) used in filtering speed of advance. Default = 300.
{60 to 2400}.
TC_ORDERED_SPEED=<tc order>
<tc order>
time constant (seconds) used in computing and filtering ordered speed integrator. Default
= 600.
{150 to 2400}
MIN_SPEED=<min speed>
<min speed>
minimum ownship speed for speed control. Units M/S. Default = 5.14 (10 knots).
{0.514 to10.28 (1 to 20 KTS)}

MAX_SPEED=<max speed>
<max speed>
maximum ownship speed for speed control. Units M/S. Default = 27.5 (50 knots).
{0.514 to 50.87 (1 to 99 KTS)}
ACCEL_LIMIT=<acc lim>
<acc lim>
maximum change in speed allowed. Units M/S/MINUTE. Default = 1.03 (2 knots).
{0.257-20.56 (0.5-40 KTS/MINUTE)}
SAF_HOLD_TIME=<hold time>
<hold time>
time from end of voyage when speed will not be adjusted by control system. Units
HOURS. Default = 0.5.
{0.25 to 2.0}
USE_SHIP_SPEED=<speed status>
<speed status>
controls whether Ship Speed is to be used in calculation of Speed of Advance.
{ON, OFF}
Ex. [SPEED_CONTROL]
ENABLED=ON
MANUAL_SPEED=OFF
TC_SHIP_SPEED=10
TC_SPEED_ADVANCE=300
TC_ORDERED_SPEED=600
MIN_SPEED=2
MAX_SPEED=25
ACCEL_LIMIT=19
SAF_HOLD_TIME=0.25
USE_SHIP_SPEED=ON
[SPEED_CONTROL_LDHx]
Defines a speed control device handler (LDH). A configuration file may have one or more of these sections. The first
section will be [SPEED_CONTROL_LDH1], the second [SPEED_CONTROL_LDH2], etc. Multiple LDHs per
node are allowed. NOTE: See related section [SPEED_CONTROL]. Please see APPENDIX G for general
information relating to speed control configuration.
Definition Syntax:

NODE=<process>@<node>
<process>
the process that will handle the speed control (normally VMS)
<node>
the node that will handle the speed control
TYPE=<control type>
<control type>
the specific type of speed control device.
{KAMEWA_OLD, KAMEWA_NEW.}
BOARD_ID=<board>
<board>
selects the DAS-1602 board.
{0, 1}
CONTROL_AVAIL_CHANNEL=<avail channel>
<avail channel>
selects digital channel for available signal.
{0,1,2,3}
CONTROL_AVAIL_SENSE=<avail sense>
<avail sense>
selects polarity for the signal active state.
{0, 1}
CONTROL_REQUEST_CHANNEL=<request channel>
<request channel>
selects digital channel for request signal.
{0, 1, 2, 3}
CONTROL_REQUEST_SENSE=<request sense>
<request sense>
selects polarity for the signal active state.

{0, 1}
CONTROL_GRANT_CHANNEL=<grant channel>
<grant channel>
selects digital channel for grant signal.
{0,1,2,3}
CONTROL_GRANT_SENSE=<grant sense>
<grant sense>
selects polarity for signal active state.
{0, 1}
LDH_SELECTED_CHANNEL=<selected channel>
<selected channel>
selects digital channel to be used to indicate which LDH is in control. External logic must
be provided to activate only one LDH.
LDH_SELECTED_SENSE=<selectedt sense>
<selected sense>
selects polarity for signal active state.
{0, 1}
ORDER_CHANNEL=<order channel>
<order channel>
selects the analog channel for the order signal.
{0, 1}
ORDER_CAL_FULL_LOAD=
<speed 1>,<volts 1>,<speed 2>,<volts 2>. . . <speed n>,<volts n>
ORDER_CAL_FULL_LOAD is a table for mapping ordered speed (M/S) to volts when the ship is
loaded. The mapping table is comprised of ordered pairs representing a piecewise linear curve fit.
e.g. <speed 1> will be ordered with <volts 1> volts, <speed 2> will be ordered with <volts 2> volts.
While the actual number of speed/volts pairs is almost unlimited, there is rerely need for more than 4
or 5 pairs.
ORDER_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD=
<speed 1>,<volts 1>,<speed 2>,<volts 2>. . . <speed n>,<volts n>
ORDER_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD is a table for mapping ordered speed (M/S) to volts when the ship is
light. The mapping table is comprised of ordered pairs representing a piecewise linear curve fit. e.g.
<speed 1> will be ordered with <volts 1> volts, <speed 2> will be ordered with <volts 2> volts.

While the actual number of speed/volts pairs is almost unlimited, there is rerely need for more than 4
or 5 pairs.
MANUAL_OVERRIDE_CHANNEL=<override channel>
<override channel>
selects digital channel for named signal (used only when TYPE=KAMEWA_OLD)
{0, 1, 2, 3}
MANUAL_OVERRIDE_SENSE=<override sense>
<override sense>
selects polarity for the signal active state (used only when TYPE=KAMEWA_OLD)
{(0, 1}
FUEL_CHANNEL=<fuel channel>
<fuel channel>
selects the analog channel for fuel signal (used only when TYPE=KAMEWA_OLD)
FUEL_CAL=<volts 1>,<fuel 1>,<volts 2>,<fuel 2>,...<volts n>,<fuel n>
FUEL_CAL is a table for mapping fuel consumption (volts) to liters/hour. See SPEED_CAL for
format (used only when TYPE=KAMEWA_OLD)
THROTTLE_CHANNEL=<throttle channel>
<throttle channel>
selects analog channel for the throttle signal (used only when TYPE=KAMEWA_NEW)
{0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15}
PROP_PITCH_CHANNEL=<pitch channel>
<pitch channel>
selects analog channel for the PITCH signal (used only when TYPE=KAMEWA_NEW)
{0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15}
RPM_CHANNEL=<rpm channel>
<rpm channel>
selects analog channel for the RPM signal (used only when TYPE=KAMEWA_NEW)

{0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15}
THROTTLE_CAL_FULL_LOAD=<volts 1>,<speed 1>,<volts 2>,<speed 2>,. . . <volts n><speed n>
THROTTLE_CAL_FULL_LOAD is a table for mapping throttle (volts) to speed (M/S) when the ship
is loades. See SPEED_CAL for format (used only when TYPE=KAMEWA_NEW)
THROTTLE_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD=<volts 1>,<speed 1>,<volts 2>,<speed 2>,. . . <volts n><speed n>
THROTTLE_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD is a table for mapping throttle (volts) to speed (M/S) when the
ship is light. See SPEED_CAL for format (used only when TYPE=KAMEWA_NEW)
PROP_PITCH_CAL=<volts1>,<power1>,<volts2>,<power2>... <voltsn>,<powern>
PITCH_CAL is a table for mapping prop pitch (volts) to power (%, expressed as a decimal number in
the range of 0.0 to 1.0).
RPM_CAL=<volts 1>,<rpm 1>, <volts 2>,<rpm 2>,... <volts n>,<rpm n>
RPM_CAL is a table for mapping rpm (volts) to rpms. See SPEED_CAL for format (used only when
TYPE=KAMEWA_NEW)
THROTTLE_SPEED_TOLERANCE=<speed tolerance>
<speed tolerance>
throttle must follow speed order within this tolerance (M/S) to prevent manual override.
Used only when TYPE=KAMEWA_NEW)
THROTTLE_TIME_TOLERANCE=<time tolerance>
<time tolerance>
throttle must follow speed order within this tolerance (SECONDS) to prevent manual override. Used
only when TYPE=KAMEWA_NEW)
SIMULATION=<sim status>
<sim status>
selects interface to Kamewa simulator or to actual Kamewa hardware.
{ON, OFF}
Ex. [SPEED_CONTROL_LDH1]
NODE=VMS@vms-1
TYPE=KAMEWA_NEW
BOARD_ID=0
CONTROL_AVAIL_CHANNEL=0
CONTROL_AVAIL_SENSE=1
CONTROL_REQUEST_CHANNEL=0
CONTROL_REQUEST_SENSE=1
CONTROL_GRANT_CHANNEL=1
CONTROL_GRANT_SENSE=1

LDH_SELECTED_CHANNEL=2
LDH_SELECTED_SENSE=1
ORDER_CHANNEL=1
ORDER_CAL_FULL_LOAD=0,0,25,5
ORDER_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD=0,0,5,0.5,25,4.5
MANUAL_OVERRIDE_CHANNEL=3
MANUAL_OVERRIDE_SENSE=1
FUEL_CHANNEL=0
FUEL_CAL=0,1000,5,0
THROTTLE_CHANNEL=0
THROTTLE_CAL_FULL_LOAD=0,25,0.15,20,0.3,16,0.625,12,1.1,8,2.2,4,5,0
THROTTLE_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD=0,25,0.15,20,0.3,16,0.625,12,1.1,8,2.2,4,5,0
PROP_PITCH_CHANNEL=1
PROP_PITCH_CAL=0,0,5,1
RPM_CHANNEL=2
RPM_CAL=0,0,5,800
THROTTLE_SPEED_TOLERANCE=0.25
THROTTLE_TIME_TOLERANCE=3.0
SIMULATION=OFF
[TOUCH_SCREEN@node] (implemented in Build 163.17, @node added in Build 225)
Enables touch screen calibration from within VMS-VT. A Touch Screen button will appear on the System Menu that
allows the user to calibrate the touchscreen from within VMS-VT. This feature is available in VMS-VT build 163.17
and later.
NOTE: This feature will not work and may crash VMS-VT unless the Microtouch touch screen driver has
been installed. Please refer to 03956-1813232 "Microtouch Touch Screen Driver" for more information.
Definition syntax:
TOUCHCAL=<path>\winpanel /c
<path> is the path to the winpanel.exe. Normally this will be c:\mtsnt. The /c switch starts winpanel
in the calibration mode and is required for proper operation of the touch screen from VMS-VT.
Ex.
[TOUCH_SCREEN]
TOUCHCAL=c:\mtsnt\winpanel /c
[USER_INTERFACE@node]
Set the type of user interface on a specific node.
Definition syntax:
STYLE=<user interface type>
{CSD,VMS, PLANNING}
CSD=Dedicated CID like display
VMS=Standard VMS style display screens
PLANNING=Planning station (digitizer, etc)

Ex. [USER_INTERFACE@vms-6]
STYLE=VMS
[VIDEO]
Enable the video window.
INSTALLED=<video status>
{TRUE, FALSE}
Ex. [VIDEO]
INSTALLED=TRUE
NOTE: Special hardware is required to make the Video Window work with VMS-VT.
[VIGILANCE_MON]
Control the vigilance monitor. To have this feature, ENABLED must be present and TRUE. Timeouts are optional:
period of questions (minutes), time allowed after reject (minutes) and time before question after operator failure
(seconds) The operator will be questioned every PERIOD_MINUTES minutes and may delay the answer two times
for REJECT_MINUTES minutes each time. If the operator fails the test the VIGILANCE alarm will be sounded and
the operator will be questioned every RESTORE_SECONDS until a question is answered correctly.
Definition syntax:
ENABLED=<vigilance monitor status>
{TRUE, FALSE}
PERIOD_MINUTES=<period, (minutes)>
The time between questions.
REJECT_MINUTES=<reject interval, (minutes)>
The time that a question may be postponed by the operator.
RESTORE_SECONDS=<restore interval, (seconds)>
The time between questions after an operator has failed the test.
Ex. [VIGILANCE_MON]
ENABLED=TRUE
PERIOD_MINUTES=35.0
REJECT_MINUTES=5.0
RESTORE_SECONDS=5.0
[VMS_SECURITY_DATA@node]
Provide information about the security block.
Definition syntax:
security_block=<block type>
{SSI,NONE}

timeout=<seconds>
The number of seconds required to timeout the security block
period=<seconds>
The number of seconds between security block reads.
Ex. [VMS_SECURITY_DATA@vms-1]
security_block=SSI
timeout=3600
period=600
NOTE: If a security block is present on one node of a system and not present on other nodes then the node with the
security block muse have [VMS_SECURITY_DATA] with security_block=SSI and all other nodes must have
[VMS_SECUTIRY_DATA] with security_block=NONE.
Ex. If vms-1 has the block and vms-2 does not:
[VMS_SECURITY_DATA@vms-1]
security_block=SSI
timeout=3600
period=600
[VMS_SECURITY_DATA@vms-2]
security_block=NONE
timeout=3600
period=600
[VOYAGE_PLAN]
Define the voyage plan parameters.
Definition syntax:
APPROACH_SECONDS=<pre-wheel over approach point time, (seconds)>
time in seconds prior to the wheel over point that the APPROACHING TURN WARNING is
announced.
PATH=<location of the VMS-VT voyage plan files>
TRACK_ADVANCE_METERS=<change course order distance, (meters)>
distance prior to the wheel over point that the change course order is given to the autopilot
This advance allows the ship to correctly enter the turn even with some delay in the pilot and
hydraulics. NOTE: this method of setting track advance can be used in builds prior to
BUILD 136. For BUILD 136 and later please see the [AUTOPILOT] section.
TURN_RATE=<default turn rate to be used in voyage plan turns, (radians/seconds)>
NOTE: To convert a value x in degrees/minute (deg/min) to its corresponding value in

radians/seconds (rad/s), divide x by the constant 3437.747.
Ex. (60 deg/min) / 3437.747 = 0.0175 rad/s

(0.1 rad/s) * 3437.747 = 343.77 deg/min
WARNING_SECONDS=<pre-wheel over warning point time, (seconds)>
time interval prior to the wheel over point that the ADVANCED APPROACH WARNING is
issued
Ex. [VOYAGE_PLAN]
PATH=.\plans
WARNING_SECONDS=300.0
APPROACH_SECONDS=60.0
TRACK_ADVANCE_METERS=180.0
TURN_RATE=0.01

APPENDIX A
config.ini EXAMPLE
[NOTES]
VERSION=1
[ARCS_CHARTS@vms-1]
storage=c:\charts\arcs\cd1,d:
rootDir=charts\arcs
[NOAA_RASTER_CHARTS@vms-1]
storage=d:,r:
[NOAA_RASTER_CHARTS@vms-2]
storage=d:,r:
[CHART_CATALOG@vms-1]
LOCATION=catalog
[CONNECTIONS@vms-1]
r:=vms-2,cdrom
[CONNECTIONS@vms-2]
r:=vms-2,cdrom
s:=vms-2,vms
[SHARES@vms-2]
cdrom=d:\,FULL
[SHARES@vms-1]
vms=c:\users\install,FULL
[PORTFOLIO_MANAGER@vms-1]
LOCATION=folios
LOCATION=s:\folios
LOCATION=catalog
LOCATION=catalog
[LINKS.VMS]
PORT=5000
1=vms-1,5000
2=vms-2,5000
3=vms-3,5000
4=vms-4,5000
5=vms-5,5000

6=vms-6,5000
COM1=4800,0,0,8,0,NMEA
COM2=4800,0,0,8,0,BEEPER
COM3=4800,0,0,8,0,AUTOPILOT
COM4=2400,0,0,8,0,DIGITIZER
COM5=2400,0,0,8,0,PLOTTER
COM2=1200,0,0,8,0,UPS
COM3=4800,0,0,8,0,NMEA
COM4=4800,0,0,8,0,MARCONI
COM7=4800,0,0,8,0,NMEA
COM8=4800,0,0,8,0,NMEA
COM9=4800,0,0,8,0,NMEA
[COMPORTS.TC@vms-5]
COM4=4800,0,0,8,0,TARGET
COM5=4800,0,0,8,0,TARGET
COM2=4800,0,0,8,0,PULSELOG
COM3=2400,0,0,8,0,NAVLINES
COM5=2400,0,0,8,0,NAVLINES
COM6=4800,0,0,8,0,TARGET
COM7=4800,0,0,8,0,NMEA
COM8=4800,0,0,8,0,NMEA
COM9=4800,0,0,8,0,NMEA
COM10=4800,0,0,8,0,TARGET
[SERIAL_OUT1]
BASE_PERIOD=1.0
MSGOUT1=DBT,1.0
MSGOUT2=GGA,2.0
MSGOUT3=STA,3.0
MSGOUT4=HDT,1.0
MSGOUT5=PNT,10.0,R1ANG,1
[SERIAL_OUT2]
BASE_PERIOD=0.5
MSGOUT1=VBW,1.0
MSGOUT2=HDT,4.0

[AUTOPILOT]
TYPE=ADG6000
;BASE_PERIOD=0.125
GAIN_SET1=SET 1, dGPS1, GPS1, 180
dGPS1= 0.13, 0.0006, -0.8, 0.255, 0.000, -1.6, 600,10
GPS1= 0.07, 0.0003, -0.4, 0.13, 0.000, -1.0, 600,10
dGPS2= 0.07, 0.0003, -0.4, 0.13, 0.000, -1.0, 800,10
GPS2= 0.03, 0.00001, -0.2, 0.05, 0.000, -0.5, 800,10
dGPS3= 0.02, 0.0000, -0.2, 0.03, 0.000, -0.5, 1000,10
GPS3= 0.02, 0.0001, -0.2, 0.03, 0.000, -0.5, 1000,10
LDH_PERIOD_SECONDS=1.0
PERIOD_SECONDS=1
[VOYAGE_PLAN]
PATH=.\plans
WARNING_SECONDS=300.0
APPROACH_SECONDS=60.0
TRACK_ADVANCE_METERS=180.0
TURN_RATE=0.01
[FILE_MANAGER]
2=vms-1,c:,users\install
3=Drive A,A:,\
[CHART_MANAGER]
PATH=.\charts
[OWNSHIP]
NAME=PC Ships
LENGTH=50.0
BEAM=10.0
MAXSPD=20.0
MAXTURNRATE=0.1
MINTURNRADIUS=400.0
MAXDEEPDRAFT=5.0
DNV_WATCH1=FALSE
SENSOR_TIMEOUT_SECONDS=30.0
[VIGILANCE_MON]
ENABLED=TRUE
PERIOD_MINUTES=35.0
REJECT_MINUTES=5.0
RESTORE_SECONDS=5.0
[KEYBOARD]
INSTALLED = FALSE
[COURSE_MANAGER]

[DATA_LOG]
PATH=.\logs
PERIOD=15.0
[DEPTH_MANAGER]
1=DEPTH,VMS@vms-3,NMEA,3,0,0,SDDBT
2=MARCONI,VMS@vms-3,MARCONI,4,0,0
[ENGINEPOINT_MANAGER]
1=GEN1_POWR, VMS@vms-1,NMEA,1,ERPNT,1,1.0,0.0,1.0
5=OIL_PRESS, VMS@vms-1,NMEA,1,ERPNT,5,1.0,0.0,0.6894757
[GROUNDSPEED_MANAGER]
[HEADING_MANAGER]
3=GYRO,VMS@vms-1,NMEA,6,0,0,HEHDT
[HUMIDITY_MANAGER]
[NAVLINES_MANAGER]
PATH=.\navlines
1=RASCAR_PORT,VMS@vms-6
2=RASCAR_STBD,VMS@vms-6
[POSITION_MANAGER]
[PRESSURE_MANAGER]
1=PUMP1,VMS@vms-1,NMEA,1,0,0,GPVTG
[SETDRIFT_MANAGER]
3=COMPUTED,VMS,COMPUTED,COMPUTED,0,0
[TARGET_MANAGER]
CORRELATOR=TARGET CORRELATOR,VMS@vms-1
LOST_PERIOD=15.0
DROP_PERIOD=30.0
UPDATE_PERIOD=5.0

DELTA_POSITION=500.0
C_FACTOR=1.1
DELTA_VELOCITY=1.0
1=RASCAR_PORT,TC@vms-5,TARGET,4,0,0,5,16,4,1,RASCAR_PORT
2=RASCAR_STBD,TC@vms-5,TARGET,5,0,0,5,16,2,1,RASCAR_STBD
5=GPS_TARGETS,VMS@vms-6,TARGET,1,0,0,1,120,8,1,GPS Targets
[TEMPERATURE_MANAGER]
1=THERMO1,VMS@vms-1,NMEA,1,0,0,GPVTG
[WATERSPEED_MANAGER]
[WIND_MANAGER]
[VIDEO]
INSTALLED=TRUE
[EXTERNAL_ALARMS@vms-1]
PULSE_DURATION=0.5
FAILURE_UPDATE=1.0
WARNING_UPDATE=1.0
WARNING_TIMEOUT=1.0
FITNESS_UPDATE=1.0
FITNESS_TIMEOUT=600.0
FITNESS=COM4,DTR,HIGH
FAILURE=COM4,RTS,HIGH
WARNING=COM5,RTS,LOW
[SPEED_CONTROL]
ENABLED=ON
MANUAL_SPEED=OFF
TC_SHIP_SPEED=10
TC_SPEED_ADVANCE=300
TC_ORDERED_SPEED=600
MIN_SPEED=2
MAX_SPEED=25
ACCEL_LIMIT=19
SAF_HOLD_TIME=0.25
USE_SHIP_SPEED=ON
[SPEED_CONTROL_LDH1]
NODE=VMS@vms-1
TYPE=KAMEWA_NEW
BOARD_ID=0
CONTROL_AVAIL_CHANNEL=0
CONTROL_AVAIL_SENSE=1
CONTROL_REQUEST_CHANNEL=0
CONTROL_REQUEST_SENSE=1
CONTROL_GRANT_CHANNEL=1

CONTROL_GRANT_SENSE=1
LDH_SELECTED_CHANNEL=2
LDH_SELECTED_SENSE=1
ORDER_CHANNEL=1
ORDER_CAL_FULL_LOAD=0,0,25,5
ORDER_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD=0,0,5,0.5,25,4.5
MANUAL_OVERRIDE_CHANNEL=3
MANUAL_OVERRIDE_SENSE=1
FUEL_CHANNEL=0
FUEL_CAL=0,1000,5,0
THROTTLE_CHANNEL=0
THROTTLE_CAL_FULL_LOAD=0,25,0.15,20,0.3,16,0.625,12,1.1,8,2.2,4,5,0
THROTTLE_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD=0,25,0.15,20,0.3,16,0.625,12,1.1,8,2.2,4,5,0
PROP_PITCH_CHANNEL=1
PROP_PITCH_CAL=0,0,5,1
RPM_CHANNEL=2
RPM_CAL=0,0,5,800
THROTTLE_SPEED_TOLERANCE=0.25
THROTTLE_TIME_TOLERANCE=3.0
SIMULATION=OFF
[USER_INTERFACE@vms-6]
STYLE=VMS
[SEA_PAGES]
CID=CONNING INFORMATION DISPLAY
CURRENT=SET AND DRIFT,POPUP,0.3,0.4
[CURRENT]
INTERACTIVE=FALSE
GRID_COLUMNS=1
GRID_ROWS=1
WIND=1,1,1,1,TRUE,FALSE,TWSPD,TWSPDSTAT,TWDIR,TWDIRSTAT,TSDMAG,TSDMAGSTAT,TSDDIR,TSDDIR
STAT,TSDSEN,TSDSENSTAT
[CID]
INTERACTIVE=FALSE
GRID_COLUMNS=20
GRID_ROWS=40
; column1
WIND=1,1,14,5,TRUE,FALSE,TWSPD,TWSPDSTAT,TWDIR,TWDIRSTAT,TSDMAG,TSDMAGSTAT,TSDDIR,TSDDI
RSTAT,TSDSEN,TSDSENSTAT
LABEL=16,3,17,4,ENGINE
GVSPNL=18,1,32,3,PITCH %,-99.9,99.9,BOTTOM,20,10,20,FALSE,3,0,0, 1,1,FALSE,S2RPM,S2RPMSTAT
GVSPNL=18,4,32,6,RPM,-200,200,BOTTOM,40,20,40,FALSE,3,0,0,1,1,FALSE,S2RPM,S2RPMSTAT
FPNLWU=35,1,37,5,FUEL,LEFT,Flow,9999,0.1,FALSE,FUELCON,FUELCONSTAT
LOCALTIME=39,1,40,5
;column 2
;HEADING=1,7,5,14,HEADING,HEADINGSTAT,HEADINGSEN,HEADINGSENSTAT

FPNL=1,7,2,12,HDG,LEFT,ACT,3,0,0,57.2975,FALSE,HEADING,HEADINGSTAT
HSCALE=3,7,5,14,-100,100,LEFT,20,10,20,BOTH,FALSE,57.2975,0.03491,HEADING,HEADINGSTAT
FPNL=6,7,7,12,HDG,LEFT,ORD,3,0,0,57.2975,FALSE,HDGORD,HDGORDSTAT
;OCPNL=7,7,11,14,Rate Of Turn,D/M,-40.0,40.0,LEFT,10,5,10,FALSE, 3,0,1,3439.49,1,TURNRATE, TURNRATESTAT
FPNL=9,7,10,12,ROT,LEFT,D/M,3,0,0,3439.49,FALSE,TURNRATE,TURNRATESTAT
HSCALE=11,7,13,14,-100,100,LEFT,20,10,20,BOTH,FALSE,3439.49,1,TURNRATE,TURNRATESTAT
FPNL=14,7,15,12,ROT,LEFT,ORD,3,0,0,3439.49,FALSE,TURNRATE,TURNRATESTAT
;GHSPNL=13,8,18,13,BOW THRUSTER,-99.9,99.9,LEFT,20,5,20,BOTTOM,
FALSE,3,0,0,1,1,FALSE,S1RPM,S1RPMSTAT
FPNL=17,7,18,12,BOW,LEFT,THR,3,0,0,1,FALSE,S1RPM,S1RPMSTAT
HSCALE=19,8,20,13,-99.9,99.9,LEFT,25,5,25,BOTTOM,FALSE,1,1,S1RPM,S1RPMSTAT
FPNLWU=22,9,24,12,DEPTH,LEFT,Depth,1000,0.1,FALSE,DEPTH,DEPTHSTAT
;LABEL=22,10,23,11,SPEED
FAPNLWU=26,8,30,10,WATER,BOTTOM,Sea Speed,51,0.0514,VERTICAL,
TOPRIGHT,FALSE,WTRSPD,WTRSPDSTAT
FAPNLWU=26,11,30,13,GROUND,BOTTOM,Sea Speed,51,0.0514,VERTICAL, TOPRIGHT,FALSE,GSPD,GSPDSTAT
;GHSPNL=29,8,34,13,STERN THRUSTER,-99.9,99.9,LEFT,20,10,20,
BOTTOM,FALSE,3,0,0,1,1,FALSE,S2RPM,S2RPMSTAT
FPNL=32,7,33,12,STN,LEFT,THR,3,0,0,1,FALSE,S2RPM,S2RPMSTAT
HSCALE=34,8,35,13,-99.9,99.9,LEFT,25,5,25,BOTTOM,FALSE,1,1,S2RPM,S2RPMSTAT
;GHSPNL=35,8,40,13,RUDDER,-45,45,LEFT,10,5,10,BOTTOM,FALSE,3,0,0,57.2975,0.03491,FALSE,R1ANG,R1ANGS
TAT
;GSSPNL=34,6,40,15,RUDDER,-45,45,COUNTERCLOCKWISE,45,5,10,FALSE,3,0,0,57.2975,0.03491,FALSE,R1ANG,R
1ANGSTAT
FPNL=37,7,38,12,RUD,LEFT,ACT,3,0,0,57.2975,FALSE,HEADING,HEADINGSTAT
HSCALE=39,8,40,13,-45,45,LEFT,15,5,15,BOTTOM,FALSE,57.2975,0.03491,R1ANG,R1ANGSTAT
;column 3
WIND=1,16,14,20,FALSE,FALSE,RWSPD,RWSPDSTAT,RWDIR,RWDIRSTAT,RSDMAG,RSDMAGSTAT,RSDDIR,RS
DDIRSTAT,RSDSEN,RSDSENSTAT
LABEL=16,16,18,20,VOYAGE PLAN
TXTPNL=20,16,21,20,WPT,LEFT,FALSE,WAYPOINT,WAYPOINTSTAT
FPNL=22,16,23,20,BRG,LEFT,Deg,3,0,0,57.2975,FALSE,WPTBEARING,WPTBEARINGSTAT

FPNLWU=24,16,25,20,DIST,LEFT,Long Distance,99999,1,FALSE,WPTDTG, WPTDTGSTAT
FPNLWU=26,16,27,20,RAD,LEFT,Long Distance,99999,1,FALSE,TURNRAD, TURNRADSTAT
LABEL=29,16,30,20,FINAL
FPNLWU=32,16,33,20,DIST,LEFT,Long Distance,99999,1,FALSE, WPTDTG,WPTDTGSTAT
TIME=34,16,35,20,ETA,LEFT, ,FALSE,WPTETA,WPTETASTAT
DATE=36,16,37,20,ETA,LEFT, ,FALSE,WPTETA,WPTETASTAT

APPENDIX B
Track Keeping and the PID Controller
The VMS-VT provides the capability to control an autopilot and guide the ship along a predetermined track on the earth (the
Voyage Plan). Because it is not generally understood how the orders to the autopilot are developed this paper will attempt to
provide a relatively simple description of that process. This will not be an analysis of the track controller, but a general
description of what is going on and how it relates to the Voyage Plan.
When the VMS-VT is controlling the track of the ship the position sensors are providing the shp's position and the heading and
speed sensors are providing the ship's velocity vector. The Cross Track Error (XTE) or distance of the ship to the left or right
of the track line is computed. This XTE is filtered to remove some noise and is used to compute the correction that will be
applied to the heading order to keep the ship on the track line. That is, if the ship is to the right of the track line then the ship
will be ordered to turn to a heading that is less than the direction of the track line. This seems simple enough, but if this
proportional (i.e., heading correction is proportional to the distance off the track line) correction were the only adjustment the
steering of the ship would be very poor.
The computation of the heading correction is in three parts. A proportional part that reacts to the distance that the ship is off
track. An integral part that reacts to the length of time that the ship has been off track. A derivative part that reacts to the rate at
which the ships is moving toward or away from the track. Each of these parts of the track keeping algorithm contribute some of
the heading correction.
The proportional part is the primary correction of the heading to make the ship move back to the track line. However, in some
situations this correction may not be sufficient to keep the ship on the track line. If there is a current that is pushing the ship off
the track line then this correction alone will steer a course that is parallel to the desired track line. Also, this correction alone
may be unstable, causing the ship to move back and forth across the track line.
The integral will provide a correction to the heading that will move the ship back to the track line even if a current is pushing it
off the line. This correction will be applied even if the VMS-VT has no direct knowledge of the current. The integral
correction is computed from the length of time that the ship is off track. Eventually this correction will be sufficient to move the
ship back to the track. Unfortunately, this correction may also make the motion of the ship somewhat unstable. Again the ship
may move back and forth across the track line.
The derivative will provide a correction that is computed from the speed at which the ship is moving toward the track line. That
is, if the ship is rapidly approaching the track line the derivative correction is large and if the ship is slowly approaching the
track the derivative correction is small. In addition, this correction is applied in a negative sense. This means that if the ship is
approaching the track line then this correction will try to slow the approach. If the ship is going away from the track line this
correction will try to bring it back. This provides stability to the track keeping process.
Each of these corrections is applied to the adjustment of the ship's heading in adjustable amounts. The adjustment of the
correction computed by each part is called the gain. Some ships may require a lot of proportional and less derivative correction
of gain. Another ship may require a different set of gains. In addition, different operation goals may require gain settings. That
is, operation in the open ocean does not demand extremely accurate control to a track line and one gain set may be used. This
would reduce rudder activity, but the ship would not stay as close to the track line. That is, the reduced rudder activity may
result in larger cross track errors or a longer time required to return to track. Operation in an extremely restricted area where
the ship must stay very close to the track line, even at the expense of additional rudder activity, will require another set of gains.
The VMS-VT allows the operator to choose from a number of these gain sets and therefore to match the control of the ship to
the operational goals. Please note, the operator can select from a list of gain sets, but only a qualified Sperry field service
technician can create the gain sets.
If you look back to the paragraph that discussed the integral part of the heading correction you will notice that the track control
adjusts for current pushing the ship off the track line even if the VMS-VT has no direct knowledge of that current. This is true,
but it is not the best way to correct for current. Every time the ship makes a waypoint turn the integral part of the heading
correction that is caused by a current must be recompute. This computation takes a period of time and during this time the ship
may be slightly off track. As the integral correction is computed the ship will move back to the track line. If the VMS-VT has
an accurate source of current then this information can be used to compute a correction to the heading. This correction is
computed as soon as the current information is available and is periodically recomputed.

There is an important difference between the VMS-VT and the previous VMS products. The VMS-VT is always working with
a track line. In the previous VMS products there were times when it was not clear to the operator what track the ship would
follow. This was true when the ship was doing a Return to Plan, when the plan was starting and when the operator chose
Waypoint mode. In the VMS-VT if the system is controlling the ship then there is a track line displayed on chart and the ship is
being moved to that track line. When the plan is started the system provides a track line that will put the ship on the voyage
plan. The operator can change the point at which the ship will join the voyage plan, the rate of turn (or radius) that will be used
to make the turns to the plan or even add temporary waypoints to adjust the way that the ship enters the voyage plan. The
operator is always aware of the path that the ship will follow.
In the previous VMS products the operator could skip a waypoint and "cut the corner" of a voyage plan. While VMS-VT
provides no direct way to select a new waypoint or to skip a waypoint this can be done in a much method. Instead of just
ordering the ship to a waypoint with no track line the operator just designates the point on the plan that the ship should join the
plan. This point could be a waypoint or any other point on the plan. A track line is displayed that shows where the ship will
sail. This "cutting of the corner" may be a single line or any number of lines. The operator is always aware of where the ship is
going.
Several safety features are provided in the VMS-VT to ensure that the ship is on the track and is actually under control:
- If the autopilot is made by Sperry then the system requires that communication be maintained while the VMS-VT is in
control.
- If the Sperry autopilot does not get messages from the VMS-VT an alarm will sound.
- If the VMS-VT does not get messages from the Sperry autopilot an alarm will sound.
- If the cross track error gets to be greater than an operator selectable limit an alarm will sound.
- If the track controller is unable to return the ship to the track then the track controller will stop controlling, sound an
alarm. This will happen if the cross track error grows greater than a configurable limit. This limit is part of the gain
sets discussed above and may be small if very accurate control is required or large if larger errors can be tolerated. If
this limit is exceeded it usually indicates that the ship some error has occured and the ship is not really under control of
the VMS. This may be caused by improper tuning of the autopilot or failure of the autopilot.

APPENDIX C
Sensor Offset Coordinate System
The various sensor managers require information about the position of the sensor relative to the ship. This position or offset is
expressed relative to the bow of the ship according to the following coordinate system:
Where :
SENSOR
X is the distance from the center line of the ship to the sensor in meters. X will be positive if the sensor is port of the center line
and negative if the sensor is to the starboard of the center line.
Y is the distance from the bow to the sensor in meters. Y will be positive if the sensor is aft of the bow.
The SENSOR position is the position of the antenna if the device is a position sensor. Proper operation of the track keeping
features of the VMS-VT is not possible unless the sensor offsets are entered properly.

APPENDIX D
HOW TO CONNECT BETWEEN NODES

using Microsoft Windows NT 3.5, VMSTART.BAT, and CONFIG.INI
Part 1, For Build 135 and Earlier

I. Set the PLANNING WORKSTATION drive paths, which will be shared by other workstations, for sharing.
A. Run File Manager on the PLANNING WORKSTATION.
1. Open the Program Manager window.

2. Open the Main window.
3. Select the File Manager icon.
B. Select the drive to be shared by other workstations (e.g. NAVIGATIONAL WORKSTATION).
1. Select the drive to be shared (e.g. C:) from the pull down drive selection box at the upper left area of
the screen directly below the menu bar.
C. Highlight the end of the drive path to be shared which will be the root for sharing.
1. Select the drive path components in order until the end of the path to be shared is highlighted either
in the left or right partition of the drive window.
Ex. If the drive path to be shared is C:\USERS\INSTALL,
a. Select the USERS directory icon.

b. Select the INSTALL directory icon, highlighting it.
D. Set the selected drive path for sharing.
1. Select the Share As icon (the third icon from left to right on the tool bar with a hand that appears to
be extending a folder).
OR
Choose Share As from the Disk pull down menu on the menu bar.
If the drive path to be shared is C:\USERS\INSTALL, the resulting Shared Directory box should
show:
Share Name: as INSTALL

Path: as C:\USERS\INSTALL
2. The defaults should be correct so choose OK.
Note: To be sure the defaults are correct or if sharing is not correctly enabled by the set up procedure
described in this document, check the following settings.
1. User Limit: in the Shared Directory box should be Maximum Allowed.

2. Select the Permissions button in the Shared Directory box.
3. The Name: list in the resulting Access Through Share Permissions box should have an

entry for Everyone.
If the Everyone entry is not in the Name: list:
a. Select the Add button in the Access Through Share Permissions box.
b. Select the Everyone entry in the Names: list of the resulting Add Users and
Groups box, highlighting the Everyone entry.
c. Select the Add button in the Add Users and Groups box.
4. Type of Access: for the Everyone entry should be Full Control.
If Type of Access: for the Everyone entry is not Full Control:
a. Choose Full Control from the Type of Access: pull down selection box.
b. Select the OK button in the Access Through Share Permissions box.
II. Configure all other workstations that share the PLANNING WORKSTATION drive paths set in section I.
A. Run File Manager on the workstation (e.g NAVIGATIONAL WORKSTATION) that will share PLANNING
WORKSTATION drive paths set for sharing in section I.
1. Open the Program Manager window.

2. Open the Main window.
3. Select the File Manager icon.
B. Select the Connect Network Drive icon (the leftmost icon on the tool bar).
OR
Choose Connect Network Drive from the Disk pull down menu on the menu bar.
C. Select the drive to be shared from the Drive: pull down selection box in the resulting Connect Network
Drive box.
Ex. If the drive path to be shared is C:\USERS\INSTALL, choose C: as the Drive:.
D. Enter the drive path to be shared in the Path: text box.
OR
Select the drive path to be shared by selecting the drive path components in order until the end of the path to be
shared is highlighted.
Ex. If the PLANNING WORKSTATION, whose drive path is being shared, is VMS-2 and the PLANNING
WORKSTAION drive path to be shared is C:\USERS\INSTALL,
Enter \\VMS-2\INSTALL in the Path: text box
OR
From the Shared Directories: list selection box,
1. Select Microsoft Windows Network.

2. Select SMARINE.
3. Select VMS-2.
4. Select INSTALL.

E. Make sure the Reconnect at Logon box is checked.

F. Select OK in the Connect Network Drive box.
III. Configure VMSTART.BAT for persistant use of the shared drive paths by the PLANNING WORKSTATION so those
drives are never remapped on the PLANNING WORKSTATION.
A. Add a line according to the following format to VMSTART.BAT:
NET USE <drive name> \<drive path> /PERSISTANT:YES
Ex. If the drive path to be shared is C:\USERS\INSTALL, the following line should be added to
VMSTART.BAT:
NET USE C: \\VMS-1\INSTALL /PERSISTANT:YES
If the connection is being made to allow PLANS, CHARTS, and NAVLINES to be moved between nodes with the VMS-VT
File Manager please read Part 3 of this Appendix.

Part 2, for Build 136 and Later

Beginning with build 136 the way connections between VMS-VT nodes was changed. The NT Filemanager and the NET USE
command are no longer required. All the connection information is contained in the config.ini file. Please refer to [SHARES]
and [CONNECTIONS] section earlier in this document.
The [SHARES] block in the config.ini tells a specific node that the named resource is to be made available to any other node. If
node (VMS-1) has a directory that is to be shared (e.g. c:\users\install) then the config.ini would include the following lines:
[SHARES@VMS-1]
install=c:\users\install,FULL
This information will make directory available to any other node as the SNARE NAME install. A block is required for EVERY
node that will make a directory available to another node.
The [CONNECTIONS] block in the config.ini tells a specific node that it must make a connection to a shared resource on
another node. If a node (VMS-2) needs to use a shared resource on another node (VMS-2, share name install) then the
config.ini would include the following lines:
[CONNECTIONS@VMS-2]
r:=VMS-1,install
This information will make a connection to VMS-1 on the share name install and assign this resource to the drive letter r.
If the connection is being made to allow PLANS, CHARTS, and NAVLINES to be moved between nodes with the VMS-VT
File Manager please read Part 3 of this Appendix.

Part 3, Using FILE_MANAGER in config.ini

Make sure the [FILE_MANAGER] block in CONFIG.INI follows the following format:
[FILE_MANAGER]
<Drive index>=<Drive label>,<Drive name>,<Drive path>
Ex. If the PLANNING WORKSTATION IS VMS-2, and the drive path to be shared is C:\USERS\INSTALL, the
[FILE_MANAGER] block in CONFIG.INI should be defined according to the following example block.
[FILE_MANAGER]
1=Drive A,A:,\
2=VMS-2,C:,\

APPENDIX E
Preventing System Errors in a VMS-VT System Without a Keyboard
If no keyboard is attached to the NT computer when booted, it will complain that there is a keyboard problem by popping up a
service message. To prevent this message do the following in the registry editor (REGEDT32):
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE
SYSTEM
CurrentControlSet
Services
KbdClass
ErrorControl=0
When ErrorControl=0 the NT system will completely ignore the keyboard if it is absent, but will use it if it is present.

APPENDIX F
Access To OSI Weather Routing Software VIA a Novell File Server
1. On the planning station, install the Client Server for Netware

a. Start Control Panel then Network.
b. Click Add Software
c. Select "Client Services for Netware" from the pull down list.
d. Click Continue
e. The system will request files from the NT installation disks (CD or floppy).
2. On the Novell file server

a. You will need a Novell person or familiarity with Novell File servers
b. Have an account made with username vms, password sperry
c. You will need to know the name of the directory that the osi/sperry data is kept. This is in the OSI
installation directions.
d. Ensure that the directory with the osi/sperry voyage plan has read/write access for the sperry user. (On the
APL ships. All users have all rights)
3. Make NT conntecions to the Novell file server
NOTE: Make ALL connections in the vmstart.bat, not with the NT File Manager (otherwise there are
startup timing problems). Add the following line to the vmstart.bat just before the line that starts the vms
program:
net use driveName: \\serverName\shareName
for the APL ships this could look something like
net use o: \\APL-1\OSI /user:vms
4. For Voyage Plan sharing

a. Add a line for the OSI connections in the file manager section of the config.ini for the planning station
This looks something like:
[FILE_MANAGER]
3=OSI,o:,\
5. For navigation data sharing
Currently OSI has not implemented this feature. The VMS software is capable of sending this data. So the serial output
section should be disabled until then.
a. Configure serial outputs in the config.ini
;
; Use this when the OSI software is ready to receive
; it. Make the
; file point to somewhere on the APL Novell network.
;
;[SERIAL_OUT_TO_FILE.VMS@vms-3]
BASE_PERIOD=30
;
; Eg. o:\osi\sperry.dat
;

FILENAME=o:\osi\sperry.dat
MSGOUT1=GLL,30
MSGOUT2=VBW,30
MSGOUT3=HDT,30

APPENDIX G
General Considerations when configuring SPEED CONTROL
1. There are always at least 2 and may be more sections for speed control:
[SPEED_CONTROL] contains general (non-device specific) setup.
[SPEED_CONTROL_LDHx] for each LDH that is to be configured. 'x' must be an integer numbered sequentially,
starting with 1.
2. Speed control function is enabled/disabled using ENABLED=ON/OFF under [SPEED_CONTROL].
3. LDH_SELECTED_CHANNEL and LDH_SELECTED_SENSE configure for an external logic input signal that will tell the
speed control which LDH should be communicating with the speed control device. If only 1 LDH, this signal is not used, so
these can be omitted. This is under [SPEED_CONTROL_LDHx] section.
4. Two calibration data sets for speed order, SPEED_CAL_FULL_LOAD and SPEED_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD, can be
configured for ship loading conditions. Either or both can be provided. In [SPEED_CONTROL_LDHx] section.

Appendix H
Connections to Novell File Servers that have NO Password
Connections to Novell file servers with an account that does not have a password can be tricky.
To do this you have to establish the connection in the batch file that starts the vms. This can be done with a net use command.
Unfortunatly, there is no syntax to support no password. We can fake this, however, by creating a file containing only a blank
line. Do this by running notepad, create a file called blank.txt put an empty line and save the file.
Then you have to add a line in the batch file used to start the vms in order to make the connection. This file is usually named
vmstart.bat or vmsstart.bat. The connection should be made after the sleep and before vms is started.
The line to add looks like this:
net use drive: \\server\share * /user:user < blank.txt
e.g.
net use o: \\apl-korea\vms * /user:vms < blank.txt
The asterisk must be part of the command.
Be sure to remove all connections to the server that are made by the NT file manager! Otherwise you will still get messages on
startup.
Note, this technique can be used for non-blank passwords as well. Just put the right password in the file. Of course this is not
real secure as the password is now readable by anyone who wants it! This technique also works with non-novell connections.

APPENDIX I
General Considerations when Configuring Chart Directories,
Chart Catalog, and Portfolio
With the introduction of the Chart manager with NOAA and ARCS charts in build 136 it became necessary to provide some
additional information to the VMS-VT. The system must know where to find the CD ROM drive or hard drive that holds the
chart files. These drives have become system wide resources. That is, all nodes in the system may read NOAA charts from one
CD ROM drive. In addition, the concept of a CHART CATALOG and a PORTFOLIO MANAGER were introduced. This
Appendix will describe the way in which these features must be configured.
Since it is necessary to make and maintain connections to drives and directories on several computers two new configuration
blocks have been added. These new blocks are [SHARES@node] and [CONNECTIONS@node].
[SHARES@node] allows a specijfic node in a VMS-VT system to make a resource available to other nodes. e.g. vms-1 may
have a CD ROM reader on the local drive letter d: that will be used by other nodes in the system. Before the other nodes can
use this resource vms-1 must share it:
[SHARES@vms-1]
CDROM=d:\,FULL
PERMIT=a:\,FULL
In addition to the entire drive, a directory (and its subdirectories) can be shared. e.g. In addition to the CD ROM reader, vms-1
will share the installation directory so that other nodes can get access to the plans, charts and navlines directories:
[SHARES@vms-1]
CDROM=d:\,FULL
VMS=c:\users\install,FULL
[CONNECTIONS@node] allows a specific note to gain access to a shared resource on a node. e.g. vms-2 may need to access
the CD ROM reader and the installation directory on vms-1. This can be done by:
[CONNECTIONS@vms-2]
r:=vms-1,CDROM
s:=vms-1,VMS
The connection that is made using the SHARES and CONNECTIONS can be used for any purpose that any local (e.g. c:) drive
can be used. e.g. {FILE_MANAGER] connections, [ARCS_CHARTS] connections, [NOAA_RASTER_CHARTS]
connetcions. The following information provides examples of each of these.
[FILE_MANAGER]
The FILE_MANAGER provides a way for one node to access files stored on another node in the VMS-VT system. Assume a
VMS-VT system with two nodes, vms-1 and vms-2. The operator wants to be able to transfer digitized charts, voyage plans,
and Navlines from one node to the other. The following configuration information makes this possible:
In the config.ini for both nodes:
[SHARES@vms-1]
PERMIT=a:\,FULL
[SHARES@vms-2]
[CONNECTIONS@vms-1]
r:=vms-1,VMS
p:=vms-1,PERMIT
[CONNECTIONS@vms-2]
r:=vms-2,VMS

p:=vms-1,PERMIT
In the config.ini for vms-1 add:
[FILE_MANAGER]
1=DRIVE A,a:,\
2=VMS-1,r:,\
[FILE_MANAGER]
1=DRIVE A,a:,\
2=VMS-2,r:,\
The current implementation of [FILE_MANAGER] does not alloow a node name to make the block work for a specific node.
Because of this the different config.ini is required for each node. This may be changed in a future release.
[ARCS_CHARTS]
The ARCS_CHARTS block provides information to locate the source of ARCS charts in the VMS-VT system. Each node must
know the complete path to the CR ROM reader or other drive containing the charts as well as a path to a local directory that is
used by the chart handler. The following configuration is an example of a VMS-VT system with two nodes, vms-1 and vms-2.
Node vms-1 has a CD ROM reader on drive d: This block also privides information about the PERMIT that is required to use
ARCS charts.
[SHARES@vms-1]
CDROM=d:\,FULL
[CONNECTIONS@vms-2]
r:=vms-1,CDROM
[ARCS_CHARTS@vms-1]
storage=d:
rootDir=charts\arcs
permitTransfer=p:
[ARCS_CHARTS@vms-2]
storage=r:
rootDir=charts\arcs
permitTransfer=p:
Notice that vms-1 SHARES the CR ROM drive and that vms-2 connects to that drive using r:. Also notice that the "rootDir" is
a local directory. This directory must always be local. In this case it is a subdirectory of the start up directory.
It is possible to have more than one source of ARCS charts in a system. If the system has two or more CD ROM drives then
any or all of them can supply ARCS charts. Here is a configuration with two nodes, vms-1 and vms-2. Both nodes have CD
ROM drives that will be used for ARCS charts:
[SHARES@vms-1]
CDROM=d:\,FULL
PERMIT=a:\,FULL
[SHARES@vms-12
CDROM=d:\,FULL
[CONNECTIONS@vms-1]
r:=vms-2,CDROM
p:=vms-1,PERMIT
[CONNECTIONS@vms-2]
r:=vms-1,CDROM
p:=vms-1,PERMIT
[ARCS_CHARTS@vms-1]

storage=d:,r:
rootDir=charts\arcs
permitTransfer=p:
[ARCS_CHARTS@vms-2]
storage=d:,r:
rootDir=charts\arcs
permitTransfer=p:
There is another way that this can be configured that requires fewer lines and therefore is somewhat simpler. This is the
preferred configuration:
[SHARES@vms-1]
CDROM=d:\,FULL
PERMIT=a:\,FULL
[SHARES@vms-2]
CDROM=d:\,FULL
[CONNECTIONS]
r:=vms-2,CDROM
s:=vms-1,CDROM
p:vms-1,PERMIT
[ARCS_CHARTS]
storage=r:,s:
rootDir=charts\arcs
permitTransfer=p:
Notice that the [CONNECTIONS] does not have a node name. Every node will process this block and make the connections.
That is, vms-2 will connect to CDROM on vms-1 AND on vms-2 and vms-1 will connect to vms-2 and to itself. With this
change the [ARCS_CHARTS] no longer needs a node name. All nodes look for charts on r: and s:.
[BSB_RASTER_CHARTS]
The BSB section privides information about the location of NOAA and other charts that use the BSB format.
[CHART_CATALOG]
The CHART_CATALOG defines a place for storage of information required for the chart catalog feature. NOTE: This
directory MUST BE ON THE LOCAL HARD DRIVE. Here is an example of CHART_CATALOG configuration for a two
node system:
LOCATION=catalog
LOCATION=catalog
Since the information for both nodes is the same this can be written:
[CHART_CATALOG]
LOCATION=catalog
[PORTFOLIO_MANAGER]
The PORTFOLIO_MANAGER profides storage for the portfolio feature. When chart portfolios are created they are stored in
this directory. There are two ways that the PORTFOLIO_MANAGER can be configured. The storage location can be located
on EACH computer or one compuiter can be used as portfolio storage for the the entire system. If the storage is local to each

computer then portfolios created on one computer are not usable on the other comuters. The proper method is to have only one
portfolio storage location for the entire system. This way any portfolio created on any computer is immediately available to
every computer. Here is an example of PORTFOLIO_MANAGER configuration for the two node system with the portfolio
storage on vms-2:
[SHARES@vms-2]
[CONNECTIONS@vms-1]
t:=vms-2,VMS
location=folios
location=t:
As with the previous examples we can eliminate some of the lines and make this configuration simpler:
[SHARES@vms-2]
[CONNECTIONS]
t:=vms-2,VMS
[PORTFOLIO_MANAGER]
location=t:
Now we can put all of this together to show a two node VMS-VT system with two CD ROM drives, both NOAA and ARCS
charts, chart catalog on each node, and one portfolio storage for the system:
[SHARES@vms-1]
CDROM=d:\,FULL
PERMIT=a:\,FULL
[SHARES@vms-1]
CDROM=d:\,FULL
[CONNECTIONS]
r:=vms-1,CDROM
s:=vms-2,CDROM
t:=vms-1,VMS
u:=vms-2,VMS
p:=vms-1,PERMIT
[ARCS_CHARTS]
storage=r:,s:
rootDir=charts\arcs
permitTransfer=p:
[BSB_RASTER_CHARTS]
NOAA=r:,s:
[CHART_CATALOG]
LOCATION=catalog
[PORTFOLIO_MANAGER]
location=u:

[FILE_MANAGER]
1=DRIVE A,a:,\
2=VMS-2,u:,\
[FILE_MANAGER]
1=DRIVE A,a:,\
2=VMS-1,t:,\

APPENDIX J
ADJUSTING ANALOG VALUES IN THE [ENGINEROOM_MANAGER] SECTION OF THE VMS-VT CONFIG.INI
FILE:
A) Two questions must be answered first: 1. What is the voltages that the analog to digital card in the VMS receives
(including whether these voltages will be + only, or +/- volts)? [The voltages coming into the isolation modules are converted
to different voltages which then go to the A/D card in the VMS - the voltage ranges going to the VMS is what is needed here.
Different conversion modules convert different inputs - which can be voltage ranges or 4 to 20 milliamp current loops- to
voltage ranges to send the VMS. These voltage ranges represent the range of values of the associated physical measuremen]
and 2. What is the range of values of the related measurement. [NOTE: The “MB31" Conversion module converts +/- 10 v
input to +/- 5 v output; the “MB32" conversion module converts 0mA to 20 mA on input to 0v / +5v on output which goes to
the A/D card in the VMS]
Examples: a rudder can be +35 degrees to - 35 degrees, or +/- 45 degrees (with negative values representing left
rudder angle); an engine RPM could have a range of 0 to 500 RPM, whereas a shaft RPM might be +/- 200 RPM; a propeller
pitch might have a range of 0 to 100%.
Furthermore, all of the above examples can be represented (at the VMS A to D board), by a range of voltages: +/- 5
volts, 0 to +5 volts, etc.
B) There are two numbers which convert the number of volts coming into the VMS to the values and units of the
related physical measurement. These are the multiplier and the offset. A simple and pure way of describing this is that the
NUMBER of volts (+ or -) are multiplied by the multiplier, and then the offset is added to give the result. The units of the result
is determined by the keyword used in the ENGINEROOM_MANAGER line (e.g. BOWTHRPITCHACT mean the actual bow
thruster pitch in percent, and R1ANG is rudder number 1's angle in RADIANS, with “-” meaning left rudder and “+” meaning
strb rudder). However, some examples are called for:
Example: on the drawings for a certain ship, the rudder angle comes into the isolation module as +/- 10 volts. The
drawing also shows that the isolation module converts this to +/- 5 volts. From some source (in this particular situation, I didn’t
know this until I was on the ship), it is determined that the ship has a 45 degree rudder (i.e. -45 degrees {left rudder} to +45
degrees). Therefore, a set of multiplier and offset must be found so that the number of volts times the multiplier plus the offset
will give the correct rudder angle (in radians!). This is what was calculated: since one volt (+ or -) equals 9 degrees [45 degrees
left would be represented by -5 volts, and 45 degrees right rudder would be shown as +5 volts], and 9 degrees is 0.157079632
radians then the multiplier is 0.157079632 and since the input is both positive and negative (volts) and the output is both
positive and negative (radians of rudder angle) then the offset is 0.0.
To help derive these two numbers (multiplier - which is the 3rd field after the “IN_” field in the line; and offset -
which is the following field), use the following formulas, (you must first determine the two things mentions in A above):
multiplier = (maxVal - minVal) / (maxVolt - minVolt)
offset = maxVal - (multiplier * maxVolt)
Using these formulas and the +/-45 degree rudder coming in as +/- 5 volts
: multiplier = (0.785398163 - (-0.785398163)) / (5 - (-5)) = 0.157079632
[note: +45 degrees = + 0.785398163 RADIANS - which is the
units needed]
And
Offset = 0.785398163 - (0.157079632 * 5) = 0.0.
Using these formulas for an example of a 0 to +5 volts input representing +/- 200 RPM:
multiplier = (200 - (-200)) / (5 - 0) = 80.0
[note: the units here are RPM]

offset = 200 - (80.0 * 5) = -200.0
C) One other point: The installer may have to fudge the multiplier (and offset?) to calibrate the actual system. For
example, in the +/-45 degree rudder example above, there was really two rudders on the ship - both were +/- 45 degree rudders
represented by +/- 5 volts coming out of the isolation module. However, I had to adjust the actual multiplier to get the rudder
angle readings on the VMS to match the actual (as per the bridge rudder angle indicators) rudder angles. The actual lines used
were as follows:
1=R1ANG,VMS@vms-2,DAS_1,IN4,0,0,0.1473,0.0,VOLTAGE
D) The breakdown of the fields in the analog line in the config.ini file is as follows:
EXAMPLE:
“1=” Is just a consecutive number.

“R1ANG,” Is the key (see the ANALOG data table in the [SEA_PAGE] section of this document ) indicating the use of
the input and its units.
“VMS,” Always the same.
“@vms-2," Indicates the VMS node where the A/D board is installed.
“DAS_1," Indicates the sequential number of A/D boards installed. I.e. If have 2 A/D boards on the same node, would
number them DAS_1 and DAS_2 etc. [***Note: in the setup2 program, the first A/D card is shown as
number 0!! But the first card in the config.ini file would be known as DAS_1 and etc. This is a potential
source of error - be aware!]
“IN4," Indicates the relative channel number on the given (see prior field) A/D card. Here, these are numbered
starting with 0 - which matches the channel numbering on the card, isolation module rack, and setup2.
“0,0,” Always same.
“0.1473,” This is the “multiplier” field - see above.
“0.0,” This is the “offset” field - see above.
“VOLTAGE” Always the same.

APPENDIX K
Information About Use of Portfolios
A Portfolio is a collection of charts. It is intended to be used by the operator to group charts that are used for a particular route
together.
For example, an operator might wish to create a portfolio of charts for a route from Genoa to Valencia. This portfolio would
contain:
charts for the Genoa harbor
charts showing approaches to the genoa harbor
charts covering the portion of the mediterranean to be traversed
charts for the approach to Valencia
charts for the Valencia harbor.
Portfolios are used for the following purposes:
1. When a portfolio is loaded as the active portfolio, the VMS will automatically use charts within that portfolio to cover the
area shown in the main chart view. (This is the area to the left of the menu that normally shows the chart data). The VMS will
automatically select a chart from this portfolio if the view is zoomed or offset.
2. A portfolio can be associated with a voyage plan. When the voyage plan is started, the associated portfolio is used as the
active portfolio. This will enforce the behavior described in 1. When a voyage plan is running, the active portfolio is locked.
This is so that the portfolio cannot be changed when a voyage plan is running which was considered a safety problem.
Portfolios can be created in the portfolio editor. A chart may be in multiple portfolios.
NOTE: ONLY CHARTS IN THE CURRENT PORTFOLIO ARE CHECKED FOR DANGER AREAS.

APPENDIX L
VMS-VT Speed Control Calibration Procedure
General
Each Speed Control Logical Device Handler (LDH) that is configured on the VMS network must be calibrated at
installation, and the individual calibration data must be entered in each LDH section in the CONFIG.INI file. At a minimum,
calibration data for Speed Order output must be determined for each LDH. Additionally, depending on the specific type of
speed control device configured, calibration data may also be required for Throttle input. Fuel Consumption input, Propeller
Pitch input, and Rpm input are future enhancements for some speed control interfaces and are not currently implemented.
The following speed control device configurations are supported, along with the calibration procedures applicable for
each configuration:
1. Kamewa Type I (Old) Speed Order output

Fuel Consumption input*
2. Kamewa Type II (New) Speed Order output

Throttle (Bridge Lever) input
Propeller Pitch input*
RPM input*
* available signals but currently not implemented or used.
For Speed Order output and Throttle input, two sets of calibration data for each parameter can be specified, each based
on ship loading conditions: Light and Loaded. In reality, it will be practical to measure data for only one of these conditions at
installation. Calibration data for the other condition should be measured on another voyage when actual load conditions allow.
Alternatives to measuring two sets of calibration data are to permanently use only one set of data for both conditions, or else to
estimate the calibration data for the other load condition based on data measured on the initial calibration.

1. Speed Order Output Calibration Procedure
1.1 Determine the load condition of the ship. Enter the following temporary data for the speed order calibration as follows
into the CONFIG.INI file, such that a speed order entered on the VMS (m/s) will be numerically equivalent to the
voltage output (volts) to the speed control device. For this example, light load is assumed. Remove or comment out
the ...FULL_LOAD calibration data, if present.
ORDER_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD=0,0,5,5
1.2 Configure the speed control for manual mode such that manual speed orders can be issued from the VMS. Also,
configure to allow min speed of 0 and a max speed of 5.
MANUAL_SPEED=ON
MIN_SPEED=0
MAX_SPEED=5
1.3 Activate speed control using the Speed Control menu. Enter a speed order on the VMS, wait for the ship speed to
stabilize, then record the values of the Ordered Speed on the VMS Speed Control menu and the corresponding Ship
Speed on the VMS Main menu. Repeat this procedure until measurements have been obtained covering the entire
range of desired speeds. The VMS will not give negative speed orders, so only positive speeds are of interest. As
many points as desired can be recorded.
Example:
Speed Order (m/s) =

Output Voltage (V) Actual Ship Speed (m/s)
0.0 0.0
0.5 5.8
1.0 9.4
1.5 14.6
... ....
5.0 26.7
1.4 Replace the temporary configuration data with the measured data as follows. The points represent a piecewise linear
fit of a calibration curve from which the VMS will convert ordered speed to voltage values.
ORDER_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD=0,0,5.8,0.5,9.4,1.0,14.6,1.5,...,26.7
1.5 Ensure that the MIN_SPEED and MAX_SPEED are set to desired values.
2. Throttle (Bridge Lever) Input Calibration Procedure
2.1 Determine the load condition of the ship. Enter the following temporary data for the speed order calibration as follows
into the CONFIG.INI file, such that an input throttle (bridge lever) value (m/s) will be numerically equivalent to the
voltage input (volts), and that a speed order entered on the VMS (m/s) will be numerically equivalent to the voltage
output (volts) to the speed control device. For this example, light load is assumed. Remove or comment out the
..FULL_LOAD calibration data, if present.
ORDER_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD=0,0,5,5
THROTTLE_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD=0,0,5,5
2.2 Configure speed to allow min speed of 0 and a max speed of 5.

MANUAL_SPEED=ON
MIN_SPEED=0
MAX_SPEED=5
2.3 Do not activate speed control. This will cause the current Throttle input value to be repeated as the Ordered Speed
output on the VMS Speed Control menu. Move the Throttle to a desired position, wait for the ship speed to stabilize,
then record the values of the Ordered Speed on the VMS Speed Control menu and the corresponding Ship Speed on
the VMS Main menu. Repeat this procedure until measurements have been obtained covering the entire range of
desired speeds. As many points as desired can be recorded.
Example:
Speed Order (m/s)

Throttle Voltage (V) Actual Ship Speed (m/s)
0.0 0.0
0.5 5.8
1.0 9.4
1.5 14.6
... ....
5.0 26.7
2.4 Replace the temporary Throttle configuration data with the measured data as follows. The points represent a
piecewise linear fit of a calibration curve from which the VMS will convert Throttle input voltage to speed values.
Also, restore the Speed Order calibration data to the previous values.
THROTTLE_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD=0,0,5.8,0.5,9.4,1.0,14.6,1.5,...,26.7,5.0
ORDER_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD={previous values}
2.5 Ensure that the MIN_SPEED and MAX_SPEED are set to desired values.
3. Fuel Consumption Input Calibration Procedure
Not implemented.
4. Propeller Pitch Input Calibration Procedure
Not Implemented
5. RPM Input Calibration Procedure
Not Implemented

APPENDIX M
Multiple NMEA Sentences for a Given Sensor
Starting with build 196, VMS will permit multiple NMEA talker and sentence ids for each sensor. At this time, this is
permitted for the following two situations:
o A device that sends more than one message and the VMS needs all of them.
o A device that can send one of several messages, but only one will be sent and used by the VMS.
It will not currently function when a device can send several types of the same message simultaneously. In this case, only one
talker and sentence id should be specified.
For example, with the new Trimble GPS, the GPS will send GPGGA and GPDTM. The VMS needs to receive both messages.
The config.ini line should read
1=GPS,VMS@cascades,NMEA,2,0,0,GPGGA,GPDTM
Both messages will be processed by the system. On the other hand, a GPS system that sends both GPGGA and GPGLL at all
times must be configured for only one of the message types.

APPENDIX N
Gain configuration for builds prior to 136
GAIN_SET<gain set index>=<name of the gain set for operator selection>,

,
,
<D term straight>,
,
,
<D term turn>,
<cross track error limit distance, (meters)>
Define the gain sets used to configure the PID track controller. There may be as many gain sets as
necessary. Please see APPENDIX B for a description of the PID track controller.
<gain set index>
index of the gain set being defined
<name of the gain set for operator selection>
a text string that is the name of this gain set as it will appear on the selection list

P term for tracking control during ship travel in a straight line

I term for tracking control during ship travel in a straight line
<D term straight>
D term for tracking control during ship travel in a straight line

P term for tracking control during ship travel in a turn

I term for tracking control during ship travel in a turn. This term should always be 0.0.
<D term turn>
D term for tracking control during ship travel in a turn
Ex. (for builds prior to 136)

[AUTOPILOT]
TYPE=ADG6000
;BASE_PERIOD=0.125
GAIN_SET1=SET 1, 0.13, 0.0006, -0.8, 0.255, 0.000, -1.6, 600
GAIN_SET2=SET 2, 0.13, 0.0006, -0.8, 0.255, 0.000, -1.6, 600

GAIN_SET3=SET 3, 0.13, 0.0006, -0.8, 0.255, 0.000, -1.6, 600

XTE_AVERAGING_SECONDS=10
LDH_PERIOD_SECONDS=1.0
PERIOD_SECONDS=1

analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 46-48, 79, 80

APPENDIX J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
APPENDIX K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
APPENDIX A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 53
APPENDIX B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 61, 86
APPENDIX C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-29, 32, 63
APPENDIX D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 26, 43, 64
APPENDIX E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 69
APPENDIX F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
APPENDIX G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 45, 72
APPENDIX H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
APPENDIX I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
APPENDIX J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 79
APPENDIX K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
APPENDIX L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
APPENDIX M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 27, 85
ARCS_CHARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 75
Autopilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 18-21, 23, 52, 54, 61, 62
CD ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 74, 75, 77
CHART_CATALOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 13, 15-18, 53, 55, 66, 67, 74-78, 81
chart catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 74, 76, 77
COM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 23
Comports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
COMPUTED_SETDRIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64-66, 76
CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 24, 26, 67, 70, 73, 74, 76
depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 23, 28, 29, 56, 59
Drift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 34, 35, 58
ENGINEROOM_MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
ERPNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 30, 56
FILE_MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 68, 74
gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 19-22, 30, 55, 61, 62, 74, 86, 87
ground speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 31
heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20, 31, 40, 59-62
humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
KEYBOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 69
LINKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 26
NAVLINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 23, 32-35, 38, 54, 56, 57, 66, 67, 74
NMEA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 23, 27-35, 37-39, 42, 54, 56, 57, 85
NONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
NOVELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 70, 73
offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-39, 63, 79-81
OWNSHIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 43, 44
period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 9, 18-22, 24, 25, 36, 41, 42, 50, 51, 54-57, 61, 70, 86, 87
portfolio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 17, 18, 74, 77, 81
PORTFOLIO_MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Portfolios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 17, 77, 81
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 33-35, 37, 40, 57, 61, 63, 84
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 34
Program Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 65
RASCAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 32-38, 56, 57
REGEDT32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
security_block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
SERIAL_OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 41
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 12, 13, 19, 20, 22, 30, 34-36, 38, 41, 50, 55, 58, 61, 64, 65, 79, 82-84, 86, 87
share . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 17, 64, 65, 67, 73, 74

SHARES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 75
speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-45, 72, 82-84
SSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
STYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 50, 58
Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 23, 24, 35-37, 54, 57
temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 21, 22, 25, 40, 51, 55, 57, 87
track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22, 27, 52, 55, 61-63, 86
VIDEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 50
Voyage Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 40, 51, 52, 60-62, 70, 81
water speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Wind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 38, 39, 58-60

Appendix B: Drawings
This appendix contains three drawings:
1) 1981181 sheet 1, Assembly Drawing for 26" Console. Note that drawing 1981180 (21" console) has a
similar equipment layout. Part number references are different, however.
2) 1981324, sheet 3.
3) 1982493, sheet 1.
Sperry Marine Proprietary - See Notice On Page i B-1

B-1
B-2
B-3

VMSVT

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

VMSVT

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sperry Marine, Inc.

Interfacing, Installation and Service of

Interfacing, Installation and Service of

Sperry Marine Inc.

JA26-5884 REVISION ORIGINAL NOVEMBER 1996

© Copyright 1996 by Sperry Marine Inc. All Rights Reserved.

How to Use This Manual

A CAUTION note calls attention to details of equipment operation or installation which,

KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS

DO NOT SERVICE OR ADJUST ALONE

Make sure that the power conditioner is securely bolted down.

DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT IN THE POWER CONDITIONER.

Before connecting/disconnecting cables to the controller, turn off power to the

If the DX5-133 is improperly installed, it will be destroyed. Be certain of the location

There is no protection against reverse polarity. Reversing the power supply

Chapter Title Page

1 Overview of the Voyage Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

2 Hardware Specifications and Component Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Chapter Title Page

2.2.1.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Chapter Title Page

Chapter Title Page

2.6 Floppy Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

Chapter Title Page

2.7.3.6 Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62

Chapter Title Page

TABLE OF CONTENTS - (Continued)

2.8.8.3 Monitor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83

Chapter Title Page

Chapter Title Page

Chapter Title Page

2.12.3.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-140

Chapter Title Page

2.13.3 4-Channel Analog Kit, Sperry Marine P/N 1820512 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-158

Chapter Title Page

2.13.7.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-172

Chapter Title Page

2.15.4 Vision Digitizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-186

Chapter Title Page

2.18 Vision Upgrade Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-211

3 Software Installation and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

4 Peripheral and Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Appendix A Configuring VMS-VT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Appendix B Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Figure Title Page

Figure Title Page

Figure 2-36: Assembly Components for 1812389 Display System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76

Figure Title Page

Figure 2-82: Analog I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-161

Table Title Page

Table Title Page

Table 3-1: Overview of VMS-VT Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Sperry Marine Proprietary - See Notice On Page i 1-1

! Navigation Station (NS)

1.1 Integrated Bridge Functionality

1-2 Sperry Marine Proprietary - See Notice On Page i

1.2 The Range of Integrated Bridge Systems

1.3 The VMS Products

Sperry Marine Proprietary - See Notice On Page i 1-3

1.3.1 VMS Part Number Structure

Figure 1-2: Voyage Management System Part Number Structure

1-4 Sperry Marine Proprietary - See Notice On Page i